Home

OpenOffice.org OpenOffice - 3.2 Getting Started Guide

1. Figure 48 Naming a new style created from a selection Dragging and dropping to create a style You can drag and drop a text selection into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new style Writer Select some text and drag it to the Styles and Formatting window If Paragraph Styles are active the paragraph style will be added to the list If Character Styles are active the character style will be added to the list Calc Drag a cell selection to the Styles and Formatting window to create cell styles Draw Impress Select and drag drawing objects to the Styles and Formatting window to create graphics styles Copying and moving styles You can copy or move styles from one template or document into another template or document in two ways e Using the Template Management dialog e Loading styles from a template or document 70 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Using the Template Management dialog To copy or move styles using the Template Management dialog 1 Click File gt Templates gt Organize 2 In the Template Management dialog Figure 49 set the lists at the bottom to either Templates or Documents as needed The default is Templates on the left and Documents on the right To copy styles from a file that is not open click the File button Tip When you return to this dialog both lists show the selected file as well as all the currently open documents 3 Open the folders and find the temp
2. OpenOf ficeorg3 Getting Started with OpenOffice org This PDF is designed to be read onscreen two pages at a time If you want to print a copy your PDF viewer should have an option for printing two pages on one sheet of paper but you may need to start with page 2 to get it to print facing pages correctly Print this cover page separately Copyright This document is Copyright 2005 2010 by its contributors as listed in the section titled Authors You may distribute it and or modify it under the terms of either the GNU General Public License version 3 or later or the Creative Commons Attribution License version 3 0 or later All trademarks within this guide belong to their legitimate Owners Authors Magnus Adielsson Richard Barnes Chris Bonde JiHui Choi Laurent Duperval Regina Henschel John Kane Michael Kotsarinis Ian Laurenson Alan Madden Andrew Pitonyak Iain Roberts Robert Scott Jim Taylor Barbara M Tobias Linda Worthington Feedback Thomas Astleitner Agnes Belzunce Daniel Carrera Richard Detwiler Spencer E Harpe Peter Hillier Brook Stefan A Keel Peter Kupfer Dan Lewis Michel Pinquier Carol Roberts Gary Schnabl Janet Swisher Alex Thurgood Jean Hollis Weber Michele Zarri Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to authors user faq openoffice org Publication date and software version Published 2 February 2010 Based on OpenOffice org 3 2 oAuthors
3. Insert Sheet Position Before current sheet After current sheet Cancel Sheet Help New sheet Mo of sheets 1 Mame Sheet4 From file Figure 109 Insert Sheet dialog Deleting sheets Sheets can be deleted individually or in groups Single sheet Right click on the tab of the sheet you want to delete and select Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or chose Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Multiple sheets To delete multiple sheets select them as described earlier then either right click over one of the tabs and select Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or choose Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Renaming sheets The default name for the a new sheet is SheetX where X is a number While this works for a small spreadsheet with only a few sheets it becomes awkward when there are many sheets To give a sheet a more meaningful name you can Enter the name in the Name box when you create the sheet or Right click on a sheet tab and choose Rename Sheet from the pop up menu replace the existing name with a better one New in 0003 1 Double click on a sheet tab to pop up the Rename Sheet dialog 150 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Sheet names must start with either a letter or a number other characters including spaces are not allowed Apart from the first character of the sheet name allowed characters are letters numbers spaces and the underl
4. Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 297 Dynamic movement of objects To move an object select it and then click within the object s border and hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse To drop the object at its new location release the mouse button During movement the shape of the object appears as dotted lines to help with tee ee repositioning If you have selected Guides when moving in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt View then during movement dotted lines 3 3 appear to help with repositioning Jt hee eee a Dynamic size modification of objects To change the size of an object or group of hs creas B 5 selected objects with the mouse you need to move one of the handles located around the selection As r shown in the following illustration the outline of the resulting new object appears as a dotted line The results differ depending on which handle you use If you choose a corner handle you will resize the object along two axes at the same time If you use a side handle the objects will only be resized along one axis If you press the Shift key at the same time as you carry out the resizing operation the size change will be carried out symmetrically with respect to the two axes this enables you to keep the aspect height length ratio of the object Note Rotation Rotating an object lets you move the object around an axis To do this dynamically
5. 3 Click on all of the subsequent columns or rows while holding down the Control key Entire sheet To select the entire sheet click on the small box between the A column header and the 1 row header see Figure 107 146 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Al a ae ij 2 Figure 107 Select All box Select All You can also press Control A to select the entire sheet Selecting sheets You can select either one or multiple sheets It can be advantageous to select multiple sheets at times when you want to make changes to many sheets at once Single sheet Click on the sheet tab for the sheet you want to select The active sheet becomes white see Figure 106 Multiple contiguous sheets To select multiple contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the last sheet tab 3 Hold down the Shift key and click on the sheet tab All the tabs between these two sheets will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets Multiple non contiguous sheets To select multiple non contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the second sheet tab 3 Hold down the Control key and click on the sheet tab 4 Repeat as necessary The selected tabs will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets All sheets Right click any one of the
6. When you draw a basic shape or select one for editing the Info field at the left side in the status bar changes to reflect the present action Line created Text frame xxyy selected and so on Figure 168 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons needed in the following sections The Text icon is also included A gt meer gt Figure 168 Part of the Drawing toolbar Drawing a straight line Let s start by drawing the simplest of shapes a straight line Click on the Line icon on the Drawing Toolbar and place the mouse pointer where you want to start the line Drag the mouse while keeping the button pressed Release the mouse button when you want to end the line A blue or green selection handle appears at each end of the line Showing that this is the currently selected object The colors depend on the selection mode green for simple selection and blue when in point edit mode This effect is easily apparent if on the Options toolbar both Simple Handles and Large Handles are switched on Starting Point Figure 169 Drawing a straight line Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 227 Hold down the Shift key while drawing the line to restrict the angle of the line to a multiple of 45 degrees 0 45 90 135 and so on Hold down the Control key Ctrl in PCs to snap the end of the line to the nearest grid point The effect of the Ctrl key depends on the settings of the Snap to Grid option on the View gt G
7. Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version OpenOffice org by default saves documents in OpenDocument Format ODF version 1 2 While this allows for improved functionality there may be backwards compatibility issues When a file saved in ODF 1 2 is opened in an earlier version of OpenOffice org using ODF 1 0 1 1 some of the advanced features may be lost Two notable examples are cross references to headings and the formatting of numbered lists If you plan to share documents with people who are still using older versions of OpenOffice org save the document using ODF version 1 0 1 1 Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 53 Size optimization for ODF format OpenOffice org documents are XML files When you select this option OOo writes the XML data without indents and line breaks If you want to be able to read the XML files in a text editor in a structured form deselect this option Document type If you routinely share documents with users of Microsoft Office you might want to change the Always save as attribute for documents to one of the Microsoft Office formats Although OOo can open files in the docx xlsx and pptx Note formats produced by Microsoft Office 2007 it cannot save in those formats This capability is planned for a future release VBA Properties Load Save options On the Load Save VBA Properties page Figure 36 you can choose whether to keep any macros in Microsoft Office documents that are
8. Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x page margins 113 218 parts of the main window 21 password protection 29 password protect PDF 334 pasting unformatted text 208 path options 43 PDF blank page export 331 digital rights management DRM 334 encrypt 334 EPS images 331 export documents to 329 form 331 image compression and resolution 330 initial view selection 332 pages to export 330 password protect 334 security settings 334 tagged 331 user interface settings 332 PDF import 416 PDF Options dialog 330 PDF A 1 331 pictures adding from file 342 linking 343 Pitonyak Andrew 16 pixels 217 positioning objects 247 Powerpoint see Impress 183 preloading OOo under Linux KDE 19 presentation first slide 197 formatting 197 modifying 200 output medium 196 planning 193 running 215 Slide design 195 title slide 197 transition effect 196 transitions 196 presentation styles 202 Presentation Wizard 194 presentations saving 431 primary key 258 primary key database 258 Print dialog 117 328 print file directly 117 328 print options general 42 Printer Options dialog 118 printer settings 53 printing black and white on color printer 119 book preview 120 booklet 120 brochure 120 choosing what to print 117 328 envelopes 121 grayscale on color printer 119 labels 124 previewing 119 print options 118 printer selection 117 328 Professional Template Pack extension 418 Q queries database aliases 301 creating using
9. StarWriter Web 4 0 and 5 0 vor Text OpenOffice org Writer Web txt Text Encoded OpenOffice org Writer Web txt Appendix B Background Information 431 Exporting to other formats OOo uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find what you want under Save As look under Export as well OpenOffice org can export files to XHTML In addition Draw and Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the Export button Frequently asked questions Is this software a demo version No this is a fully functioning software suite May I distribute OOo to anyone Yes How many computers may I install it on As many as you like May I sell it Yes May I use OpenOffice org in a business Yes Is OpenOffice available in my language OpenOffice org has been translated localized into over 40 languages so your language probably is supported Additionally there are over 70 spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries available for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface The dictionaries are available from the OpenOffice org website at http lingucomponent openoffi
10. To display the full Help system press F1 or select OpenOffice org Help from the Help menu In addition you can choose whether to activate Tips Extended tips and the Help Agent using Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General If Tips are enabled place the mouse pointer over any of the icons to see a Small box tooltip with a brief explanation of the icon s function For a more detailed explanation select Help gt What s This and hold the pointer over the icon Free online support The OpenOffice org community not only develops software but provides free volunteer based support Users of OOo can get comprehensive online support from community venues such as Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 15 newsgroups forums or mailing lists There are also numerous websites run by users that offer free tips and tutorials Free OpenOffice org support Users Mailing List Documentation Project Native Language Project Mac Support OpenOffice org Community Forum OpenOffice org Macro Information Free community support provided by a network of hundreds of experienced users You must be subscribed to post messages To subscribe send a blank email to users subscribe openoffice org List archives are here http www openoffice org servlets SummarizeList listName users Templates user guides how tos and other documentation http documentation openoffice org See also the Documentation w
11. You can download an editable version of this document from http oooauthors org english userguide3 published Contents Chapter 1 Introducing OPeNOPFICE OFG ccsssssscccccsccccccccccccccssssssccsscscecs 10 What is OPeNOPfiCE OFG cceccecencecceccncenseceeceeceeneeesseessenceenseeeness 11 The advantages of OpenOffice Org scsescscsreseseeceseresseressreresesseseeee 13 Minimum requirements eeesssseeeressccceseccosesscrseccesecceseeceeseeceseeees 14 How to get the software sssessrseesseressssereesssereesereresserereeseeereesseeee 14 How to inistall the SOM Wale n ccccsseivasctiescapivenepeucnegieonetcesnlaasieawienects 15 Extensions and add onS esssesessssesssserceressssssesoserereeesssssssseeeeeeees 15 How to Get help ssssessreesssssesssseresssrereeseseceeseseeesssereeesereeresereeesssseee 15 Star ET pe Ge OTO aes sarc nos ac ene sce sede EEEN EEEE EEEE anes 17 Parts OF the man WW peor aera ervscrauraciaenaccarnacdauseiaesacsaneacdaesavsnes 21 What are all these things Called cece cee ec eneeeneeesseeseenees 26 Starting a NEW GOCUMEN Cssccessssciemersancacsasaveasencesenmmeraareorassudcamawaedie a7 Opening an EXISTING COCUMENL ccccecceceececceceecensesseccecensesseseees 28 eV OOS aeeaiei E E EEEE TE 28 Renaming and deleting file sS cc cece cc eceececceccecensenseeeceesensensenes 30 Using the Open and Save AS idlOGS cc cece ceccec enc ee
12. ole Figure 113 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar with cursor 3 Hold down the left mouse button A gray line appears running across the page Drag the mouse downwards and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen splits into two views each with its own vertical scroll bar You can scroll the upper and lower parts independently Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 153 Notice in Figure 111 the Beta and the AO values are in the upper part of the window and other calculations are in the lower part Thus you can make changes to the Beta and AO values and watch their affects on the calculations in the lower half of the window You can also split the screen using a menu command Click in a Tip cell immediately below and to the right of where you wish the screen to be split and choose Window gt Split Splitting the screen vertically To split the screen vertically 1 Move the mouse pointer into the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen and place it over the small button on the right with the black triangle ne Split screen bar Figure 114 Split bar on horizontal scroll bar 2 Immediately to the right of this button is a thick black line Figure 114 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows 3 Hold down the left mouse button and a gray line appears running up the page Drag the mouse to the left and this line follows 4 Relea
13. 0 Array rem 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Paste 0 Array rem 13 Press Backspace to remove the extra space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name dim args17 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue args17 0 Name Text args17 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args17 rem 15 Press Home to move to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 16 Press down arrow to move to the next Line dim args19 1 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue args19 0 Name Count args19 0 Value 1 args19 1 Name Select args19 1 Value false dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoDown 0 args19 end sub Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 387 Cursor movements are used for all operations as opposed to searching If run on the DONTKNOW line the word weight is moved to the front of the line and the first The is changed to She This is not perfect but I should not have run the macro on the lines that did not have the proper format I need to do t
14. 286 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Writer documents To insert a field from a table opened in the data source window into a Writer document click on the field name the gray square at the top of the field list and with the left mouse button held down drag the field onto the document In a Writer document it will appear as lt FIELD gt where FIELD is the name of the field you dragged For example to enter the cost of meals and who paid for them on a certain date of a vacation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 Open the list of data sources F4 and select the Vacations table in the Automobile database Use this sentence On date our breakfast cost amount paid by name our lunch cost amount paid by name and our supper cost amount paid by name But only type On our breakfast cost paid by our lunch cost paid by and our supper cost paid by To replace date click the field name Date in the data source window and drag it to the right of the word On The result On lt Date gt If you have Field shadings turned on View gt Field Shading lt Date gt has a gray background Otherwise it does not To replace first amount click the Breakfast field name and drag it to the right of our breakfast cost Make sure you have the proper spacing between the field names and the words before and after them Result breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt To replace the first name click
15. 3 Type a name for the new folder and then press Enter OOo saves the folder with the name that you entered Deleting a template folder You cannot delete template folders supplied with OOo or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete template folders that you have created To delete a template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder that you want to delete 2 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes 82 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Moving a template To move a template from one template folder to another template folder 1 In the Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to move A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to move and drag it to the desired folder If you do not have the authority to delete templates from the source folder this action copies the template instead of moving it Deleting a template You cannot delete templates supplied with OOo or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete templates that you have created or imported To delete a template 1 In the Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to delete A list of the templates contained in that folder appears u
16. Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 7 Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and FONtWOTK ccccccccccccccccccccees 341 A ELOLA MTS A AEREE PEE EER ese P E NE EE ETE ET T TEEN 342 Adding images to a document sscssesessssreessrererssrereeserereerereereeses 342 Modifying and positioning graph icsS seesesesesseseeessreesssssereererereee 346 Using the OpenOffice org Gallery oesesesserescssrreseseesssreserererereees 346 Managing the Gallery oeeeesesereesssrrereererseererrsssssssssesssssesererereeeees 348 creand an Image a incre eect eee 351 Using OOo s drawing toolS sessseesesessreesssereesereresssseereesesereesseeees 39d Uag TO Oe on ciegicepeedcayaesaeweetcevassaesueteenaeseepneseeneaicnpueseencasaesassaceuass 355 Chapter 12 Creating Web PagesS ccseccecccecceccccccecscccocecoecccecoecseecsecsecceseo 363 ae shoe 0 0 tr te eee eee en ee ee ae E ee eee ee ere re 364 hors nbate anaa a oe eee he er ee eet A AE EET 364 TCU NG TVG GWE So eee neve cee EEEREN 367 Saving Writer documents as WED PaGES ccceceecesceccecenceseeeeeees 368 Saving Calc spreadsheets aS web PaGES ccccceeceseeeeeeeeenseeneees 373 Saving Impress presentations as web PaGEBG ccceceeceececeeceeeees 373 Saving Draw documents as web PaGES cceccceeceseeesseeeeenseeeees 377 Chapter 13 Getting Started With Macrog cccccccccccccccccsscscccscccccccces 378 NO TG sree acerc
17. Three toolbars are located under the Menu bar by default the Standard toolbar the Formatting toolbar and the Formula Bar The icons on these toolbars provide a wide range of common commands and functions You can also modify these toolbars as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 134 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x In the Formatting toolbar the three boxes on the left are the Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists see Figure 97 They show the current setting for the selected cell or area The Apply Style list may not be visible by default Click the down arrow to the right of each box to open the list v B7 U gt ic Default gt e arial 10 Al Je eE f ee ee ee a a Figure 97 Apply Style Font Name and Font Size boxes Formula bar On the left hand side of the Formula bar see Figure 98 is a small text box called the Name Box with a letter and number combination in it such as D7 This combination called the cell reference is the column letter and row number of the selected cell Al vik Input line i Name box Sum button Function button 2 Figure 98 Formula Bar To the right of the Name box are the the Function Wizard Sum and Function buttons Clicking the Function Wizard button opens a dialog from which you can search through a list of available functions This can be very useful because it also shows how the functions are formatted In a spreadsheet the term
18. Vacations table report To create a new report 1 Click the Reports icon in the Database list in the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window Figure 183 2 In the Tasks list click Use Wizard to Create Report The Report Wizard opens Step 1 Field selection 1 Select Table Vacations in the Tables or Queries dropdown list 2 Use the gt to move these fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Date Motel Tolls Miscellaneous Breakfast Lunch Supper and SnackCost Figure 244 Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 303 Tables or queries Table Vacations Available fields Fields in report snackCost i A Vv MiscPayment Figure 244 Adding fields to a report Step 2 Labeling fields Change any field labels you wish We will shorten Miscellaneous to Misc Click Next Step 3 Grouping Since we are grouping by the date use the gt button to move the Date field to the Grouping list Click Next Fields Groupings Motel Date Tolls Misc O Figure 245 Selecting fields for grouping data Step 4 Sort options We do not want to do any additional sorting Click Next Step 5 Choose layout Use default settings for the layout Click Next Step 6 Create report e Label the report Vacation Expenses e Select Static report e Click Finish 304 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x If you feel adventurous try selecting some of
19. cccsssssssccccccccccsssccccccccccccces 182 Wiat is INIP ESS genes eee eee One ne 183 Parts of the main Impress WINCOW ccc ccc ecceecceceecceeeceeeeueeeeues 183 Working with VICW S xiscssccaccendustnedeicwadnstnsdncsusduninedustncdantendracsoremtawetions 188 Creating a NEW presentation sssssssssereceeecrssssssesecorccesessssseeeeees 193 Formatting a presentation sssscssssssessecesssssseeceersssecccerssssseeceesss 197 Slide masters ANC StYIES cece cee cc esc eeceeeceenceesseectenssenceessessnens 201 Working with slide MASEL S iveiwsaseuonspeawessmnasamenonsenaenonimeiwedmnteennceaws 202 POA and formatting teXxtesscsrrrsisescisrccisereriisrreittri ii Tin ENTENIS 206 Croahng taDIOS ssierisererrirse rirnan irie EEEE EESE ti ELL Adding graphics spreadsheets charts and other objects 2l Adding comments to a preSentation ccccccesceecceceescenseeeeenseeees 213 Setting up the slide SHOW ccccccececcecencecceccecensesseceecenseessenseenes 214 Running the slide SHOW secacsescavaciseccasstnseeabsasiacaieaseuncrascacaepensiaadaens 215 Chapter 7 Getting Started With Draw cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscccscccces 216 A ee TF E ences A A E E 217 The Draw workspace sssssssssssssssssssseeccccereesssssssecccceresesessseseees al7 Positioning objects with snap functionS ssssessecsscssssseereeeeessesee 224 Positioning objects with helper LInes
20. including wrapping type borders backgrounds and columns e Numbering styles apply similar alignment numbering or bullet characters and fonts to numbered or bulleted lists e Cell styles include fonts alignment borders background number formats for example currency date number and cell protection e Graphics styles in drawings and presentations include line area Shadowing transparency font connectors dimensioning and other attributes e Presentation styles include attributes for font indents spacing alignment and tabs Different styles are available in the various components of OOo as listed in Table 1 OpenOffice org comes with many predefined styles You can use the styles as provided modify them or create new styles as described in this chapter 64 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Table 1 Styles available in OOo components Style Type Writer Draw Impress Page Paragraph Character Frame Numbering Cell Presentation Graphics included in Frame styles Applying styles OpenOffice org provides several ways for you to select styles to apply Using the Styles and Formatting window 1 Click the Styles and Formatting icon 4 located at the left hand end of the object bar or click Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 The Styles and Formatting window shows the types of styles available for the OOo component you are using Figure 45 shows the window for Writer wi
21. xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Data Interchange Format dif 430 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x dBase dbf SYLK slk Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 formats sdc and vor Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos HTML Document OpenOffice org Calc html and htm Pocket Excel pxl The Java Runtime Environment is required to use the mobile Note device filters for AportisDoc Palm Pocket Word and Pocket Excel Saving presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp otp and odg Impress 3 Can Save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation sxi OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation Template sti Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt and pps Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Template pot StarDraw StarImpress sda sdd and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop Impress can also export to MacroMedia Flash swf and any of the graphics formats listed for Draw Saving drawings Draw 3 can only save in the OpenDocument Drawing formats odg and otg the OpenOffice org 1 x formats sxd and std and StarDraw format sda sdd and vor However Draw can also export to BMP EMF EPS GIF JPEG MET PBM PCT PGM PNG PPM RAS SVG SVM TIFF WME and XPM Writer Web can save in these formats HTML document html and htm as HTML 4 0 Transitional OpenOffice org 1 0 HTML Template stw OpenOffice org 2 x HTML Template oth
22. 1 How do I add limits to my sum integral The sum and int commands can optionally take the parameters from and to These are used for lower and upper limits respectively These parameters can be used singly or together Limits for integrals are usually treated as subscripts and superscripts Result sum from k 1 to na k int from 0 to x f t dt Or int 0 x f t dt int from Re f Sum to infinity 2 n For more details on integrals and sums see the Math Objects Note chapter in the Writer Guide 322 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Brackets with matrices look ugly For background we start with an overview of the matrix command Markup Result matrix a b HC Hd C Rows are separated by two s and entries within each row are separated by one Note The first problem people have with matrices is that brackets do not scale with the matrix Markup Result matrix a b c d ae OOo Math provides scalable brackets That is the brackets grow in size to match the size of their contents Use the commands left and right to make scalable brackets Markup Result a b d left matrix a b c d right Tip Use left and right to obtain square brackets How do I make a derivative Making derivatives essentially comes down to one trick Tell OOo it s a fraction In other words you have to use the over command Combine this with either the letter d for a total
23. Adobe Reader Export comments Exports comments in Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes You may not want this In Impress exports a set of Comments pages following the set of slides Export automatically inserted blank pages If selected automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF This is best if you are printing the PDF double sided For example books usually have chapters set to always start on an odd Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 331 numbered right hand page When the previous chapter ends on an odd page OOo inserts a blank page between the two odd pages This option controls whether to export that blank page Initial View page of PDF Options dialog On the Initial View page you can choose how the PDF opens by default in a PDF viewer The selections should be self explanatory General Initial View User Interface Links Security Panes Page only Bookmarks and page Thumbnails and page Open on page 1 Magnification Fitin window Fit width Fit visible Zoom factor 100 Fage layout Default Single page O Continuous Continuous facing Figure 273 Initial View page of PDF Options dialog User Interface page of PDF Options dialog On the User Interface page Figure 274 you can choose more settings to control how a PDF viewer displays the file Some of these choices are particularly useful when you are creating a PDF to be used as a
24. Click Insert Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 129 Using bookmarks Bookmarks are listed in the Navigator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse click You can cross reference to bookmarks and create hyperlinks to bookmarks as described above 1 Select the text you want to bookmark Click Insert gt Bookmark 2 On the Insert Bookmark dialog the larger box lists any previously defined bookmarks Type a name for this bookmark in the top box and then click OK to save Insert Bookmark Bookmarks insertpagenum usedocproperties Cancel Figure 95 Inserting a bookmark Using mail merge Writer provides very useful features to create and print e Multiple copies of a document to send to a list of different recipients form letters e Mailing labels e Envelopes All these facilities though different in application are based around the concept of a registered data source a spreadsheet or database containing the name and address records and other information from which is derived the variable information necessary to their function Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide describes the process 130 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Using master documents Master documents are typically used for producing long documents such as a book a thesis or a long report or when different people are writing different chapters or other parts of the full document so you do
25. Click the Control icon in the Design Form toolbar to open the Properties dialog d Change the Background color selection from Default to Light cyan This is a dropdown list Close the Properties dialog 2 Select the other labels in the same way and then change their background color 3 To change the font color for the headings a Open Styles and Formating using the F11 key Make sure the Paragraph icon is selected at the left end of the icons in Figure 214 Date Odometer Tolls y Motel Payment Misc Misc Payment y a E MRODB at Complimentary close Default First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 ee S Figure 214 Styles and Formating window b Right click the Heading 2 style to open a pop up window and select Modify from this menu c Inthe Paragraph Style Heading 2 dialog click the Font Effects tab Change Font color from Automatic to Light Cyan d Click OK to close the dialog Learning how to use styles can be very helpful at times By using styles we changed the font color for all three headings at one time There are other methods of changing the font color but they require repeating the same steps for each heading Tip Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 281 4 To add a graphic to the background a Right click on the background and select Page from the pop up menu b On the Page Style dialog click the Background tab change
26. Default Figure 212 Apply Styles list Use the spacebar to move the cursor to where you want the heading to start Type the heading Meals Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of snack area Type the heading Snacks Use the Enter key to move the cursor between the Supper control and the subform Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of the subform Type the heading Fuel Data If you know how to use styles you can open the Styles and Formatting window using F11 Right clicking the Heading 2 paragraph style allows you to modify the appearance of all three headings See Chapter 6 of the Writer Guide for details Step 10 Change the background of a form The background for a form can be a color or a graphic picture You can use any of the colors in the Color Table at Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors If you know how to create custom colors you can use them You can also use a picture graphic file as the background If you choose a dark background you many need to change many of the labels and headings so they can be seen 1 Select the labels of the top row of controls a Control click the Date label 280 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x b Control shift click the rest of the labels of the top row The border will gradually grow to the right as you do this until all the labels are enclosed in it FE ES ae Figure 213 Selecting multiple labels at one time c
27. Move Down m fmtMiscellaneous Automatic Sort MiscPayment fmtBreakfast txtBPayment fmiLunch txtL Payment ree fmtsupper txtSPayment fmtsnackNo Cancel fmtsnackCost txtSnPayment txtMiscNotes Help Hi W Figure 217 Tab order for the main form 5 Save and close the form 6 Save the database Creating forms and subforms in Design View This method requires using the Form Controls and Form Design toolbars extensively These techniques are beyond the scope of this document Instructions for creating forms using Design view will be described in the Database Guide Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 283 Accessing other data sources OpenOffice org allows data sources to be accessed and then linked into OOo documents For example a mail merge links an external document containing a list of names and addresses into a letter with one copy of the letter being generated for each entry To access a data source that is not a odb file 1 File gt New gt Database opens the Database Wizard window 2 Select Connect to an existing database Click the arrow next to the Database type field and select the database type from the dropdown list Click Next 3 Click Browse and select the database Click Next 4 Accept the default settings Register the database for me and Open the database for editing Click Finish Name and save the database in the location of your choice Accessing a spreadsheet as a data source
28. Online resources The following links and references contain information regarding macro programming http user services openoffice org OOo forums well supported http api openoffice org docs common ref com sun star module ix html official IDL reference here you ll find almost every command with a description http wiki services openoffice org wiki Documentation BASIC Guide official OpenOffice org BASIC Programming Guide http wiki services openoffice org wiki Documentation DevGuide Open Office org Developers Guide official OpenOffice org Developers Guide contains a detailed explanation Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 401 http www pitonyak org oo php Andrew Pitonyak s macro page http www pitonyak org AndrewMacro odt numerous examples of working macros http www pitonyak org book Andrew Pitonyak s book on macros http www pitonyak org database numerous macro examples using Base http docs sun com app docs doc 819 0439 Sun s book on macro programming very well written and laid out the OOo BASIC Programming Guide and the OOo Developers Guide are derived from this book Printed and eBook materials The following books are available for purchase in both printed and eBook form from their publishers Andrew Pitonyak s OpenOffice org Macros Explained See http www hentzenwerke com catalog oome htm Dr Mark Alexander Bain s Learn OpenOffice org Spreadsheet Macro P
29. Zoom from the menu bar to display the Zoom amp View Layout dialog Figure 63 where you can set the same options as on the Status bar In Web Layout view most of the choices are not available g Zoom amp View Layout oom factor View layout Optimal Automatic Fit width and height Single page Fit width Columns I Variable ee Figure 63 Choosing Zoom and View Layout options Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 91 Moving quickly through a document In addition to the navigation features of the Status bar described above you can use the main Navigator window and the Navigation toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org In Writer you can also display the Navigation toolbar by clicking on the small Navigation icon near the lower right hand corner of the window below the vertical scroll bar as shown in Figure 64 Previous 4 kai Figure 64 Navigation icons The Navigation toolbar Figure 65 shows icons for all the object types shown in the Navigator plus some extras for example the results of a Find command Figure 65 Navigation toolbar Click an icon to select that object type Now all the Previous and Next icons in the Navigator itself in the Navigation Toolbar and on the scroll bar will jump to the next object of the selected type This is particularly helpful for finding items like index entries which can be difficult to see in the tex
30. click the field and use the single arrow pointing to the left To start over click the double arrow pointing to the left 5 Select the settings for your table Use the default settings as in Figure 222 6 Click OK Save the document Calc spreadsheets There are two ways to enter data in a Calc spreadsheet One enters the data into the spreadsheet cells The other creates records in the spreadsheet just like they are done in creating a form in a database While you can directly access the data in the spreadsheet cells you can only see the data in the records created in the spreadsheet Entering data directly to the spreadsheet cells uses the Data to Text icon as we did to make a table in a Writer document But differences exist in these two situations The steps are straightforward 1 Click the cell of the spreadsheet which you want to be the top left of your data including the column names Use F4 to open the database source window and select the table whose data you want to use Select the rows of data you want to add to the spreadsheet 2 3 4 5 Click the gray box to the left of the row you want to select if only selecting one row That row is highlighted To select multiple rows hold down the Control key while clicking the gray box of the rows you need Those rows are highlighted To select all the rows click the gray box in the upper left corner All rows are highlighted Click the Data to text
31. formatting toolbar is not showing enable it selecting View gt Toolbar gt Formatting in the menu bar Tip Creating lists in other text boxes To create a list in a text box follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the text box 2 Click the Bullets On Off button on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it by selecting View gt Toolbar gt Formatting from the menu bar 3 Type the text and press Enter to start a new bulleted line Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 209 4 The default list type is a bulleted list The mechanisms to change the appearance of the list are explained on page 210 Creating a new outline level 1 If necessary press Enter to begin a new line 2 Press Tab Each time you press Tab the line indents to the next outline level Pressing Enter creates a new line at the same level as the previous one To return to the previous level press Shift Tab In the AutoLayout text boxes promoting or demoting an item in the list corresponds to applying a different outline style so the second outline level corresponds to Outline 2 style the third to Outline 3 style and so on Unlike styles in Writer do not try to change the outline level by selecting the text and then clicking the desired outline style Due to the way the presentation styles work it is not possible to apply them in this way Note Changing the appearance of the list You can f
32. p Cut Copy d Delete Insert Rows Description Primary Key Field Properties AutoValue Yes we Auto increment state IDENTITY Length 10 Format example o ma Figure 186 Defining the primary key field The primary key serves only one purpose to uniquely identify Note the record Any name can be used for this field We have used FuelID for convenience so we know to which table it belongs 260 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 3 All other fields Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType e Type the next field name in the Field Name column e Select the Field Type for each field For Date use Date DATE Press the D key to select it PaymentType uses Text VARCHAR the default setting All other fields use Number NUMERIC Press the N key once to select it e FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer need changes in the Field Properties section Figure 187 FuelQuantity Change Length to 6 and Decimal places to 3 Many fuel pumps measure fuel to thousands of a gallon in the USA where I live Odometer Change the Length to 10 and the Decimal places to 1 FuelCost Change the Length to 5 and Decimal places to 2 Click the Format example button Figure This opens the Field Format window Figure 188 Use Currency as the Category and your currency as the Format My currency has two decimal places Use what is appropriate for yours gt Fed Name Fie
33. presentation or a kiosk type display Window options section e Resize window to initial page Causes the PDF viewer window to resize to fit the first page of the PDF e Center window on screen Causes the PDF viewer window to be centered on the computer screen e Open in full screen mode Causes the PDF viewer to open full screen instead of in a smaller window 332 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x e Display document title Causes the PDF viewer to display the document s title in the title bar General Initial View User Interface Links Security Window options F Center window on screen _ Open in full screen mode Display document tite User interface options _ Hide menubar _ Hide toolbar _ Hide window controls Transitions Bookmarks All bookmark levels Visible bookmark levels Figure 274 User Interface page of PDF Options dialog User interface options section e Hide menubar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the menu bar e Hide toolbar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the toolbar Hide window controls Causes the PDF viewer to hide other window controls Transitions In Impress displays slide transition effects as their respective PDF effects Bookmarks Select how many heading levels are displayed as bookmarks if Export bookmarks is selected on the General page Links page of PDF Options dialog On this page you can choose how links are exported to PDF Export boo
34. status was changed Print form letters Changing the page count Save In funtitled1 gt ox Cancel Help Reset Figure 311 Assign macro to an application level event 398 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x A common use is to assign the Open Document event to call a specific macro The macro then performs certain setup tasks for the document Select the desired event and click the Macro button to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 312 Select the desired macro and click OK to assign the macro to the event The Events tab shows that the event has been assigned to a macro see Figure 313 When the document opens the PrintHello macro is run Many objects in a document can be set to call macros when events occur The most common usage is to add a control such as a button into a document Even double clicking on a graphic opens a dialog with a Macros tab that allows you to assign a macro to an event Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name CopyNumtTocoll OK CopyNumToCol EnterMyName Cancel ExpornmtPDF Main Help ModifyOPtions ee EF amp My Macros Andrewlava ChangeStyles O H A HA A Description Figure 312 Assign macro to the document open event Event Assigned Action Assign Start Application Close Application Create Document Open Document D Stand
35. the Category list then select Send Default Fax in the Commands list Click Add Now you can see the new icon in the Commands list 6 In the Commands list click the up or down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it Click OK and then click Close Your toolbar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 411 Category Commands Application al 9 Print Al add tl P Print File Directly ads i Print options page view Edit E Options ite Printer Settings BASIC ky Properties Help Insert d Reload Documents H Save Format Controls ml Save s Z Navigate pend Default Fax Table Versions Drawing Graphic hal gt Figure 320 Adding a Send Fax command to a toolbar Assigning shortcut keys In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in Appendix A you can define your own You can assign shortcuts to standard OOo functions or your own macros and save them for use with the entire OpenOffice org suite Be careful when reassigning your operating system s or OOo s predefined shortcut keys Many key assignments are universally f understood shortcuts such as F1 for Help and are always Caution expected to provide certain results Although you can easily A reset the shortcut key assignments to the OOo defaults changing som
36. use the red handles as you do when changing the size of the object 238 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because the rotation occurs in 3D space and not in one plane See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide regarding rotation when Edit Points mode is active Note To rotate an object or a group of objects drag the red corner handle points of the selection with the mouse The mouse cursor takes the Shape of an arc of a circle with an arrow at each end A dotted outline of the object being rotated appears and the current angle of rotation is dynamically shown in the status bar Rotations are made about an axis which is displayed as a small symbol You can move the axis of rotation with the mouse as shown in Figure 177 If you hold down the Shift key during the rotation the operation will be carried out in increments of 15 Mouse cursor _ C Centre of Rotation Figure 177 Rotating an object Inclination and perspective To slant or shear objects use the red handles located at the midpoint of an edge of the selected objects The mouse pointer changes to a when the pointer hovers over one of these midpoint handles Not every object can be slanted Basic shapes can be rotated but not slanted The slant axis is the point directly opposite the midpoint handle to be used for shearing the object This point stays f
37. want to apply 2 Click the Fill Format mode icon A 3 To apply a paragraph page or frame style hover the mouse over the paragraph page or frame and click To apply a character style hold down the mouse button while selecting the characters Clicking on a word applies the character style for that word Repeat step 3 until you made all the changes for that style 4 To quit Fill Format mode click the Fill Format mode icon again or press the Esc key When this mode is active a right click anywhere in the document undoes the last Fill Format action Be careful not to accidentally right click and thus undo actions you want to keep Caution A Using the Apply Style list After you have used a style at least once in a document the style name appears on the Apply Style list at the left hand end of the Formatting toolbar next to the Styles and Formatting icon 66 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x You can open this list and click once on the style you want or you can use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list and then press Enter to apply the highlighted style Select More at the bottom of the list to open the Styles and Tip Formatting window File Edit View Insert Format Ee E Eb D Ge L e Default Tirr Clear formatting Figure 46 The Apply Style list on the Formatting toolbar Using keyboard shortcuts Some keyboard shortcuts for applying styles are predefined For example
38. 1 Select starting document what type of document do you wank to create 2 Select document type Letter 3 Select address list E mail message 4 Create salutation Sofi z es to a group of recipients The e mail messag E 2 Her messages can be personalized For each recipient Figure 279 Select document type Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 337 3 On the third page click the Select Address List button Select the required address list even if only one is shown and then click OK If the address list you need is not shown here you can click Add to find it and add it to the list Steps Insert address block 1 Select starting document 1 Select the address list containing the address data Select Address List vou want to use This data is needed to create the 2 Select document type address block 3 Select address list 4 Create salutation Select Address List Select an address list Click Add to select recipients From a different lisk IF you do not have an 6 Edit document address list you can create one by clicking Create 7 Personalize document Your recipients are currently selected From 6 Save print or send Addresses Figure 280 Selecting an address list 4 Back on the Select address list page click Next On the Create Salutation page deselect This document should contain a Salutation Mail Merge Wizard Steps Create a salutation 1
39. 4 Get joined fields This step is for tables or queries for which no relationship has been defined Because we have already defined the relationship the wizard skips this step It is possible to create a relationship between two tables that is Note based upon more than one pair of fields How to do that and why is discussed in the Base Guide When selecting a pair of fields from two tables to use as a relationship they have to have the same field type That is why we used the Date field from both tables both their field types are Date DATE Whether a single pair of fields from two tables are chosen as Caution the relationship or two or more pairs are chosen certain A requirements must be met for the form to work e No field from the subform can be the Primary key for its table FuelID cannot be used e Each pair of joined fields must have the same file type e One of the fields from the main form must be the Primary key for its table Date would have to be used Step 5 Arrange controls Fach control in a form consists of two parts label and field This step in creating the form determines where a control s label and field are placed in relationship with each other The four choices from left to Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 269 right are Columnar left Columnar Labels on top As Data Sheet and In Blocks Labels Above 1 Arrangement of the main form Arrange the controls on your form Click the secon
40. Accessing a spreadsheet is similar to accessing other databases 1 Choose File gt New gt Database 2 Select Connect to an existing database Select Spreadsheet as the Database type 3 Click Browse to locate the spreadsheet you want to access If the spreadsheet is password protected check the Password required box Click Next 4 If the spreadsheet requires a user s name enter it If a password is also required check its box Click Next Using this method of accessing a spreadsheet you cannot change anything in the spreadsheet You can only view the contents of the spreadsheet run queries and create reports based upon the data already entered into the spreadsheet Note All changes in a spreadsheet must be made in the spreadsheet itself using Calc After modifying the spreadsheet and saving it you will see the changes in the database If you create and save an additional sheet in your spreadsheet the database will have a new table the next time you access it 284 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Registering odb databases Databases created by OOo2 x or later are in the odb OpenDocument Base format Other programs can also produce databases in this format Registered a odb database is simple 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Base gt Databases 2 Under Registered databases click New 3 Browse to where the database is located 4 Make sure the registered name is correct 5
41. Appendix B Background InformatioOn ecseccececceccecccecceccccececoeccececcesecceoe 424 lng iagelel ticle 6 tr E PEE a E E ATE eee eee 425 A short history of OPeEnOPficCe OFg c cece cece cece cc eeeeeneeeeseeeenseeees 425 The OpenOffice org COMMUMNILY cceccecceccecccenceesseeseeeceensesness 425 How is OpenOffice org liCENSE ccccceccesccesccecsenceesceesseeseenes 426 What iS open SOULCE ccc cece ccc ecc eee eeeeeceeseeneeeseessecseeseeeeseeeeuneees 426 What is OpenDocument ssssessssssseeeeesssssssseseeecccesssssseseeeeeeeeessees 427 File formats OOo can Ope n ssssssssssssssssssssssccccccressssssseccccceeesessse 427 File formats OOo can SAVE tO esssesessseessseessseressseeeeeesssssssreeereees 429 Exporting to gC Bal Gai Gl 10 Lc hc eee ee ee ee a 432 Frequently asked QueStions cccccescscccceccesteecsenceensessseessenseenses 432 TI vcore vince EEE AE S E T E E E E A E A T 434 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 9 OpenOf Ticeorg3 Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org What is OpenOffice org OpenOffice org OOo is both a software product and a community of volunteers who produce and support the software Because someone else owns the trademark OpenOffice the Note correct name for both the open source project and its software is OpenOffice org The OpenOffice org software is a freely available full featured office product
42. Area options Area icon Opens a dialog with seven tabs Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps e Area tab Choose from the predefined list a color bitmap gradient or hatching pattern to fill the selected object e Shadow tab Set the shadow properties of the selected object Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 359 e Transparency tab Set the transparency properties of the selected object e Colors tab Modify the available colors or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Gradients tab Modify the available gradients or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Hatching tab Modify the available hatching patterns or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Bitmaps tab Create simple bitmap patterns and import bitmaps to make them available on the Area tab Area Style Filling boxes Select the type of the fill of the selected object For more detailed settings use the Area icon Positioning options Rotate icon Rotate the selected object manually using the mouse to drag the object To Foreground icon Move the selected object in front of the text To Background icon Move the selected object behind the text Alignment icon Modify the alignment of the selected objects Bring to front icon Move the selected object in front of the others Send to back icon Move the selected object behind the others Change Anchor icon Choose between anchoring options e To Page The object keeps
43. Chapter amp Getting Started with Base OpenOffice org s Database Component Introduction A data source or database is a collection of pieces of information that can be accessed or managed by OpenOffice org OOo For example a list of names and addresses is a data source that could be used for producing a mail merge letter A shop stock list could be a data source managed through OOo OpenOffice org uses the terms Data Source and Database to Note refer to the same thing which could be a database such as MySQL or dBase or a spreadsheet or text document holding data This chapter covers creating a database showing what is contained in a database and how the different parts are used by OOo It also covers using the Base component of OOo to register other data sources A data source can be a database spreadsheet or text document OOo Base uses the HSQL database engine All of the files Note created by this engine are kept in one zipped file The database forms are included in this zipped file A database consists of a number of fields that contain the individual pieces of data Each table of the database is a group of fields When creating a table you also determine the characteristics of each field in the table Forms are for data entry into the fields of one or more tables associated with the form They can also be used for viewing fields from one or more tables associated with the form A query creates a new table f
44. Customize dialog 408 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x To customize toolbars 1 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed toolbar for the application for example Writer or for a selected document 2 In the section OpenOffice org lt name of the program example Writer gt Toolbars select from the Toolbar drop down list the toolbar that you want to customize 3 You can create a new toolbar by clicking on the New button or customize existing toolbars by clicking on the Toolbar or Modify buttons and add commands to a toolbar by clicking on the Add button These actions are described below 4 When you have finished making all your changes click OK to save them Creating a new toolbar To create a new toolbar 1 Choose Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars from the menu bar 2 Click New On the Name dialog type the new toolbar s name and choose from the Save In drop down list where to save this changed menu for the application for example Writer or for a selected document Toolbar Name New Toolbar 1 Save In OOo dev Writer we Help The new toolbar now appears on the list of toolbars in the Customize dialog After creating a new toolbar you need to add some commands to it as described below O Cancel PK pollen Adding a command to a toolbar If the list of available buttons for a toolbar does not include all the commands you want on that toolbar you can add co
45. Default Formatting Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 105 Autoformatting You can set Writer to automatically format parts of a document according to the choices made on the Options page of the AutoCorrect dialog Iools gt AutoCorrect Options Ti If you notice unexpected formatting changes occurring in your Ip document this is the first place to look for the cause Some common unwanted or unexpected formatting changes include e Horizontal lines If you type three or more hyphens underscores or equal signs on a line and then press Enter the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph e Bulleted and numbered lists A bulleted list is created when you type a hyphen star or plus sign followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph A numbered list is created when you type a number followed by a period followed by a Space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles To turn autoformatting on or off choose Format gt AutoFormat and select or deselect the items on the list Creating numbered or bulleted lists There are several ways to create numbered or bulleted lists e Use autoformatting as described above e Use list numbering styles as described in Chapters 6 In
46. Drawing an ellipse There are three other ways to draw an ellipse or circle e Hold down the Shift key while drawing to force the ellipse to be a circle e Hold down the Alt key to draw a symmetrical ellipse or circle from the center instead of dragging corner to corner e Hold down the Control key while drawing to snap the ellipse or circle to grid lines If you first press and hold the Control key and then click on one of the icons Line Rectangle Ellipse or Text an object is Note drawn automatically in the work area the size shape and color are all standard values These attributes can be changed later if desired Drawing curves The tools for drawing curves or polygons are on the toolbar that appears when you click the Curve icon on the Drawing toolbar This toolbar contains eight tools Figure 173 Hovering the mouse over this icon gives a tooltip of Curve If Note you convert the icon to a floating toolbar however the title is Lines as shown in Figure 173 Polygon Filled Polygon 45 Filled J ille k t Ls ind Pa g Cia Freeform Line Curve Polygon Polygon 45 Figure 173 Floating Curves toolbar incorrectly titled Lines 230 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x If you move the mouse cursor over one of the icons a tooltip pops up with a description of the function For a more detailed description of the handling of B zier curves curves and filled curves see Chapter 10 Adv
47. Figure 21 Select this option to smooth the screen appearance of text Enter the smallest font size to apply antialiasing Menu icons in menus Causes icons as well as words to be visible in menus 40 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Font Lists Show preview of fonts Causes the font list to look like Figure 22 Left with the font names Shown as an example of the font with the option deselected the font list shows only the font names not their formatting Figure 22 Right The fonts you will see listed are those that are installed on your system Bitstream Vera Sang u B Bitstream Vera Sang 11 ATArial f Al Arial Black At Arial Narrow AtAvantGarde Bk BT ATAvaniGarde Md BI Bitstream Vera Sans Mono Bitstream Vera Serif At BakerSienet BT Figure 22 Font list Left With preview Right Without preview Font Lists Show font history Causes the last five fonts you have assigned to the current document are displayed at the top of the font list Graphics output Use hardware acceleration Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display Not supported on all operating systems and OOo distributions Graphics output Use anti aliasing Enables and disables anti aliasing which makes the display of most graphical objects look smoother and with fewer artifacts Not Supported on all operating systems and OOo distributions Ti Press Shift Control R to
48. Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Print Printer Mame HF LaserJet SL Status Default printer Ready Type HF Laserjet SL Location CEIRI Comment Print to File Print range Copies al Number of copies l te Pages 1 Figure 271 The Print dialog Exporting to PDF OpenOffice org can export documents to PDF Portable Document Format This industry standard file format is ideal for sending the file to someone else to view using Adobe Reader or other PDF viewers The process and dialogs are the same for Writer Calc Impress and Draw with a few minor differences mentioned in this section Quick export to PDF Click the Export Directly as PDF icon to export the entire document using your default PDF settings You are asked to enter the file name and location for the PDF file but you do not get a chance to choose a page range the image compression or other options Controlling PDF content and quality For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF use File gt Export as PDF The PDF Options dialog opens This dialog has five pages General Initial View User Interface Links and Security Make your selections and then click Export Then you are asked to enter the location and file name of the PDF to be created and click Save to export the file Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 329 General page of PDF Options dialog On the General page you can choose which pages
49. Handouts in the Contents section and then click OK Click OK to close the Print dialog 192 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating a new presentation This section describes how to set up a new presentation The settings selected here are general they apply to all the slides Planning a presentation The first thing to do is to decide what you are going to do with the presentation For example putting a group of digital photos together in a presentation requires very little planning However using a presentation to increase the knowledge of others about your topic requires much more planning You need to ask and answer many questions before you begin creating a presentation If you are not acquainted with creating presentations the answers will be more general Those who have created a variety of presentations in the past will want to have more specific answers Who is to see the presentation How will it be used What is the Subject matter What should be in its outline How detailed should the outline be Will an audio file be played Is animation desirable How Should the transition between slides be handled These are some of the many questions that should be asked answered and written down before creating the presentation Sound and animation are more advanced topics and are explained in the Impress Guide Again it is not always necessary at this point to have specific answers to every question Making an out
50. Highlight the newly created module In the upper left corner type the macro name to use such as EnterMyname and then click Save to save the macro If you followed all of the steps the Standard library now contains a module named Recorded which contains the EnterMyName macro as Shown in Figure 302 When OOo creates a new module it automatically adds the macro named Main as seen in Figure 302 Running the macro Use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 302 Select the newly created macro and click Run 380 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name Pitonyak G EnterMyName Run PitonyakDatabase Main PitonyakUtil Cancel Readability RemoveFormattin Help Schedule ScriptBindingLibrar Standard Modulel g Template Tools ArayDyn sj a Description HAAA Bh Bi Sh Se E E3 HEE EAEI Figure 302 Select your macro and click Run There are other methods to run a macro For example use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the macro organizer which contains a Run button as well The author an avid macro writer prefers the macro organizer because the dialog usually opens faster but the selection process may be slightly slower View
51. If the database is not registered it will not be accessible to the Note other OOo components such as Writer and Calc If the database is registered other components can access it Save the new database with the name Automobile This opens the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window Figure 183 shows part of this window Create Table in Design View Description Use Wizard to Create Table f Create View Reports Figure 183 Creating database tables Every time the Automobile database is opened the Automobile OpenOffice org Base window opens Changes can then be made to the database The title for this window is always lt database name gt OpenOffice org Base Tip As you create a database you should save your work regularly f This means more than just saving what you have just created You Caution must save the whole database as well A For example when you create your first table you must save it before you can close it When the table is first saved it is also made part of the database 254 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating database tables In a database a table stores information for a group of things we call fields For example a table might hold an address book a stock list a phone book or a price list A database can have from one to several tables To work with tables click the Tables icon in the Database list or press Alt a The three tasks that you can perform
52. New Roman bold centered and you start saying Title because you have defined the Title style to have those characteristics In other words styles means that you shift the emphasis from what the text or page or other element looks like to what the text is Styles help improve consistency in a document They also make major formatting changes easy For example you may decide to change the indentation of all paragraphs or change the font of all titles For a long document this simple task can be prohibitive Styles make the task easy Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 63 In addition styles are used by OpenOffice org for many processes even if you are not aware of them For example Writer relies on heading styles or other styles you specify when it compiles a table of contents Some common examples of style use are given in Examples of style use on page 84 OpenOffice org supports the following types of styles e Page styles include margins headers and footers borders and backgrounds In Calc page styles also include the sequence for printing sheets e Paragraph styles control all aspects of a paragraph s appearance such as text alignment tab stops line spacing and borders and can include character formatting e Character styles affect selected text within a paragraph such as the font and size of text or bold and italic formats e Frame styles are used to format graphic and text frames
53. Pattern AutoFit width and height Figure 127 Choosing an AutoFormat 3 To select which properties number format font alignment borders pattern autofit width and height to include in an AutoFormat click More Select or deselect the required options 4 Click OK If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents choose View gt Value Highlighting from the menu bar Defining a new AutoFormat You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets 1 Format a sheet 2 Choose Edit gt Select All 3 Choose Format gt AutoFormat The Add button is now active 4 Click Add 5 In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog type a meaningful name for the new format 6 Click OK to save The new format is now available in the Format list in the AutoFormat dialog Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 167 Formatting spreadsheets using themes Calc comes with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets It is not possible to add themes to Calc and they cannot be modified However you can modify their styles after you apply them to a spreadsheet To apply a theme to a spreadsheet 1 Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools toolbar If this toolbar is not visible you can show it using View gt Toolbars gt Tools The Theme Selection dialog appears This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet Tools T x 2 In the Theme Selecti
54. Select starting document This document should contain a salutation z Select document type 3 Select address list Dear Mrs lt Last Name Dear Mr lt Last Mame 6 Edit document Gender 7 Personalize document 5 Save print or send Figure 281 Deselecting a salutation 338 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 5 In the left hand list click 8 Save print or send OOo displays a Creating documents message and then displays the Save print or send page of the Wizard 6 Select Send merged document as E Mail The lower part of the page changes to show e mail settings choices Mail Merge Wizard Steps Save print or send the document 1 Select starting document Select one of the options below 2 Select document type Save starting document Select address list Save merged document io Print merged document Create salutation fa E Mail settings Edit document To E mail Address ka Copy bo Personalize document Subject Send as HTML Message ka test email message odt mm J co Save print or send Send all documents C From 1 5 Send documents Figure 282 Sending a document as an email message 7 Type a subject for your email and click Send documents OOo sends the e mails Digital signing of documents To sign a document digitally you need a personal key the certificate A personal key is stored on your compute
55. Toolbars On the menu that appears choose which toolbars you want to display Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 219 You can also select the icons that you wish to appear on the corresponding toolbar On the View gt Toolbars menu choose Customize click on the Toolbars tab select the toolbar you want to change and then select the desired icons for that toolbar Many toolbar icons are marked with a small arrow The arrow indicates that this icon has additional functions Click this arrow and a submenu or a toolbar appears showing its additional functions see Figure 160 Most icons marked with a small arrow can become floating toolbars To make a submenu into a floating toolbar click the area at the top of the Submenu drag it across the screen and then release the mouse button Floating toolbars can be docked on an edge of the screen or within one of the existing toolbar areas at the top of the screen as described in Chapter 1 Click here and drag to float the toolbar Figure 160 An arrow next to a button indicates additional functions Click the arrow on the title bar of a floating toolbar to display additional functions see Figure 161 Zoom x ka ee Nic Zoom In E E il E Sh Visible Buttons aid Z Customize Toolbar Zoom Out Dock Toolbar wf ae Zoom 100 Dock All Toolbars gt Zoom Previous et Zoom Next Close Toolbar hi P v bh Zoom Page Width v tr Optimal v E Object
56. a Wizard 293 creating using Design View 296 joined fields 269 search conditions 295 Query Wizard database 293 Quickstarter 18 193 Quickstarter enabling 39 quotation marks 156 R raster graphics 247 rectangle drawing 229 regular expressions 97 relationships database 264 REM 382 remove manual formatting 205 remove personal information on saving 48 renaming files 30 replacement table font 45 Report Builder extension 417 Report Wizard database 303 RGB 222 right to left RTL layout 13 right click context menus 25 rotating an object 238 rulers Draw 218 Index 439 S Save as web page 368 save AutoRecovery information 53 Save original Basic code 54 save relative URLs 53 saving files 28 scaling factor user interface 40 scanner 345 screen font antialiasing 40 security 29 security options 46 selecting objects 236 selection clipboard 41 selection modes 235 send backward 237 send document as e mail 336 setup options 36 Shadows 242 Shared extension 416 Shortcut keys 420 422 size optimization 54 Slanting an object 239 Slide Design dialog 203 Slide master 200 adding text 205 apply 203 author information 206 create 203 description 201 fields 205 loading additional 203 modifying 204 Slide show organizing 214 See presentation 1383 Slide Sorter view Impress 190 Slides adding text 200 hide 201 inserting 198 layouts 198 master 200 201 modifying 200 Slides pane Impress 183 Snap functi
57. a greater length Base uses VCHAR as the field format for text fields This format only uses the actual number of characters in a field up to the limit set So a field containing 20 characters will only use space for 20 characters even if the limit is set at 100 Two album titles containing 25 and 32 characters respectively will use space for 25 and 32 characters and not 100 characters e Artist Use the Default setting And since music has artists set Entry Required to Yes e Date Purchased Field type default date setting Entry required Should be No You may not know the date e Format Only change the Entry Required setting from No to Yes e Notes No changes are required Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 257 e Numberoffracks Change the Field Type to Tiny Integer TINYINT Your allowable number of tracks will be 999 Small Integer SMALLINT would allow 99999 tracks if you needed more than 999 tracks e Photo Use the default settings When you have finished click Next Fach field has a Field Type which must be specified Types include text integer date and decimal If the field is going to have general information in it for example a name or a description Note use text If the field will always contain a number for example a price the type should be decimal or another numerical field The wizard picks the right field type so to get an idea of how this works see what the wizard has chosen for different
58. and column breaks can exist on the same page When you want to remove them you have to remove each one individually This may be confusing at times because although there may be a column break set on the page when you go to Edit gt Manual Break Column break may be Note grayed out In order to remove the break you have to be in the cell next to the break So for example if you set the column break while you are in H15 you can not remove it if you are in cell D15 However you can remove it from any cell in column H Headers and footers Headers and footers are predefined pieces of text that are printed at the top or bottom of a sheet outside of the sheet area They are set the same way Headers and footers are assigned to a page style You can define more than one page style for a spreadsheet and assign different page styles to different sheets For more about page styles see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide To set a header or footer 1 Navigate to the sheet that you want to set the header or footer for Select Format gt Page 2 Select the Header or Footer tab See Figure 134 3 Select the Header on option 178 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x From here you can also set the margins the spacing and height for the header or footer You can check the AutoFit height box to have the height of the header or footer automatically adjust Margin Changing the size of the left or right m
59. and not visible they can still be selected To select an object that is covered by another object hold down the Alt key and click the object To select an object that is covered by several objects hold down the Alt key and click through the objects until you reach the required underlying object To cycle through the objects in reverse order hold down the Alt Shift keys when you click To help in making accurate selections you can check the number and type of the selected objects shown at the left of the Status bar There may be some variation in the use of the Alt key on different operating systems If the Alt key on your system does not operate as described above use the Tab key method described below Note To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard press Tab to cycle through the objects stopping at the object you wish to select To cycle through the objects in reverse order press Shift Tab This may not be practical if you have a large number of objects in your drawing 236 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x When you click on the selected object its outline appears briefly through the objects on top of the selected object In the illustration to the right the square located beneath the circle was selected in this way the circle was made transparent in order to see the square Arranging objects In a complex drawing you may have objects stacked up one on top of the other wit
60. and so on will not be overridden by subsequent changes to the slide master There are cases however where it is desirable to revert a manually modified element of the slide to the style defined in the slide master to do that select that element and choose Format gt Default Formatting from the menu bar Sometimes you may want to try several of the available layouts to see which one is more suitable for your contents Applying a layout only requires that you open the Layouts section of the Tasks pane and double click on the new layout Alternatively you can right click on the desired layout thumbnail and select Apply to selected slide from the pop up menu Adding text to all slides Some of the supplied slide masters have text objects in the footer You can add other text objects to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer 1 Choose View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar 2 On the Drawing toolbar see Figure 147 select the Text icon 3 Click once and drag in the master page to draw a text object and then type or paste your text into the object or add fields as described below 4 Choose View gt Normal when you are finished To add a field such as the date or page number to a text object in the header or footer choose Insert gt Fields and select the required field from the submenu If you want to edit a field in your slide select it and choose Edit gt Fields The fields you c
61. args1 Finally the end of the subroutine end sub Creating a macro I usually ask two questions before recording a macro 1 Can the task be written as a simple set of commands 2 Can the steps be arranged such that the last command leaves the cursor ready for the next command A complicated example I frequently copy rows and columns of data from a web site and format them as a table in a text document First I copy the table from the web site to the clipboard To avoid strange formatting and fonts I paste the text into a Writer document as unformatted text I reformat the text with tabs between columns so that I can use Table gt Convert gt Text to Table to convert to a table I inspect the text to see if I can record a macro to format the text remember the two questions that I ask As an example I copied the FontWeight constants group from the OpenOffice org web site The 384 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x first column indicates the constant name Each name is followed by a Space and a tab DONTKNOW _ The font weight is not specified known THIN specifies a 50 font weight ULTRALIGHT specifies a 60 font weight LIGHT Specifies a 75 font weight SEMILIGHT specifies a 90 font weight NORMAL Specifies a normal font weight SEMIBOLD specifies a 110 font weight BOLD specifies a 150 font weight ULTRABOLD specifies a 175 font weight BLACK specifies a 200 font weight I want the f
62. by Linux Mandrake or Gentoo you can start Writer by typing at the command line oowriter Although the command syntax differs the effect is identical it starts OOo with an empty Writer document 20 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Parts of the main window The main window is similar in each component of OOo although some details vary See the chapters in this book about Writer Calc Draw and Impress for descriptions of those details Common features include the menu bar the standard toolbar and the formatting toolbar at the top of the window and the status bar at the bottom Menu bar The Menu bar is located across the top of the OOo window just below the Title bar When you choose one of the menus listed below a Submenu drops down to show commands File contains commands that apply to the entire document such as Open Save and Export as PDF Edit contains commands for editing the document such as Undo xxx where xxx is the command to undo and Find amp Replace It also contains commands to cut copy and paste selected parts of your document View contains commands for controlling the display of the document such as Zoom and Web Layout Insert contains commands for inserting elements into your document such as Header Footer and Picture Format contains commands such as Styles and Formatting and AutoCorrect for formatting the layout of your document Table shows all commands to insert and edit a ta
63. can have a different arrowhead or no arrowhead Arrowheads are only applicable to lines They have no effect on an object s border i i e lt _ lt all EASA AK ARAE IE ARAA AA Customizing line and arrow styles You can modify the line and arrow styles and create your own See Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide for details Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 241 Editing the inside fill of an object The OpenOffice org term for the inside of an object is Area fill The area fill of an object can be a uniform color a gradient a hatching ora pattern from an image It can be made partly or fully transparent and can throw a shadow In most cases you will choose one of the standard fill options which are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar You can also define your own area fills see Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Adding a shadow In Draw shadows are considered as an area property Click on the Shadow icon on the Line and Filling toolbar You can customize the position distance color and transparency of shadows using Format gt Area gt Shadow or by right clicking on the selected object and choosing Area gt Shadow Adding transparency You can make objects partly or fully transparent or even with a varying degree of transparency as a gradient Using styles Suppose that you want to apply the sam
64. can write information on a piece of paper so that you can look at it later A variable like a piece of paper contains information that can be changed and read The DIM statement is similar to setting aside a piece of paper to be used to store a message or note The EnterMyName macro defines the variables document and dispatcher as type object Other common variable types include string integer and date A third variable named args1 is an array of property values A variable of type array allows a single variable to contain multiple values similar to storing multiple pages in a single book Values in an array are usually numbered starting from zero The number in the parentheses indicates the highest usable number to access a storage location In this example there is only one value and it is numbered zero Pulling the macro together The following details are very complete it is not important to understand all of the details The first line defines the start of the macro sub EnterMyName Declare two variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object ThisComponent refers to the current document The CurrentController property of a document refers to a service that controls the document For example when you type it is the current controller that notices The current controller then dispatches the changes to the document s frame The Frame property of a controller returns a main frame for a document Therefore t
65. care must be taken Creating tables For displaying tabular data you can insert basic tables directly into your slides in a number of ways e Use the Insert gt Table menu option e With the Table button on the main toolbar E 7 e With the Table Design button on the table toolbar e By selecting a Style option from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane Each method opens the Insert Table dialog shown in Figure 153 Alternatively clicking on the black arrow next to the Table button displays a graphic that you can drag and select the number of rows and columns for your table Insert Table Number of columns 5 TA Number of rows Figure 153 Creating a table with the Insert Table dialog Selecting from any of the styles in the Table Design section of N the Tasks pane creates a table based on that style If you ote create a table by another method you can still apply a style of your choice later With the table selected the Table toolbar should appear If it does not you can access it by selecting View gt Toolbars gt Table The Table Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 211 toolbar offers many of the same buttons as the table toolbar in Writer with the exception of functions like Sort and Sum for performing calculations For those functions you need to use a spreadsheet inserted from Calc discussed below After the table is created you can modify it in much the same ways as you would m
66. choice is lt default gt Chapter 12 Creating WebPages 369 Web Wizard Introduction This Web Wizard is to aid you in publishing documents on the Internet Documents It will convert the documents so that they can be viewed by a web browser In addition it Will generate a Table of Contents page with links For easy access bo the documents The Web Wizard will also allow you bo customize the design and layout of your web site You Will be able to keep the documents you have published on the web up to date and add or remove documents at any time Choose settings For the Web Wizard lt default gt al 2 Choose or browse to the document you would like to format The Title Summary and Author information is picked up from the document s properties if necessary edit it Click Next Steps Select the documents you want to publish Introduction Web site content Export to File Format ane 0117G5 CreatingWebPages sx HTML ba Main layout Document information Title Style Creating Web Pages Layout details J Web site information Summary Preview Fields to edit Chapter Title Description tab gt Title Chanker SuhhiHe leer TeFineed Author Add m Remove 3 Chose a layout for the web site by clicking on the layout boxes Click Next 370 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Web Wizard Steps Choose a layout for the table of contents of your web site Introduction Layou
67. corresponding Microsoft OLE objects when a document is saved in a Microsoft format mnemonic S for save MathsType to OpenOffice org Maths OpenOffice org Maths to MathsType pn WinWord to OpenOffice org Writer OpenOffice org Writer to WinWord Excel to OpenOffice org Calc OpenOffice org Calc to Excel PowerPoint to OpenOffice org Impress OpenOffice org Impress to PowerPoint TT TT L Load and convert the object 5 Convert and save the object Figure 37 Choosing Load Save Microsoft Office options HTML compatibility Load Save options Choices made on the Load Save HTML Compatibility page Figure 38 affect HTML pages imported into OpenOffice org and those exported from OOo See HTML documents importing exporting in the Help for more information Font sizes Use these fields to define the respective font sizes for the HTML lt font size 1 gt to lt font size 7 gt tags if they are used in the HTML pages Many pages no longer use these tags Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 55 Font sizes Import _ Use English USAY locale for numbers size 1 7 Size 7 10 L Import unknown HTML tags as fields Size 3 2 _ Ignore font settings ize 3 j A Export Size 4 14 Netscape Navigator Size 5 18 J L OpenOffice org Basic Size 6 24 amp Display warning Size 7 36 _ Print layout Copy local graphics to Internet C
68. dashes and non breaking spaces and hyphens To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line press Control spacebar after the first word to insert a non breaking space In cases where you do not want the hyphen to appear at the end of a line for example in a number such as 123 4567 you can press Shift Control minus sign to insert a non breaking hyphen To enter en and em dashes you can use the Replace dashes option under Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Options Figure 79 This option replaces two hyphens under certain conditions with the corresponding dash is an en dash that is a dash the width of the letter n in the font you are using Type at least one character a space one or two hyphens another space and at least one more letter then a space The one or two hyphens will be replaced by an en dash is an em dash that is a dash the width of the letter m in the font you are using Type at least one character two hyphens and at least one more character then a space The two hyphens will be replaced by an em dash See the Help for more details For other methods of inserting dashes see the Writer Guide Setting tab stops and indents The horizontal ruler shows both the default tab stops and any tab stops that you have defined Tab settings affect indentation of full paragraphs using the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent icons on the Formatting toolbar as well as indentation of parts of
69. data only The data alone can be removed from a cell without removing any of the formatting of the cell Click in the cell to select it and then press the Backspace key Removing data and formatting The data and the formatting can be removed from a cell at the same time Press the Delete key or right click and choose Delete Contents or use Edit gt Delete Contents to open the Delete Contents dialog Figure 120 From this dialog the different aspects of the cell can be deleted To delete everything in a cell contents and format check Delete all Delete Contents ES selection O A Text Cancel Numbers Help pK Date amp time Formulas Notes Ej Formats E Objects Figure 120 Delete Contents dialog Replacing all the data in a cell To remove data and insert new data simply type over the old data The new data will retain the original formatting Changing part of the data in a cell Sometimes it is necessary to change the contents of cell without removing all of the contents for example if the phrase See Dick run is in a cell and it needs to be changed to See Dick run fast It is often useful to do this without deleting the old cell contents first Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 161 The process is the similar to the one described above but you need to place the cursor inside the cell You can do this in two ways Using the keyboard After selecting the appropriate cell press the F2
70. database or table from which you can draw the envelope information if desired See Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide for details on how to print envelopes from a database 3 On the Format page Figure 73 verify or edit the positioning of the addressee and the sender information The preview area on the lower right shows the effect of your positioning choices To format the text of these blocks click the Edit buttons to the right In the drop down list you have two choices Character and Paragraph Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 121 e In Character you can choose Fonts Sizes Fonts Effects Underlining Color Position Rotating scaling Hyperlink Background and more e In Paragraph you can choose Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Tabs Drop Caps Borders and Backgrounds Envelope Envelope Format Printer Addressee Database Table Database field Igal Sender JA5 Joe Smith United States of America ga T gt Figure 87 Choosing addressee and sender information Envelope Format Printer Sddressee Position From left Eg Ea Format from top j Ea Sender Position From left a rt Format From top a Size Format width Height Figure 88 Choosing positioning and size of elements 122 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 4 In the lower left of this page choose the envelope format
71. derivative or the partial command for a partial derivative to achieve the effect of a derivative Notice that we have to use braces squiggly brackets to make Note the derivative Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 323 Result df over dx partial f over partial y partial 2 f over partial t 2 How do I align my equations at the equals sign OOo Math does not have a command for aligning equations on a particular character but you can use a matrix to do this as shown below Result matrix alignr x y alignl 2 alignr x alignl 2 y The empty braces around are necessary because is a binary operator and thus needs an expression on each side You can reduce the spacing around if you change the inter column Spacing of the matrix 1 With the equation editor open choose Format gt Spacing from the menu bar Matrix Line spacing Column spacing Figure 269 Changing spacing in a matrix formula 324 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 2 In the Spacing dialog Figure 269 click the Category button and select Matrices in the drop down menu 3 Enter 0 for Column spacing and click OK Numbering equations Equation numbering is one of OOo Math s best hidden features The steps are simple but obscure 1 Start a new line 2 Type fn and then press F3 The fn is replaced by a numbered formula E mc 2 Now you can doubl
72. document 388 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x The dispatch framework can also be used to send commands back to the UI User Interface For example after saving the document the File Save command is disabled As soon as the document has been changed the File Save command is enabled If we see a dispatch command it is text such as uno InsertObject or uno GoToStartOfLine The command is sent to the document s frame and the frame passes on the command until an object is found that can handle the command How the macro recorder uses the dispatch framework The macro recorder records the generated dispatches The recorder is relatively simple to implement and the same commands that are issued are recorded for later use The problem is that not all dispatched commands are complete For example inserting an object generates the following code dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertObject 0 Array It is not possible to specify what kind of object to create or insert If an object is inserted from a file you cannot specify which file to insert I recorded a macro and used Tools gt Options to open and modify configuration items The generated macro does not record any configuration changes in fact the generated code is commented so it will not even be run rem dispatcher executeDispatch document uno OptionsTreeDialog 0 Array If a dialog is opened the command to open the dialo
73. e Background color gradient hatching or bitmap e Background objects for example add a logo or decorative graphics e Size placement and contents of header and footer elements to appear on every slide e Size and placement of default frames for slide titles and content Before working on the slide master make sure that the Styles and Formatting window is open To select the slide master for modification 1 Select View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar This unlocks the properties of the slide master so you can edit it 2 Click Master Pages in the Tasks pane This gives you access to the pre packaged slide masters 3 Click on the slide master you want to modify among the ones available Figure 153 4 Make changes as required then click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar For details see Chapter 2 of the Impress Guide 5 Save the file before continuing 204 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Any changes made to one slide when in Master View mode will appear on all slides using this slide master Always make sure you close Master View and return to Normal view before working on any of the presentation slides Select View gt Normal from the menu bar or click Close Master View in the Master View toolbar to return to the normal slide view Caution A The changes made to one of the slides in Normal view for example changes to the bullet point style or the color of the title area
74. e Using the Page Style dialog can specify margins to two decimal places If you change the margins using the rulers the new margins affect the page style and will be shown in the Page Style dialog Note the next time you open it Because the page style is affected the changed margins apply to all pages using that style To change margins using the rulers 1 The gray sections of the rulers are the margins see Figure 81 Put the mouse cursor over the line between the gray and white sections The pointer turns into a double headed arrow 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to move the margin Figure 81 Moving the margins Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 113 The small arrows on the ruler are used for indenting paragraphs They are often in the same place as the page margins so you need to be careful to move the margin marker not the arrows Place the mouse pointer between the arrows and when the pointer turns into a double headed arrow you can move the margin the indent arrows will move with it Tip To change margins using the Page Style dialog 1 Right click anywhere on the page and select Page from the pop up menu 2 On the Page tab of the dialog type the required distances in the Margins boxes Adding comments to a document Authors and reviewers often use comments formerly called notes to exchange ideas ask for suggestions or mark items needing attention To inse
75. file types then when you double click on a Microsoft Word document it opens in Microsoft Word if Word is installed on your computer Excel files open in Excel and PowerPoint files open in PowerPoint You can use another method to open Microsoft Office files in OOo and Save in those formats from OOo See Opening an existing document on page 28 for more information Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 17 Using the Quickstarter under Windows The Quickstarter is an icon that is placed in the Windows system tray during system startup It indicates that OpenOffice org has been loaded and is ready to use The Quickstarter loads library DLL files required by OOo thus shortening the startup time for OOo components by about half If the Quickstarter is disabled see Reactivating the Quickstarter if you want to enable it Using the Quickstarter icon Right click the Quickstarter icon in the system tray to open a pop up menu from which you can open a new document open the Templates and Documents dialog or choose an existing document to open You can also double click the Quickstarter icon to display the Templates and Documents dialog FS Text Document HA Spreadsheet ia Presentation a Drawing fa Database EA Formula F From Template Open Document w Load Openoffice org During System Start Up Exit Quickstarter we Cle Figure 1 Quickstarter pop up menu Disabling the Qu
76. from the drop down list The width and height of the selected envelope then show in the boxes below the selected format If you chose a pre existing format just verify these sizes If you chose User defined in the Format list then you can edit the sizes 5 After formatting go to the Printer page Figure 89 to choose printer options such as envelope orientation and shifting You may need to experiment a bit to see what works best for your printer You can also choose a different printer or alter printer setup for example specify the tray that holds envelopes for this print job Envelope Format Printer Envelope orientation CS 2 4 fl iu i t t t t t t Print From top Print From bottom Shift right 0 00 a 4 Shift down 0 00 Current printer Figure 89 Choosing printer options for an envelope 6 When you have finished formatting and are ready to print click either the New Doc or Insert button to finish New Doc makes only an envelope or starts a new document with the envelope Insert inserts the envelope into an existing document as page 1 To not proceed with this envelope click Cancel or press the Esc key You can also click Reset to remove your changes and return to the original settings when the dialog opened 7 When the Envelope dialog closes you are returned to your document which now has the envelope in the same file as the document Save this file before you do anything else To pri
77. images to a document Images can be added to a document in several ways by inserting an image file directly from a graphics program or a scanner or from the OOo Gallery Inserting an image file When the image is in a file stored on the computer you can insert it into an OOo document using either of the following methods Drag and drop 1 Open a file browser window and locate the image you want to insert 2 Drag the image into the Writer document and drop it where you want it to appear A faint vertical line marks where the image will be dropped This method embeds saves a copy of the image file in the Writer document To link the file instead of embedding it hold down the Control Shift keys while dragging the image 342 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Insert Picture dialog 1 Click in the OOo document where you want the image to appear 2 Choose Insert gt Picture gt From File from the menu bar 3 On the Insert Picture dialog navigate to the file to be inserted select it and click Open Insert picture D Profiles pgs02c My Documents My Pictures Title Type Size Date modified 17 8KB 06 20 2006 21 31 08 _ iss ned20qi jpg Graphics jpa 5779 Bytes 07 05 2006 20 39 06 eal republican jpg Graphics jpa 72 39KB 06 08 2006 18 01 4 zal s2_01 jpq Graphics jpg 8043 Bytes 04 16 2006 18 45 57 eal m_005_jpq jpa Graphics jpg 1877 Bytes 06 10 2006 04 29 1 sl United States gif Graphics g
78. in Writer Control 0O applies the Text body style Control 1 applies the Heading 1 style and Control 2 applies the Heading 2 style You can modify these shortcuts and create your own see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for instructions Modifying styles OpenOffice org provides several ways to modify styles both the predefined styles and custom styles that you create e Changing a style using the Style dialog e Updating a style from a selection e Use AutoUpdate paragraph and frame styles only e Load or copy styles from another document or template Any changes you make to a style are effective only in the current document To change styles in more than one document you need to change the template or copy the styles into the other documents as described on page 70 Tip Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 67 Changing a style using the Style dialog To change an existing style using the Style dialog right click on the required style in the Styles and Formatting window and select Modify from the pop up menu The Style dialog displayed depends on the type of style selected Each style dialog has several tabs See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Updating a style from a selection To update a style from a selection 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 In the document select an item that has the format you want to adopt as a Style Caution Make sure that there are unique propert
79. in the box of the Visible cell as in Figure 242 Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Quanity Begin End Table End Reading End Reading Fuel Visible E4 Fa x Visible a LETETT Figure 242 Making a field invisible in a q 5 Rerun the query Figure 243 uery run Quanity Begin End Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 vim 04 2 f45 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 207 1 13 67 Figure 243 Query run with aliases Step 10 Close save and name the query My suggestion for a name is Fuel Economy There are obviously other calculations that can be made in this query such as cost per distance traveled and how much of the cost belongs to each of the payments types Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 301 To fully use queries requires a knowledge of set operations N unions intersections and or complements and any ote combinations of these Having a copy of the Hsqldb User Guide available from http hsqldb org is also extremely useful Creating reports Reports provide information found in the database in a useful way In this they are similar to queries Reports are generated from the database s tables or queries They can contain all of the fields of the table or query or just a selected group of fields Reports can be static or dynamic Static reports contain the data in the selected fields at the time the report was cr
80. is sufficient while for printing it is generally preferable to use at least 300 or 600 dpi depending on the capability of the printer Higher dpi settings greatly increase the size of the exported file EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as Note previews EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders General section PDF A 1 PDF A is an ISO standard established in 2005 for long term preservation of documents by embedding all the pieces necessary for faithful reproduction such as fonts while forbidding other elements including forms security encryption and tagged PDF If you select PDF A 1 the forbidden elements are greyed out not available Tagged PDF Exports special tags into the corresponding PDF tags Some tags that are exported are table of contents hyperlinks and controls This option can increase file sizes Significantly Create PDF form Submit format Choose the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file This setting overrides the control s URL property that you set in the document There is only one common setting valid for the whole PDF document PDF sends the whole document FDF sends the control contents HTML and XML Most often you will choose the PDF format Export bookmarks Exports headings in Writer documents and page names in Impress and Draw documents as bookmarks a table of contents list displayed by some PDF readers including
81. is open in any component of OOo for example a Writer you can use the New Document button E at the left hand end of the Standard toolbar If you already have a spreadsheet open clicking this button opens a new spreadsheet in a new window From any other component of OOo for example Writer click the down arrow and choose spreadsheet From the keyboard If you already have a spreadsheet open you can press Control N to open a new spreadsheet in a new window From a template Calc documents can also be created from templates Follow the above procedures but instead of choosing Spreadsheet choose Templates and Documents On the Templates and Documents window navigate to the appropriate folder and double click on the required template A new spreadsheet based on the selected template opens Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 137 Opening existing spreadsheets You can open an existing spreadsheet from the Start Center or from any component of OOo From the Start Center Click the Open a document icon BZ From the Menu bar Choose File gt Open From the toolbar Click the Open button on the Standard toolbar From the keyboard Press the key combination Contro l O Fach of these options displays the Open dialog where you can locate the spreadsheet that you want to open You can also use the Recent Documents list to open a spreadsheet This list is located on the File menu directly below Open The list
82. its permissions can be restricted See Figure 276 After you set a password for permissions the other choices on the Security page become available e With both the open password and permission password set the PDF can only be opened with the correct password and its permissions can be restricted Figure 277 shows the pop up dialog displayed when you click the Set open password button on the Security page of the PDF Options dialog 334 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x General Initial View User Interface Links Security Sek open password Mo open password set POF document will not be encrypted Permission password set POF document will be restricted Printing Not permitted Low resolution 150 dpi High resolution Changes Not permitted Inserting deleting and rotating pages Filling in Form Fields Commenting Filling in Form Fields Any except extracting pages Enable copying of content Enable text access For accessibility tools Figure 276 Security page of PDF Options dialog xX ai General Initial view User Interface Links Security Set open password Mo open password sek POF document will nok be encrypted Set permission password Set Open Password Password see po Contirm okt Cancel Figure 277 Setting a password to encrypt a PDF Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 335 Permissions settings are effecti
83. key and the cursor is placed at the end of the cell Then use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor through the text in the cell Using the mouse Using the mouse either double click on the appropriate cell to select it and place the cursor in it for editing or single click to select the cell and then move the mouse pointer up to the input line and click into it to place the cursor for editing Formatting data The data in Calc can be formatting in several ways It can either be edited as part of a cell style so that it is automatically applied or it can be applied manually to the cell Some manual formatting can be applied using toolbar icons For more control and extra options select the appropriate cell or cells right click on it and select Format Cells All of the format options are discussed below All the settings discussed in this section can also be set as a Note part of the cell style See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide for more information Formatting multiple lines of text Multiple lines of text can be entered into a single cell using automatic wrapping or manual line breaks Each method is useful for different Situations Using automatic wrapping To set text to wrap at the end of the cell right click on the cell and select Format Cells or choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or press Ctrl 1 On the Alignment tab Figure 121 under Properties select Wrap text automatically
84. make the Slide View toolbar Figure 144 visible DERE E f slides Figure 144 Slide Sorter and Slide View toolbars 2 Adjust the number of slides up to a maximum of 15 3 When you have adjusted the number of slide per row click View gt Toolbars gt Slide View to remove this toolbar from view To move a slide in a presentation in the Slide Sorter 1 Click the slide A thick black border is drawn around it 2 Drag and drop it to the location you want e As you move the slide a black vertical line appears to one side of the slide e Drag the slide until this black vertical line is located where you want the slide to be moved To select a group of slides use one of these methods e Use the Control Ctrl key Click on the first slide and while pressing Control select the other desired slides e Use the Shift key Click on the first slide and while pressing the Shift key click on the final slide in the group This selects all of the other slides in between the first and the last e Use the mouse cursor Click on the first slide to be selected Hold down the left mouse button Drag the cursor to the last slide thumbnail A dashed outline of a rectangle forms as you drag the cursor through the slide thumbnails and a thick black border is drawn around the selected slides Make sure the rectangle includes all the slides you want to select To move a group of slides 1 Select the group 2 Drag and drop the grou
85. navigator and can set an index page For more information see Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Saving Documents as HTML Files Adding comments to a drawing Starting with OOo 3 2 Draw supports comments formerly called notes similar to those in Writer and Calc Choose Insert gt Comment from the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the Draw page with a larger text box beside it Draw has automatically added your name and the date at the bottom of this text box Jean Hollis Weber Today 03 44 248 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Type or paste your comment into the text box You can optionally apply some basic formatting to parts of the text by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu you can also delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the page Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View gt Comments Select Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 249 OpenOf Tice org3
86. of the editing window The controls resemble the tree structure of a file manager in appearance and can be hidden by selecting Data gt Outline gt Hide Details They are strictly for on screen use and do not print The basic outline controls have plus or minus signs at the start of the group to show or hide hidden cells However if one or more outline group is nested in another the controls have numbered buttons for hiding different levels of group If you no longer need a group place the mouse cursor in any cell in it and select Data gt Group and Outline gt Ungroup Jo remove all groups on a sheet select Data gt Group and Outline gt Remove Al C7 ae A Figure 129 Outline group controls Filtering which cells are visible A filter is a list of conditions that each entry has to meet in order to be displayed You can set three types of filters from the Data gt Filter sub menu Automatic filters add a drop down list to the top row of a column that contains commonly used filters They are quick and convenient and because the condition includes every unique entry in the selected cells are almost as useful with text as with numbers In addition to each unique entry automatic filters include the option to display all entries the ten highest numerical values and all cells that are empty or not empty as well as a standard filter Their drawback is that they are somewhat limited In particular they do not allow regul
87. one page for each slide with each page set with the Refresh meta tag so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next e WebCast generates an ASP or Perl application to display the Slides Unfortunately OOo has no direct support for PHP yet 374 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Publication type Standard HTML format O Standard HTML with frames O Automatic WebCast 5 Decide how the images will be saved PNG GIF or JPG and what resolution to use When choosing a resolution consider what the majority of your viewers might have If you use a high resolution then a viewer with a medium resolution monitor will have to scroll sideways to see the entire slide probably not desirable Save graphics as Monitor resolution PNG Low resolution 640x480 pixels GIF Medium resolution 800x600 pixels PG High resolution 1024x768 pixels Yo F Quality Effects Export sounds when slide advances 6 If Create title page was chosen in step 4 supply the information for it on the next page The title contains an author name e mail address and home page along with any additional information you want to include This page of the Wizard does not display if Create title page was not chosen Chapter 12 Creating WebPages 379 Information for the tite page Author Peter Hillier Brook E mail address Your homepage Additional information _ Link to a copy of t
88. or web page you need to insert non breaking spaces in OOo To do this press Control Spacebar instead of just Spacebar Saving a document as a series of web pages Writer can save a large document as a series of web pages HTML files with a table of contents page To do this 1 Decide which headings in the document should start on a new page and make sure all those headings have the same style for example Heading 1 2 Select File gt Send and click on Create HTML Document 368 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 3 In the dialog Figure 298 type the file name to save the pages under Also specify which style indicates a new page as decided in step 1 4 Click Save to create the multi page HTML document For those who may be interested the resulting HTML files conform to the HTML 4 Transitional F Hame and Fath of the HTML Document Save ini 001 9 100 testdocs i cs mg E webpage html My Recent Documents i ET Desktop Pa Netvork Pl ae File name webpage x Save as Ippe HTML Document Cancel styles Heading 1 Default Figure Heading 1 Figure 299 Creating a series of web pages from one document Creating web pages using a Wizard OOo s Web wizard allows you to create several types of standard web pages To use it 1 Select File gt Wizards gt Web Page On the first page of the Wizard choose settings and click Next If this is your first web page the only
89. page frame numbering and paragraph styles Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 75 e Format and settings regarding indexes tables bibliographies table of contents Templates can also contain predefined text saving you from having to type it every time you create a new document For example a letter template may contain your name address and salutation You can also save menu and toolbar customizations in templates see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more information Creating a template using a wizard You can use wizards to create templates for letters faxes agendas presentations and Web pages For example the Fax Wizard guides you through the following choices e Type of fax business or personal e Document elements like the date subject line business fax Salutation and complementary close e Options for sender and recipient information business fax e Text to include in the footer business fax To create a template using a wizard 1 From the main menu choose File gt Wizards gt type of template required File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help lew t oe oa a neg oop A ee Df yR G Open Chrl 0 Recent Documents Arial 10 v Wizards o Letter 4o ra Fax cs Clase am A i 6 genda Save Ctrl 5 t9 E Save As io Presentation Save Al t Web Page Figure 54 Creating a template using a wizard 2 Follow the instructions on the
90. paolo mantovani org downloads DispatchToApiRecorder http www ooomacros org user php Macro organization In OpenOffice org macros are grouped in modules modules are grouped in libraries and libraries are grouped in library containers A library is usually used as a major grouping for either an entire category of macros or for an entire application Modules usually split functionality such as user interaction and calculations Individual macros are subroutines and functions Library Container Module 1 Module 2 Macro 2 Figure 303 Macro Library hierarchy A computer scientist would use Figure 304 to precisely describe the Situation The text 1 means one or more and 0 means zero or more The black triangle means composed of or contains 390 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x e A library container contains one or more libraries and each library is contained in one library container e A library contains zero or more modules and each module is contained in one library e A module contains zero or more macros and each macro is contained in one module Figure 304 Macro Library hierarchy Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog see Figure 305 All available library containers are shown in the Macro from list Every document is a library container capable of containing multiple libraries The application itself
91. printing from other OOo components see Chapter 10 but some details are different especially regarding preparation for printing The Print dialog Figure 125 reached from File gt Print has some Calc specific options which sheets to print Print Copies 2 All sheets Number of copies 1 Selected sheets Selected cells Sa A Print range All pages Figure 130 Part of the Print dialog The Printer Options dialog reached by clicking the Options button on the bottom left of the Print dialog has only two choices as shown in Figure 119 Suppress output of empty pages and Print only selected sheets 172 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Printer Options Pages Suppress output of empty pages Sheets Print only selected sheets Figure 131 Top of the Printer Options dialog Selecting sheets to print You can select one or more sheets for printing This can be useful if you have a large spreadsheet with multiple sheets and only want to print certain sheets For example an accountant might record costs over time with one sheet for each month To print the November and December sheets follow this procedure 1 Go to the November sheet Hold down the Control key and click on the tab of the December sheet 2 To print all of the sheets go to File gt Print and select Options The Options button is different from the Properties button Note Properties deals with the settings of the prin
92. process that has to be repeated for each slide Unless you are using more than one slide master your only concern is the Layouts section of the Tasks pane Figure 149 v Layouts Figure 149 Choosing a slide layout First insert all the slides your outline indicates you will need Only after this should you begin adding special effects such as custom animation and slide transitions Step 1 Insert a new slide This can be done in a variety of ways take your pick e Insert gt Slide e Right click on the present slide and select Slide gt New Slide from the pop up menu e Click the Slide icon in the Presentation toolbar Figure 150 Presentation T x Slide E4 Slide Design Slide Show Figure 150 Presentation toolbar Step 2 Select the layout slide that bests fits your needs Step 3 Modify the elements of the slide At this stage the slide consists of everything contained in the slide master as well as the chosen layout slide so this includes removing unneeded elements adding needed elements such as pictures and inserting text 198 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Changes to any of the pre packaged layouts can only be made Caution using View gt Normal which is the default Attempting to do this by modifying a slide master may result in unpredictable VAN results and requires extra care as well as some trials and errors 1 Remove any element on the slide that is not required e Cl
93. repeated selecting one cell in each row works Page breaks While defining a print range can be a powerful tool it may sometimes be necessary to manually tweak Calc s printout To do this you can use a manual break A manual break helps to ensure that your data prints properly You can insert a horizontal page break above or a vertical page break to the left of the active cell Inserting a page break To insert a page break 1 Navigate to the cell where the page break will begin 2 Select Insert gt Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now set Row break Selecting Row Break creates a page break above the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between rows 14 and 15 Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 177 Column break Selecting Column Break creates a page break to the left of the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between columns G and H To see page break lines more easily on screen you can change Tip their color Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance and scroll down to the Spreadsheet section Deleting a page break To remove a page break 1 Navigate to a cell that is next to the break you want to remove 2 Select Edit gt Delete Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now removed Multiple manual row
94. slide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 183 6 Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Impress nt Eel File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help Baa Ba Sx Bo OO be eH a 1E a ftv S Slack fal A color __ fa sues fa Slides Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Tasks View X gt Master Pages 7 ial Ie aE Slides pane Tasks pane Table Design Slide 2 gt T Custom Animation t gt Z e Slide Transition M gt BOTH O O o B SB k amp KA MRE O 2 Slide 1 ict 0 82 23 81 0 00 x 0 00 Slide 2 2 Default 2 _ amp 29 Figure 137 Main window of Impress Several additional operations can be performed on one or more slides in the Slides pane e Add new slides at any place within the presentation after the first Slide e Mark a slide as hidden so that it will not be shown as part of the Slide show e Delete a slide from the presentation if it is no longer needed e Rename a slide e Copy or move the contents of one slide to another copy and paste or cut and paste respectively It is also possible to perform the following operations although there are more efficient methods than using the Slides pane e Change the slide transition following the selected slide or after each slide in a group of slides e Change the sequence of slides in the presentation e Change the slide design A window opens a
95. such as HTML and Basic in macros Apply replacement table Font Replace with Helvetica Arial We 3 Replace with TML and Basic sources Font settings for Fonts Automatic had Non proportional fonts only Size 10 yt Figure 27 Defining a font to be substituted for another font Security options Use the OpenOffice org Security page Figure 28 to choose security options for saving documents and for opening documents that contain macros Security options and warnings If you record changes save multiple versions or include hidden information or notes in your documents and you do not want some of the recipients to see that information you can set warnings to remind you to remove it or you can have OOo remove some of it automatically Note that unless removed much of this information is retained in a file whether the file is in OpenOffice org s default 46 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x OpenDocument format or has been saved to other formats including PDF Click the Options button to open a separate dialog with specific choices Figure 29 Security options and warnings Adjust security related options and define warnings For hidden information in documents Passwords For web connections Persistently save passwords for web connections Connections Protected by a master password recommended Passwords are protected by a master p
96. the Bpayment field name and drag it to the right of paid by Result paid by lt Bpayment gt In the same way fill in the rest of the fields in the sentence e Use lt Lunch gt and lt LPayment gt for the second set of amount and name in the sentence e Use lt Supper gt and lt SPayment gt for the third set of amount and name in the sentence Final result On lt Date gt our breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt paid by lt BPayment gt our lunch cost lt Lunch gt paid by lt LPayment gt and our supper cost lt Supper gt paid by lt SPayment gt Add data to the fields of the sentence e Click the gray box to the left of the row of data you want to add That row should be highlighted like the second row of Figure 221 e Click the Data to Fields icon circled This should fill the fields with the data from the row you chose Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 287 e Click another row and then click this icon again The data in the sentence changes to this selected row of data e Save the document if you want to use it as an example later So Dh e tub Krv amp Friday June 26 530 50 00 11 00 Saturday June z 778 46 00 4 00 13 00 Figure 221 Selected row in data source window Adding data in table format is a little easier and takes perhaps fewer steps Some of the steps will be quite similar 1 Navigate to the place you want to place the table and click the location 2 Control
97. the Style dialog To create a new Style using the Style dialog right click in the Styles and Formatting window and select New from the pop up menu If you want your new style to be linked with an existing style first select that style and then right click and select New If you link styles then when you change the base style for example by Changing the font from Times to Helvetica all the linked styles will change as well Sometimes this is exactly what you want other times you do not want the changes to apply to all the linked styles It pays to plan ahead The dialogs and choices are the same for defining new styles and for modifying existing styles See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Creating a new style from a selection You can create a new style by copying an existing manual format This new style applies only to this document it will not be saved in the template 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and choose the type of style you want to create 2 In the document select the item you want to save as a style 3 In the Styles and Formatting window click on the New Style from Selection icon Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 69 4 In the Create Style dialog type a name for the new style The list Shows the names of existing custom styles of the selected type Click OK to save the new style ee Create Style Style name NewStyle My Style Cancel
98. the extension is listed in the Extension Manager Extension Manager BEX English spelling and hyphenation dictionaries and thesaurus 2009 05 08 oe A ey French Classic and Reform 1990 spelling thesaurus and hyphen 3 4 1 Dicollecte oes Professional Template Pack II English 1 0 Sun Microsystems The second template pack by Sun Microsystems provides more than 120 professionally designed document spreadsheet presentation and database templates for professional and stunning locking documents and presentations Spanish spelling dictionary 2008 07 01 S Teninlate Channer 175 Get more extensions online Check For Updates Figure 56 Newly added package of templates Setting a default template If you create a document by choosing File gt New gt Text Document or Spreadsheet Presentation or Drawing from the main menu OOo creates the document from the Default template for that type of document You can however set a custom template to be the default You can reset the default later if you choose Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 79 Setting a custom template as the default You can set any template to be the default as long as it is in one of the folders displayed in the Template Management dialog To set a custom template as the default 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management dialog opens 2 In the box on the left select the folder contai
99. the following exactly as it is in the List contents box SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Data field BPayment Type of list contents List content ee i Bound field im oh Type FROM Figure 208 List content for payment type fields What you wrote is called an SQL command The words SELECT and FROM are written in capital letters because they are commands When the command SELECT is used it requires a field name within quotation marks and then the field s alias also Note within quotation marks In this case the field and its alias are the same The FROM command requires the name of the table which contains the field Single word table names do not require quotation marks but multiple word table names do e Repeat these steps for the payment fields for Lunch Supper Motel Snacks and Misc The main form should look like Figure 209 as far as where the controls are located It also Shows what the Note control should look like Those changes are explained in the next step e Close the Properties window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 277 pe CD CC 200 2 o 2 L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L r ee eee oe e ee a ee oe a OEE a a re e a E E ee E es Figure 209 Position of controls in main form Step 7 Change the Misc Notes field We want the Misc Notes control which has a field type of Memo to have a vertical scrollbar for additional text space if desired 1 Con
100. the options Shown above and another way to change an object s attributes The entries with a small arrow on the right hand side contain a submenu Editing lines and borders Lines like arrows and the borders of an lt object are managed through the same dialog Rd An object s border is just another type of line bi lt 240 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x You can change some properties from the Line and Filling toolbar To see more options select the object and click on the Line icon or right click on the object and choose Line from the context menu This opens the Line dialog Common line properties In most cases the property you want to change is the line s style solid dashed invisible and so on its color or its width These options are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 178 You can also edit these properties from the Line dialog where you can also change the line s transparency Figure 179 illustrates different degrees of transparency Figure 179 The vertical lines have different levels of transparency 0 25 and 50 gt 3 r g n vA x Drawing arrows Arrowheads and other line endings usually referred to collectively as arrows are a line property Select a line and click on the Arrow Style icon from the Line and Filling toolbar This opens the Arrowheads menu gt Several types of arrowheads are available Each end of the line
101. the red X shown in Figure 16 bak E Figure 16 Close icons If more than one OOo window is open each window looks like the sample shown on the left in Figure 16 Closing this window leaves the other OOo windows open If only one OOo window is open it looks like the sample shown on the right in Figure 16 Notice the small black X below the large red X Clicking the small X closes the document but leaves OOo open Clicking the large red X closes OOo completely If the document has not been saved since the last change a message box is displayed Choose whether to save or discard your changes e Save The document is saved and then closed e Discard The document is closed and all modifications since the last save are lost e Cancel Nothing happens and you return to the document Caution Not saving your document could result in the loss of recently A made changes or worse still your entire file Closing OpenOffice org To close OOo completely choose File gt Exit or close the last open document as described in Closing a document above If all the documents have been saved OOo closes immediately If any documents have been modified but not saved a warning message appears Follow the procedure in Closing a document to save or discard your changes 34 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org Choosing options to suit the way you work Choosi
102. the same position in relation to the page margins It does not move as you add or delete text e To Paragraph The object is associated with a paragraph and moves with the paragraph It may be placed in the margin or another location e To Character The object is associated with a character but is not in the text sequence It moves with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph e As Character The object is placed in the document like any character and moves with the paragraph as you add or delete text before the object Ungroup icon Ungroup the selected objects so you can manage them individually Group icon Group the selected objects so you can manage them as a single object 360 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Using menu options You can use some the choices on the Format menu to anchor align arrange and group selected Fontwork objects wrap text around them and flip them horizontally and vertically You can also right click on a Fontwork object and choose many of the Same options from the pop up menu The pop up menu also provides quick access to the Line Area Text and Position and Size dialogs The Text dialog offers only a few options for Fontwork objects and is not discussed here On the Position and Size dialog you can enter precise values concerning size and position For more information on all of these menu options see
103. themes To delete a theme from the Gallery 1 Go to Tools gt Gallery 2 In the left part of the Gallery select in the list the theme you wish to delete 3 Right click on the theme then click Delete on the pop up menu Location of the Gallery and the objects in it Graphics and other objects shown in the Gallery can be located anywhere on your computer s hard disk on a network drive or on a CD ROM Listings in the Gallery refer to the location of each object When you add graphics to the Gallery the files are not moved or copied only the location of each new object is added as a reference In a workgroup situation you may have access to a shared Gallery where you cannot change the contents unless authorized to do so and a user Gallery where you can add change or delete objects The location of the user Gallery is specified in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Paths You can change this location and you can copy your gallery files sdv to other computers Gallery contents provided with OOo are stored in a different location You cannot change this location 350 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating an image map An image map defines areas of an image called hotspots with hyperlinks to web addresses other files on the computer or parts of the same document Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks described in Chapter 12 Clicking on a hotspot causes OOo to open the
104. to Outline view to continue reviewing the slides against your outline If a slide is not in the correct sequence you can move it to its proper place a In the slide pane click the slide icon of the slide you are moving b Drag and drop it where you want it Notes view Use the Notes view to add notes to a slide 1 Click the Notes tab in the Workspace Figure 142 2 Select the slide to which you want to add notes e Click the slide in the Slide pane or e Use the Previous Slide and Next Slide buttons to move to the desired slide in the Navigator 3 In the text box below the slide click on the words Click to add notes and begin typing You can resize the Notes text box using the green resizing handles and move it by placing the pointer on the border then clicking and dragging To make changes in the text style press the F11 key to open the Styles and Formatting window Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 189 First Step FOBT Click quick sane gt A enertacon Click to notes Figure 142 Notes view Slide Sorter view Slide Sorter view contains all the slide thumbnails Figure 143 Use this view to work with a group of slides or with only one slide Normal Outine Notes Handout Slide Sorter Figure 143 Slide Sorter view 190 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Change the number of slides per row if desired 1 Check View gt Toolbars gt Slide View to
105. to make minor modifications to the text of existing PDF files when the original source files do not exist or you are unable to open the source files Whenever possible modify the source and regenerate the PDF to obtain the best results 416 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x When the extension is installed PDF is listed as a choice in the File Type drop down list in the File gt Open dialog Best results can be achieved with the PDF ODF hybrid file format which this extension also enables A hybrid PDF ODF file is a PDF file that contains an embedded ODF source file Hybrid PDF ODF files will be opened in OpenOffice org as an ODF file without any layout changes Non hybrid PDF documents open in Draw Depending on the complexity of the layout changes may be easy or difficult to make and the saved result may or may not preserve the original layout Font substitution may Occur Documents with more sophisticated layouts such as those created with professional desktop publishing applications that use special fonts and complex vector graphics are not suitable for the PDF Import Extension Similarly longer documents gt 20 pages may cause some performance and stability problems From Sun Microsystems Open source Presenter Console Provides extra control over slide shows presentations for example the presenter has ability to see the upcoming slide the slide notes and a presentation timer while the audience sees
106. to mix multiple Slide masters that may belong to different templates For example you may need a completely different layout for the first slide of the presentation or you may want to add to your presentation a slide from a different presentation based on a template available on the hard disk The Slide Design dialog makes this possible Access this dialog either from the menu bar Format gt Slide design or by right clicking on a Slide in the Slides pane The main window in the dialog shows the slide masters already available for use To add more 1 Click the Load button Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 203 2 Select in the new dialog the template from which to load the slide master Click OK 3 Click OK again to close the slide design dialog The slide masters in the template you selected are now shown also in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane in the Available for use subsection The slide masters you have loaded will also be available the next time you load the presentation If you want to delete the unused slide masters click the corresponding checkbox in the Note Slide Design dialog Due to a bug if the slide master was not used in the presentation it is removed from the list of available slide masters anyway Ti To limit the size of the presentation file you may want to Ip minimize the number of slide masters used Modifying a slide master The following items can be changed on a slide master
107. values 415 Saving toa file 414 keyboard shortcuts macros 396 L label printing 124 labels printing 124 landscape pages 85 language settings 57 language support 13 Layout pane 206 LGPL 433 libraries of macros 390 library containers 390 licensing of OpenOffice org 426 limits to sum integral 322 Line and Filling toolbar 221 line properties 241 line customizing 241 line drawing 227 lines editing 240 linking object from gallery 347 Linux Quickstarter 19 system requirements 14 list table database 263 load Basic code to edit 54 load save options 52 loading styles 72 locale settings 58 M Mac OS X support 16 system requirements 14 macro information 16 Macro Organizer dialog 393 macro security options 47 Macro Selector dialog 396 Macromedia Flash 373 macros 379 assigning to events 415 Calc 390 comments 382 creating 384 DIM 383 dispatch framework 388 dispatch helper 383 downloading 395 Index 437 editing 381 event handling 398 example 384 functions 390 IDE 381 388 library container 379 library containers 390 menu items 396 module 379 modules 390 organization 390 recording 379 REM 382 resources 401 running 380 395 Storage 392 Subroutines 382 390 variables 383 viewing 381 writing 400 Mail Merge Wizard e mailing Writer document 337 Mantovani Paolo 390 margins 218 margins Writer 113 Master Pages 202 master slides 200 Math formulas inserting 213 mathematical equations 31
108. with OpenOffice org installed In addition most Linux distributions such as Ubuntu include OpenOffice org If you need to install it yourself it s very easy to do You can download the OpenOffice org installation package from the project s home page or by using a Peer to Peer client such as BitTorrent Instructions for BitTorrent are here The installation package is approximately 150MB People with slow Internet connections may prefer to purchase a copy on a CD or DVD 14 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x from a third party distributor The project maintains a list of distributors but the distributors are not connected with nor endorsed by OpenOffice org How to install the software Information on installing and setting up OpenOffice org on the various Supported operating systems is given here You can also download the more detailed Installation Guide Extensions and add ons Extensions and add ons to enhance OpenOffice org are collected in the official extensions repository at OOo Most are free but some are not See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more information How to get help This book the other OOo user guides the built in Help system and user support systems assume that you are familiar with your computer and basic functions such as starting a program opening and saving files Help system OOo comes with an extensive Help system This is your first line of Support for using OOo
109. you want to edit Ctri click on a sheet tab to select or deselect the sheet Validating cell contents When creating spreadsheets for other people to use you may want to make sure they enter data that is valid or appropriate for the cell You can also use validity in your own work as a guide to entering data that is either complex or rarely used Fill series and selection lists can handle some types of data but they are limited to predefined information For a more general case you can select a cell and use Data gt Validity to define the type of contents that can be entered in that cell For example a cell might require a date or a whole number with no alphabetic characters or decimal points or a cell may not be blank Depending on how validity is set up the tool can also define the range of contents that can be entered and provide help messages that explain the content rules you have set up for the cell and what users should do when they enter invalid content You can also set the cell to refuse invalid content accept it with a warning or start a macro when an error is entered See Chapter 2 in the Calc Guide for more information Editing data Editing data is done is in much the same way as it is entered The first step is selecting the cell containing the data to be edited 160 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Removing data from a cell Data can be removed deleted from a cell in several ways Removing
110. your fax driver where you can select the fax recipient Adding a Fax icon to the toolbar You can configure OpenOffice org so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for instructions Tracking changes to a document You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document 1 Make your changes to a copy of the document stored in a different folder or under a different name or both then use Writer to combine the two files and show the differences Choose Edit gt Compare Document This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods 2 Save versions that are stored as part of the original file However this method can cause problems with documents of non trivial size or complexity especially if you save a lot of versions Avoid this method if you can 3 Use Writer s change marks often called redlines or revision marks to show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting Choose Edit gt Changes gt Record Later you or another person can review and accept or reject each change Right click on an individual change and choose Accept Change or Reject Change from the pop up menu or choose Edit gt Changes gt Accept or Reject to view the list of changes and accept or reject
111. 0 Copying a style from one document to another Loading styles from a template or document You can copy styles by loading them from a template or another document 1 Open the document you want to copy styles into 2 In the Styles and Formatting window long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and then click on Load Styles see Figure 47 3 On the Load Styles dialog Figure 51 find and select the template you want to copy styles from Load Styles Categories Templates OK Presentation Presentation Backgrounds Presentations US Sizes Text FErame _ _ Pages _ Numbering _ Overwrite From File Figure 51 Copying styles from a template into the open document 4 Select the categories of styles to be copied Select Overwrite if you want the styles being copied to replace any styles of the same names in the document you re copying them into 5 Click OK to copy the styles You will not see any change on screen 72 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x To copy the styles from another document click the From Note File button to open a window from which you can select the required document If your document has a table of contents and if you have used custom styles for headings the heading levels associated with Caution outline levels in Tools gt Outline Numbering will revert to A the defaults of Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on when you load styles this Yo
112. 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args4 0 Name Text args4 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args4 rem 5 Press Delete to delete the lower case s dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Delete 0 Array rem 5 and then press S to add an upper case S dim args6 Q as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args6 0 Name Text args6 0 Value S 386 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args6 rem 6 Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array a a a oe la ll a gle ala dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 7 Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno WordRightSel 0 Array rem 8 Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Copy 0 Array rem 9 Press End to move the cursor to the end of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToEndOfLine 0 Array rem 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array POM seresa en eB vr ee re ee ms ee im eae eee ee iene dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace
113. 0 displays all objects contained in a document It provides another convenient way to move around a document and find items in it The Navigator icon is located on the Standard toolbar You can also display the Navigator by choosing Edit gt Navigator on the menu bar or pressing Ctrl Shift F5 The Navigator is more useful if you give your slides and objects pictures spreadsheets and so on meaningful names instead of leaving them as the default Slide n and Shape n shown in Figure 140 g Navigator b Dl k my v x Title Slide fea Shape 1 v jal Slide 2 fe Shape 1 BY Shape 2 fea Shape 3 BAY Clipart Slide 3 Untitled v Figure 140 Navigator Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 187 Working with views This section describes the use of the five views Normal view Normal view is the main view for working with individual slides Use this view to format and design and to add text graphics and animation effects To place a slide in the Slide Design area of the Normal view click the Slide thumbnail in the Slides pane or use the Navigator To select a slide in the Navigator scroll down the list until you find it and then double click it Outline view Outline view Figure 141 contains all the slides of the presentation in their numbered sequence It shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Only the text contained in the default text
114. 00 Figure 252 Option section of the Number Formating window 3 Change the Cost per mile field a Right click in the cell below Fuel Cost b Select Number Format c In the Category list select Currency Click OK 4 Change the Fuel Cost field a Right click in the cell below Cost per mile b Select Number Format c In the Category list select Currency d In the Option section e Set the number of decimal places to 3 e Click the green checkmark e Click OK Step 4 Save and close the report Double click the report It should now look like Figure 253 Titk Author Dan Lewis Date 47 amp O02 Date Friday May 25 2007 Date sunday May 27 2007 Figure 253 Final report 310 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x More ways to create reports An extension is available to assist in report creation Sun Report Builder creates stylish complex database reports You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields It is available from http extensions services openoffice org To install this extension follow these steps 1 Choose Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Get more extensions online 2 The OOo extensions page opens in your browser Find and select the extension you want and follow the prompts to install it During installation you will be asked to accept a license agreement 3 Wh
115. 0cm Angle 10 degrees Enlargement Width Height Colors Start End Figure 180 Duplicating an object 244 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Cross fading Cross fading transforms a shape from one form to another with OpenOffice org handling all of the intermediate transitions The result is anew group of objects including the two end points and the intermediate steps To carry out a cross fade select both objects hold the Shift key while selecting each object in turn and then choose Edit gt Cross fading On the Cross fading dialog choose the number of increments transition steps You probably want to have Cross fade attributes and Same orientation both checked The end result is shown in Figure 182 Cross fading Settings Increments 16 Cross fade attributes Same orientation Figure 182 Cross fading example Combining multiple objects Using Draw you can combine drawing objects together in two distinct ways grouping and combining These two methods allow you to treat multiple objects as one unit or to merge objects to form a new shape Grouping is like putting objects in a container You can move them as a group and apply global changes to them A group can always be undone and the objects that make up the group can always be manipulated separately A combination is a permanent fusion of objects leading to a new object The original objects are no longer available as individual entiti
116. 1 color options 44 color palette 222 color scheme 49 combining objects 246 comma separated values CSV 138 140 command line starting from 19 Community Forum user support 16 complex text layout CTL 13 58 components of OpenOffice org 11 conditional formatting 168 connectors 232 consultants 16 context menu 240 context menus 25 conversion 247 copying object from Gallery 347 create document from template 73 creating adocument 27 cross fading 245 cross references inserting references 129 overview 128 CSV files 138 140 Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks 48 custom dictionary 59 Customize dialog 396 customizing keyboard shortcuts 412 menus 404 toolbars 408 D data source description 251 editing 286 linking 284 registering 284 using in OOo documents 286 viewing 285 data validity 160 database AutoValue 260 creating 253 creating tables 255 field types and formats 257 list table 263 planning 252 454 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x primary key 255 258 260 registering 285 Report Wizard 303 Table Wizard 255 tables 255 database form activation order 282 background 280 creating in Design View 283 creating using a Wizard 267 entering data 290 modifying 270 subform 268 tab order 282 database reports creating 302 modifying 308 Static 302 database table create using wizard 255 dynamic 306 joined fields 269 relationships 264 date conversion automatic 156 default file format 53 default
117. 15 TA ea e 350 3 5057 50 9 0010 26 00 0 00 2 00 afte 15 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 0 00 62 50 E 78 1 209 0 E Brittany 26 00 0 00 3 00 3 00 17 TETE BUSA 30a S00 r94 212 5 Murphy Kathleen 26 00 1 00 3 Sau ol OU 4 b O0 6 9 00 Figure 110 Frozen rows and preys Article uiz Chp 1 Test Fenny Density Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 151 You can set the freeze point at one row one column or both a row and a column as in Figure 110 Freezing single rows or columns 1 Click on the header for the row below where you want the freeze or for the column to the right of where you want the freeze 2 Choose Window gt Freeze A dark line appears indicating where the freeze is put Freezing a row and a column 1 Click into the cell that is immediately below the row you want frozen and immediately to the right of the column you want frozen 2 Choose Window gt Freeze Two lines appear on the screen a horizontal line above this cell and a vertical line to the left of this cell Now as you scroll around the screen everything above and to the left of these lines will remain in view Unfreezing To unfreeze rows or columns choose Window gt Freeze The check mark by Freeze will vanish Splitting the screen Another way to change the view is by splitting the window also known as splitting the screen The screen can be split either horizontally or vertically or both This allow
118. 3 mathematical markup 317 mathematical symbols 314 matrix markup Math 323 measurement unit 100 219 memory options 39 menu bar 21 menus adding commands 407 creating 405 customizing 404 modifying 406 modifying entries 407 Microsoft Office file conversion 55 Microsoft Windows file associations 17 Quickstarter 18 system requirements 14 Microsoft Word 93 middle mouse button function 41 mirror copies 243 mouse positioning 41 Mozilla plug in 60 music objects inserting 213 MySQL 251 N Native Language Project 16 Navigation toolbar 32 Navigator 31 187 new document 27 non breaking hyphen 99 non breaking spaces 99 Normal view Impress 188 Notes view Impress 189 numbered list 209 numbering equations 325 O OASIS 14 objects adjusting size 237 arranging 237 dynamic movement 238 dynamic size modification 238 framing 236 hidden 236 moving 237 rotating 238 selecting several 237 ODF format version saving 53 ODF plugin Sun 93 Office Assistant Microsoft 38 OLE objects inserting 213 online update options 51 OOo Macro Organizer dialog 380 Open and Save As dialogs 30 Open Source Initiative OSI 426 427 Open Save dialogs 38 OpenDocument Format 14 53 opening a document 28 OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog 379 Options Bar Draw 223 orientation of page 85 outline level 210 Outline view Impress 188 OXT extension 78 P page layout different first page 84 landscape page 85 orientation 85 458
119. 36 Header Page Style Default Left area Center area Right area Test Lett sheett 24 10 2008 08 39 55 Header Custom header Figure 136 Edit contents of header or footer 180 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Areas Each area is independent and can have different information in it Header You can select from several preset choices in the Header drop down list or specify a custom header using the buttons below If you are formatting a footer the choices are the same Custom header Click in the area Left Center Right that you want to customize then use the buttons to add elements or change text attributes Opens the Text Attributes dialog Inserts the total number of pages Inserts the File Name field Inserts the Date field Inserts the Sheet Name field Inserts the Time field Inserts the current page number Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 181 OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress Presentations in OpenOffice org What is Impress Impress is OpenOffice org s slide show presentations program You can create slides that contain many different elements including text bulleted and numbered lists tables charts clip art and a wide range of graphic objects Impress also includes a spelling checker a thesaurus prepackaged text styles and attractive background styles This chapter includes instructions screenshots and hints to guide you thr
120. 5 In the Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink w a a ja 7 P EN i Insert as Hyperlink SE Insert as Link Bee Insert as Copy gt gt Text frames CI gt Gy Graphics ib OLE objects s Bookmarks gt gt Sections w e u gt Figure 93 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator You can also use the Hyperlink dialog to insert and modify hyperlinks within and between documents See Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Using cross references If you type in references to other parts of the document those references can easily get out of date if you reword a heading add or remove figures or reorganize topics Replace any typed cross references with automatic ones and when you update fields all the references will update automatically to show the current wording or page numbers The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog lists some 128 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x items such as headings bookmarks figures tables and numbered items such as steps in a procedure You can also create your own reference items see Setting References in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for instructions To insert a cross reference to a heading figure bookmark or other item 1 In your docume
121. 6 Form Wizard steps Step 2 Set up a subform Since we have already created a relationship between the Fuel and Vacations tables we will use that relationship If no relationship had been defined this would be done in step 4 1 Click the box labeled Add Subform 2 Click Subform based upon existing relation 3 Fuel is listed as a relation we want to add So click Fuel to highlight it as in Figure 197 Click Next Decide if you want to set up a subform t Add Subform Subform based on existing relation Which relation do you want lili to add Subform based on manual selection of fields a A subform is a form that is inserted in another form Use subforms to show data from tables or queries with a one to many Figure 197 Adding a subform Step 3 Add subform fields This step is exactly the same as step 1 The only difference is that not all of the fields will be used in the subform 1 Fuel is preselected under Tables or queries 2 Use the gt gt button to move all the fields to the right 3 Click the FuellD field to highlight it 4 Use the lt button to move the FuellID to the left Figure 198 268 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 5 Click Next Select the fields of your subform Tables or queries Available fields Fields in the farm FulID Date my FuelCost FuelQua nity Odometer PaymentT ype lt Figure 198 Selecting fields of a subform Step
122. 69 workspace Draw 217 workspace views Impress 188 X XML 54 Y year two digits 38 Index 44 442 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x
123. Borders tab of the Format Cells dialog There you can also define a shadow See Chapter 4 of the Calc Guide for details The cell border properties apply to a cell and can only be changed if you are editing that cell For example if cell C3 has Note a top border which would be equivalent visually to a bottom border on C2 that border can only be removed by selecting C3 It cannot be removed in C2 Formatting the cell background To quickly choose a background color for a cell click the small arrow next to the Background Color icon on the Formatting toolbar A palette of color choices similar to the Font Color palette is displayed To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors See Chapter 2 for more information You can also use the Background tab of the Format Cells dialog See Chapter 4 of the Calc Guide for details Autoformatting cells and sheets You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a set of cell formats to a sheet or a selected cell range 1 Select the cells including the column and row headers that you want to format 2 Choose Format gt AutoFormat If the selected cell range does not have column and row Note headers AutoFormat is not available 166 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x AutoFormat OK Currency 3D Currency Gray Currency Lavender Currency Turquoise Delete More Formatting Number format Font Alignment Borders
124. Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 307 8 Group fields Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 9 Sort options the wizard skipped this one 10 Choose layout accept the default Click Next 11 Create the report e Change the report name to Fuel Statistics e The default setting is Dynamic report so no change is necessary e Select Modify report layout e Click Finish Modifying a report At the end of the last section we left the Fuel Statistics report open in the edit mode Figure 249 We will be working on that report These Same steps can be used with any report that you open for editing Dis Fuel Fuel Cost fance Econ Cost pe omy mile Figure 249 A report in edit mode The Author is the name you listed in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data The date is not correct The columns need to be moved to the left to give a better appearance None of the numbers are correct but their only purpose is to show the number of decimal places Step 1 Change the date 1 Click to the right of the date 4 26 20 so that the cursor is next to the field Use the Backspace key to erase the date 2 Insert gt Fields gt Date This places today s date where the original date was 3 Change the date formatting a Double click the date field you just inserted The Edit Fields Document window opens Figure 250 308 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Ed
125. Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 313 Entering a formula The equation editor uses a markup language to represent formulas For example beta creates the Greek character beta 6 This markup is designed to read similar to English whenever possible For example a a over b produces a fraction You can enter a formula in three ways e Select a symbol from the Formula Elements window e Right click on the equation editor and select the symbol from the context menu e Type markup in the equation editor The context menu and the Formula Elements window insert the markup corresponding to a symbol This provides a convenient way to learn the OOo Math markup Click on the document body to exit the formula editor MOLE Double click on a formula to enter the formula editor again The Formula Elements window The simplest method for entering a formula is to use the Formula Elements window shown in Figure 254 z Formula Eleme EJ yin agb deA Tix gt a i 2 Ay Categories 2 t 4 74 a b a b axb a b aab gt Symbols a b a b avb Figure 255 Symbols are divided into categories In OOo Math before V3 2 0 the Formula Elements window was Note called the Selection window 314 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x The Formula Elements window is divided into two main parts e The top shows the symbol categories Click on these to change the list of symbols e The bottom shows the symbols availabl
126. Click OK Sometimes when updating OOo to a newer version your list of registered database files disappears When that happens you need to use these steps to register your database files with your latest version of OOo Note Using data sources in OpenOffice org Having registered the data source whether a spreadsheet text document external database or other accepted data source you can use it in other OpenOffice org components including Writer and Calc Viewing data sources Open a document in Writer or Calc To view the data sources available press F4 or select View gt Data Sources from the pull down menu This brings up a list of registered databases which will include Bibliography and any other database registered such as the Automobile database created earlier in this chapter To view each database click on the to the left of the database s name see Figure 218 This brings up Tables and Queries Click on the next to Tables to view the individual tables created Now click on a table to see all the records held in it El Automobile Lg Queries LA Tables Figure 218 Databases Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 285 Editing data sources Some data sources can be edited in the View Data Sources dialog A spreadsheet can not A record can be edited added or deleted The data is displayed on the right side of the screen Click in a field to edit the value Beneath the records are five tiny buttons
127. Click the gray box to the left of each row of the data source that you want to be a row in your table when the rows are not consecutive To select consecutive rows click the gray box to the left of the top desired row and Shift click the bottom desired row 3 Click the Data to text icon to open the Insert Database Columns dialog Figure 222 The Data to text icon is to the left of the Data to Fields icon in Figure 221 Insert Database Columns EJ Insert data as Table Fields Text Table Database columns Table column s Miscellaneous Date MiscNotes Breakfast MiscPayment BPayment Motel Lunch MPayment LPayment Odometer SnackCost snackNo z Format From database Insert table heading Properties O Apply column name P einiiamm Create row only Figure 222 Insert Database Columns dialog 4 Move the fields you want in your table from the Database Columns list to the Table column s list e To place the fields in the order you select click the field and use the single arrow to move the fields in the order you desire 288 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x You can also limit the fields you use to less than all of the fields available If you want to use all of the fields use the double arrow pointing to the right to move all of them at one time The order of the fields in the table you create will be the same as in the data source table To remove a single field from the Table Column s list
128. Close and reopen OpenOffice org Now the File gt Templates menu has two new choices in Writer Assign Template current document and Assign Template folder In Calc Impress and Draw only the Assign Template folder choice is available 3 Open the document whose template you want to change Choose File gt Templates gt Assign Template current document 4 In the Select Template window find and select the required template and click Open 5 Save the document If you now look in File gt Properties you will see the new template listed at the bottom of the General page Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 81 Organizing templates OOo can only use templates that are in OOo template folders You can create new OOo template folders and use them to organize your templates and import templates into those folders For example you might have one template folder for report templates and another for letter templates You can also export templates To begin choose File gt Templates gt Organize from the main menu The Template Management dialog opens All the actions made by the Commands button in the Template Note Management dialog can be made as well by right clicking on the templates or the folders Creating a template folder To create a template folder 1 In the Template Management dialog click any folder 2 Click the Commands button and choose New from the drop down menu A new folder called Untitled appears
129. Customize dialog see Figure 310 Open this dialog in either of these ways e Choose Tools gt Customize from the main menu bar e Each toolbar has an icon that opens a menu choose the Customize Toolbar option Complete coverage of the Customize dialog is beyond the Tip scope of this document Click the Help button to access the help pages included with OpenOffice org The Customize dialog contains tabs to configure menus keyboard bindings toolbars and events 396 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenOffice org Writer Toolbars Tiea zi B Toolbar z Toolbar Content Commands Load URL New New Document From Templa gt Open Save Save As EJ Document as E mail m A a a a ea a a a Save In OpenOffice org Writer Description Loads a document specified by a URL You can type a new URL or select one that is already registered Figure 310 OpenOffice org Customize dialog Toolbar Macros can be added to toolbars For more about modifying toolbars see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Menu item Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Menus tab You can modify an existing menu or create new menus that call macros For more about modifying menus see Chapter 14 Keyboard shortcuts Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Keyboard tab Ass
130. Follow the directions in Creating tables in Design View on page 299 In the table the two fields can be Type and PaymentlID In the Field Properties set AutoValue to Yes for the PaymentlID field Set the PaymentID field as the primary key See Figure 190 2 Save the table using the name Payment Type Field Name Field Type pe Text VARCHAR PaymentiD Integer INTEGER Figure 190 Table in Design View If you have several tables to create with the same fields design one table and produce the other tables by cutting and pasting See Creating a table by copying an existing table on page 259 Note Adding data to the list table List tables do not require a form Instead add their data directly to the table In this example use the names of the two people with a bank card and Cash for cash purchases 1 In the main database window click on the Tables icon Figure 183 In the list of tables right click on Payment Type and select Open from the pop up menu a Enter Dan in the Type column in the first row Press the Tab key to move to the second row Notice that the PaymentID value for this row changes from lt AutoField gt to 0 b Enter Kevin in the second row The PaymentID changes to 1 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 263 c Enter Cash in the third row The PaymentID changes to 2 2 Save and close the table window You can also use the Enter key to move from entry field to entry Tip
131. If clicking in your links Chapter 12 Creating WebPages 367 activates them check that page to see if the option has been deselected To change the color of hyperlinks go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Appearance scroll to Unvisited links and or Visited links pick the new colors and click OK This will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of OOo In Writer and Calc but not Draw or Impress you can also change the Internet link character style or define and apply new styles to selected links Saving Writer documents as web pages Writer s HTML capabilities include saving existing documents in HTML format creating new documents as HTML not described here and creating several different types of web pages using a wizard The easiest way to create HTML documents is to start with an existing Writer document You can get a good idea of how it will appear as a web page by using View gt Web Layout However web layout view will not show you which features will or won t save correctly to HTML Some considerations are described in the introduction to this chapter Saving a document as a single web page To save a document as a single web page HTML format select Save As from the File menu and specify HTML Document as the file type Writer does not replace multiple spaces in the original document with the HTML code for non breaking spaces If you Note want to have extra spaces in your HTML file
132. L Remove personal information on saving L Recommend password protection on saving Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks Figure 29 Security options and warnings dialog Remove personal information on saving Select this option to always remove user data from the file properties when saving the file To manually remove personal information from specific documents deselect this option and then use the Delete button under File gt Properties gt General Ctri click required to follow hyperlinks In older versions of OOo clicking on a hyperlink in a document opened the linked document Now you can choose whether to keep this behavior by unchecking this box Many people find creation and editing of documents easier when accidental clicks on links do not activate the links The other options on this dialog should be self explanatory Appearance options Writing editing and especially page layout are often easier when you can see the page margins text boundaries the boundaries of tables and sections in Writer documents page breaks in Calc grid lines in Draw or Writer and other features In addition you might prefer to use colors that are different from OOo s defaults for such items as note indicators or field shadings On the OpenOffice org Appearance page Figure 30 you can specify which items are visible and the colors used to display various items 48 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Colour sch
133. Link button 4 Save the document Going the other way from embedded to linked is not so easy Note you must delete and reinsert each image one at a time selecting the Link option when you do so 344 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Edit Links x Source file Element calc autoformat bmp lt All formats gt Graphic calc delete bmp lt All formats gt Graphic sort lists 1 bmp lt All formats gt Graphic Break Link Source file file D aaaa calc autoformat bmp Element lt All formats gt Type Graphic Update Figure 284 The Edit Links dialog Inserting an image from the clipboard Using the clipboard you can copy images into an OOo document from another OOo document and from other programs To do this 1 Open both the source document and the target document 2 In the source document select the image the image to be copied 3 Move the mouse pointer over the selected image and press Control C to copy the image to the clipboard 4 Switch to the target document 5 Click to place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted 6 Press Control V to insert the image Caution Ifthe application from which the graphic was copied is closed before the graphic is pasted into the target the image stored on A the clipboard could be lost Inserting an image using a scanner If a scanner is connected to your computer OOo can call the scanning application and inserted the scanned item into the OOo docum
134. Odometer reading Motel Number NUMERIC Tolls Number NUMERIC total tolls Breakfast Number NUMERIC BPayment Text VARCHAR payment type Lunch Number NUMERIC LPayment Text VARCHAR payment type Supper Number NUMERIC SPayment Text VARCHAR payment type SnackNo Number NUMERIC SnackCost Number NUMERIC SnPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for snacks Miscellaneous Number NUMERIC misc costs MPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for motel MiscNotes Memo LONGVARCHS al MiscPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for miscellaneous Figure 189 Fields in Vacations table 262 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating tables for the list box When the same information can be used in several fields design a table for each type of information Each table will contain two fields the information field and ID in that order You must create these tables with the information field listed first and the ID field listed last Failure to do so will produce the wrong results For my Payment table I use Name and ID as Caution my fields with Dan Kevin and Cash being the Name entries A The corresponding ID entries are 0 1 2 When the Name field is listed first in the table one of the three names will appear in the payment field of the Fuel table If the ID field is listed first 0 1 or 2 appear in the payment field instead 1
135. Recovery information every and set the time interval Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 29 Renaming and deleting files You can rename or delete files within the OOo dialogs just as you can in your usual file manager However you cannot copy or paste files within the dialogs Using the Open and Save As dialogs You can choose whether to use the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs or the ones provided by your operating system To view or change which type of dialog OpenOffice org uses 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General 2 Select the Use OpenOffice org dialogs option This section discusses the OpenOffice org Open and Save As dialogs Figure 11 shows the Save As dialog the Open dialog is similar Save as x C Documents and SettingsiJean Hollis Weber My Cocuments opener Published drafts Title Type Size Dake modified i 010165 WhatIsOoa odk OpenDocument Text 259 1 KB 02 08 2005 17 01 56 E 010255 SkartingOOd odk OpenDocument Text 437 4 KE 19 07 2005 20 45 07 010365 FileManagement adt OpenDocument Text 450 9 KB 30 09 2005 10 42 58 G 010455 Menus4ndToolbars qd OpenDocument Text 2305 6 KE 19 07 92005 20 40 2 a 0105055 SettingUpOtn odt OpenDocument Text 562 5 KE OF 082005 06 09 2 E 010665 GettingStartedwithwr OpenDocument Text 166 MB 21 07 2005 15 395 G O10765 GettingStartedwithCal OpenDocument Text 691 4 KE 19 07 2005 19 45 54 File name 010365 FileManagement hall File type O
136. Save From this point on all changes you make to the document will occur only in the Microsoft Word document You have changed the name and file type of your document If you want to go back to working with the odt version of your document you must open it again To have 000 save documents by default in the Microsoft Word file format go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save See Choosing options for loading and saving documents in Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org Tip Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 93 Save as x D Document Files Microsoft Office Title Type 7 Auto Save Folder C Family Folder CI Graphic Images Folder J Miscellaneous Folder CI Outlook Folder 7 Templates Folder File name soi template _ v2 eee Tae a ae SST OpenDocument 7 Text adt OpenDocument Text Template ott OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sxw _ Save with passwo ae org 1 0 Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 97 2000 P doc Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtf Star Writer 5 0 sdw StarWriter 5 0 Template vor Figure 66 Saving a file in Microsoft Word a Working with text Working with text selecting copying pasting moving in Writer is Similar to working with text in any other program OOo also has some convenient ways to select items that are not next to each other select a vertical block of text and paste unformatted text Selecting items th
137. Setting up the slide show Impress gives you the tools to organize and display a slide show including e Which slides to show and in what order e Whether to run the show automatically or manually e Transitions between slides e Animations on individual slides e Interactions what happens when you click a button or link Chapter 9 of the Impress Guide describes these tools Most tasks associated with putting together a show from your slides are best done in Slide Sorter view Choose View gt Slide Sorter from the menu bar or click the Slide Sorter tab at the top of the workspace All of your slides appear in the workspace you may need to scroll to see them all Custom animations are found on the Tasks pane This is an advanced technique and is explained in Chapter 9 Slide Shows in the Impress Guide Your first slide show should probably have the same slide transition for all slides Setting Advance slide to On mouse Click is the default and a simple setting If you want each slide to be shown for a specific amount of time click Automatically after and enter the number of seconds Click Apply to all slides 214 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Slide transition choices are also found on the Tasks pane For more information about slide transitions see Chapter 9 in the Impress Guide The Slide transition section has a very useful choice Automatic preview Select its checkbox Then when you make any Changes in a slide
138. Started with OpenOffice org 3 x To save an open document with the current file name choose File gt Save This will overwrite the last saved state of the file Password protection To protect an entire document from being viewable without a password use the option on the Save As dialog to enter a password This option is only available for files saved in OpenDocument formats or the older OpenOffice org 1 x formats 1 On the Save As dialog select the Save with password option and then click Save You will receive a prompt Figure 10 2 Type the same password in both fields and then click OK If the passwords match the document is saved password protected If the passwords do not match you receive the prompt to enter the password again Enter Password Enter password Reenter password WARNING IF vou lose or Forget the password it cannot be recovered Itis advisable to keep passwords in a safe place Passwords are case sensi Figure 10 Entering a password for a document OOo uses a very strong encryption mechanism that makes it almost impossible to recover the contents of a document in case you lose the password Saving a document automatically You can choose to have OpenOffice org save files for you automatically Automatic saving like manual saving overwrites the last saved state of the file To set up automatic file saving 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General 2 Mark Save Auto
139. The first four move backwards or forwards through the records or to the beginning or end The fifth button with a small star inserts a new record Figure 219 Record 2 Jo 3 i es Insert new record Figure 219 View Data Sources navigation buttons To delete a record right click on the gray box to the left of a row to highlight the entire row and select Delete Rows to remove the selected row al Table Format 24 99 8 299 91354 7 Dan Row Height 27 50 12 557 91699 3 Cash L Delete Rows 35 12 10 233 92213 5 Kevin Recordi Jo 4 is Pe pha Figure 220 Deleting a row in the Data View window Launching Base to work on data sources You can launch OOo Base at any time from the View Data Source pane Just right click on a database or the Tables or Queries icons and select Edit Database File Once in Base you can edit add and delete tables queries forms and reports Using data sources in Writer and Calc Data can be placed into Writer and Calc documents from the tables in the data source window In Writer values from individual fields can be inserted Or a complete table can be created in the Writer document One common way to use a data source is to perform a mail merge Choosing Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard or clicking on the Mail Merge icon on the View Data Source pane launches the Mail Merge wizard which steps you through creating a mail merge document See Chapter 11 in the Writer Guide Tip
140. The results are shown in Figure 122 162 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Format Cells Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Text alignment Horizontal Vertical opt Text orientation a Degrees C Vertically stacked m L y l Sh 0 a ABCD g F Reference edge A w EE a Ao Properties Hyphenation active Figure 121 Format Cells gt Alignment dialog This cell is not set to wrap text automatically So they text will just keep going and goir This cell is set to wrap text automatically The cell will fit more text without getting wider Figure 122 Automatic text wrap Using manual line breaks To insert a manual line break while typing in a cell press Ctri Enter This method does not work with the cursor in the input line When editing text first double click the cell then single click at the position where you want the line break When a manual line break is entered the cell width does not change Figure 123 shows the results of using two manual line breaks after the first line of text Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc This line contains manual line breaks Lines can be spaced out this way Also the cell width doesnt change but the text can go on Figure 123 Cell with manual line breaks Shrinking text to fit the cell The font size of the data in a cell can automatically adjust to fit in a cel
141. Ti As you create your own databases you need to also determine p where tables are related and how 1 To begin defining relationships choose Tools gt Relationships The Automobile OpenOffice org Base Relation Design window opens and the Add Tables dialog pops up You can also open it by clicking the Add Tables icon on the Relation Design window 2 On the Add Tables dialog use either of these ways to add a table to the Relation Design window 264 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x e Double click the name of the table In our case do this for both Vacations and Fuel e Or click the name of the table and then click Add for each table 3 Click Close to close the Add Tables dialog when you have added the tables you want 4 You can define the relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables in two ways e Click and drag the Date field in the Fuel table to the Date field in the Vacations table When you release the mouse button a connecting line forms between the two date fields Figure 191 B Vacations Fuel 1 amp 7 Date 7 FuellD al ne Odometer Breakfast FuelGost 0 FuelQuanity Lela neater Figure 191 Designation for a 1 n relationship e Or click the New Relation icon This opens the Relations window Figure Error Reference source not found Our two tables are listed in the Tables involved section In the Fields involved section click the dropdown list under the Fuel labe
142. Web Pages Saving Documents as HTML Files Introduction This chapter describes how to do the following in Writer Calc Draw and Impress e Create hyperlinks within a document and to other documents such as web pages PDFs and other files e Save documents as web pages HTML documents When creating a document that you plan to deliver as a web page you need to consider the following e In an HTML document hyperlinks are active clickable but other cross references inserted by OOo are not active links e An object such as a image is saved as a separate file However if that object has been placed in a frame for example with an associated caption it is not saved and does not appear in the HTML document instead the name of the frame appears Inserting hyperlinks When you type text such as a website addresses or URL that can be used as a hyperlink and then press the spacebar or the Enter key OOo automatically creates the hyperlink and applying formatting to the text usually a color and underlining If this does not happen you can enable this feature using Tools gt AutoCorrect Options gt Options and selectingthe URL Recognition option If you do not want OOo to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink choose Edit gt Undo Insert from the menu bar or press Control Z immediately after the formatting has been applied Hyperlinks between documents can be set as relative or absolute using the Save URLs relative to
143. Zoom v ih Shift Figure 161 An arrow on a floating toolbar indicates additional functions 220 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x The tools available in the various toolbars are explained in the following sections The appearance of the toolbar icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar looks like this S H D al y GS be SR It is the same for all parts of OpenOffice org Line and Filling toolbar The Line and Filling toolbar lets you modify the main properties of a drawing object See page 240 for details D aa C H poom E see e A ovr eses e a If the selected object is text the toolbar changes to the one shown below which is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer E Drawing toolbar The Drawing toolbar is the most important toolbar in Draw It contains all the necessary functions for drawing various geometric and freehand shapes and organizing them on the page Color Bar To display the Color Bar use View gt Toolbars gt Color Bar The toolbar then appears at the bottom of the workspace XHEEEEERES EO EOC 888 TititiiT itt titi ttt ttt hh See SEEEEEROESSS HORE E E HE This toolbar lets you rapidly choose the color of the objects in your drawing The first box in the panel corresponds to transparency no color You can access several special
144. a en saceaneacscoseesenseaveasevensanacaeueoussscsqsoeeeeneeee 379 RG Gs ca sitet cae A E E EENAA 384 Sometimes the macro recorder fAilS cc ccc ecc cece ee eeeeeceeneeeneees 388 AC OO arc ereesc sac see ann sc nE nsendemamesoasnnsieacussaseesenuemniaumenaeeass 390 EOV Oi a T EEE EEE EEES 395 Eden E a e ONE E A OEE O E OO E TTET 400 Writing macros without the recorder sssssrcsesessereresssreesererereees 400 Finding more information sesessesesesseresssrreesssssessssesseseserererereee 401 Chapter 14 Customizing OpPeNOPPfiCe OFG cssesssccccccccccccccccssscccccccccccces 403 TO OTE E E EE EAE 404 Customizing menu content c00 ere EEE E E EE 404 8 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Customizing TOG ie seit gecancaeu sean aevconaanmenmenmannisaoaeiaeniawenonaeeenneseas 408 Assigning shortcut KEYS cece cece cece ccecenceneeeceenseeneeesseeseeneeeneees 412 Assigning macros to CVENUS cccccccscveccccsccecccsscesccesceescesscesseescees 415 Adding functionality with extensionS esssecssescsessesesererereeersssse 415 Uomo Eae O a E E een re ee eee 416 Appendix A Keyboard ShortcutsS ssccsecceccceccecccecsecseesoecceccececceseccesecceseo 419 TA OCG EIA PAREEN P EN P A EA E E E E E T 420 Function key shortcuts osesesseseseeesseecseserresssereessereeesseereessreeeese 421 General shortcut keys for OpenOffice Org sscccccccsssessssesesseersses 422
145. a of the OOo options Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt Grid Grid Snap to grid Resolution Subdivision Horizontal 0 50cm Horizontal 10 point s Vertical 0 50cm Vertical 10 point s L Synchronize axes snap Snap position L To snap lines _ When creating or moving objects To the page margins Extend edges L To object frame When rotating 15 00 degrees _ To object points Point reduction 15 00 degrees A Snap range 5 Pixels Figure 166 Setting grid options In the dialog shown in Figure 166 you can set the following parameters e Vertical and horizontal spacing of the dots in the grid You can also change the unit of measurement used in the general Draw options Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General e The resolution is the size of the squares or rectangles in the grid If the resolution is Horizontal 1 cm Vertical 2 cm the grid consists of rectangles 2 cm high and 1 cm wide e Subdivisions are additional points that appear along the sides of each rectangle or square in the grid Objects snap to subdivisions as well as to the corners of the grid Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 225 e The pixel pix element size of the snap area defines how close you need to bring an object to a snap point or line before it will Snap to it Changing the color of the grid points The default grid dots are light gray which can be hard to see To improve visibility go to Tools
146. a paragraph by pressing the Tab key on the keyboard Using the default tab spacing can cause formatting problems if you Share documents with other people If you use the default tab spacing and then send the document to someone else who has chosen a different default tab spacing tabbed material will change to use the other person s settings This may cause major formatting problems Instead of using the defaults define your own tab settings as described in this section To define indents and tab settings for one or more selected paragraphs double click on a part of the ruler that is not between the left and right indent icons to open the Indents amp Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog Double click anywhere between the left and right Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 99 indent icons on the ruler to open the Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog Figure 75 A better strategy is to define tabs for the paragraph style See Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide for more information Using tabs to space out material on a page is not recommended Tip Depending on what you are trying to accomplish a table is usually a better choice Changing the default tab stop interval Any changes to the default tab setting will affect the existing Note default tab stops in any document you open afterward as well as tab stops you insert after making the change To set the measurement unit and the spacing of default tab stop intervals go
147. able FuellD Fuel Fuel Fuel Step 4 Set the criterion for the query We want the query s FuelID to begin with the numeral 1 1 Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell under FuelID in the query table 2 Click the Run Query icon in the Query Design toolbar Figure 231 Figure 231 Query Design toolbar Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 297 Figure 232 contains the Fuel table with my entries and the query results based upon the Fuel table the query results are in the right table FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity 0 Friday M 16 00 14 690 704 2 1 iB 6 430 1 Friday M 7 00 6 430 TT T 2 1032 3 19 570 2 Saturday 20 00 19 570 1032 3 3 1239 4 15 150 3 Saturday 16 00 15 150 1239 4 4 4 sunday lt AutoFie lt AutoF ie Figure 232 Fuel table and query of the fuel table Step 5 Save and close the query Since this query contains the ending odometer reading for our calculations name it End Reading when saving it Then close the query Step 6 Create the query to calculate the fuel economy 1 Click Create Query in Design View to open a new query 2 Add the Fuel table to the query just as you did in step 2 Add tables But do not close the Add Tables window 3 Add the End Reading query to this query a Click Queries to get the list of queries in the database Add Table or Query Tables Queries E Query _CD Collection Figu
148. acts as two library containers one container for macros distributed with OpenOffice org called OpenOffice org Macros and one container for personal macros called My Macros As shown in Figure 305 only two documents are currently open Macro name Macro from Existing macros in Recorded AEs aoe ly Macros E OpenOffice org Macros 0117GS GettingStartedwithMacros_ z AndrewBase Ge HE New Organizer Help 4 l Figure 305 Library containers are shown on the left The OpenOffice org Macros are stored with the application runtime code which may not be editable to you unless you are an administrator This is just as well since these macros should not be changed and you should not store your own macros in the OOo container Unless your macros are applicable to a single document and only to a single document your macros will probably be stored in the My Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 391 Macros container The My Macros container is stored in your user area or home directory If a macro is contained in a document then a recorded macro will attempt to work on that document primarily because it uses ThisComponent for its actions Fvery library container contains a library named Standard It is better to create your own libraries with meaningful names than to use the Standard library Not only are meaningful names easier to manage but they can also be imported into other library co
149. adsheets drawings presentations and more developed at OASIS an independent international standards group Unlike other file formats ODF is an open standard It is publicly available royalty free and without legal or other restrictions therefore ODF files are not tied to a specific office suite and anybody can build a program that interprets these files For this reason ODF is quickly becoming the preferred file format for government agencies schools and other companies who prefer not to be too dependent on a particular software supplier Because OOo 3 2 currently requires a superset of the ODF 1 2 Specification it now warns users when ODF 1 2 Extended features have been used The document integrity check now proves whether an ODF document conforms to the ODF specification this mainly affects ODF 1 2 documents If an inconsistency is found the document is treated as a broken one and OpenOffice org offers to repair the document File formats OOo can open OpenOffice org can open a wide variety of file formats in addition to the OpenDocument formats Opening text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt ott oth and odm Writer 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxw stw and sxg and the following text document formats Appendix B Background Information 427 Microsoft Word 6 0 95 97 2000 XP doc and dot Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 XML docx docm dotx dotm M
150. alc can export spreadsheets to Adobe s PDF and to HTML Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 11 Impress presentations Impress provides all the common multimedia presentation tools such as special effects animation and drawing tools It is integrated with the advanced graphics capabilities of OOo s Draw and Math components Slideshows can be further enhanced with Fontwork s special effects text as well as sound and video clips Impress is compatible with Microsoft s PowerPoint file format and can also save your work in numerous graphics formats including Macromedia Flash SWF Draw vector graphics Draw is a vector drawing tool that can produce everything from simple diagrams or flowcharts to 3 D artwork Its Smart Connectors feature allows you to define your own connection points You can use Draw to create drawings for use in any of OOo s other components and you can create your own clip art and add it to the Gallery Draw can import graphics from many common formats and save them in over 20 formats including PNG HTML PDF and Flash Base database Base provides tools for day to day database work within a simple interface It can create and edit forms reports queries tables views and relations so that managing a connected database is much the same as in other popular database applications Base provides many new features such as the ability to analyze and edit relationships from a diagram view Base in
151. an use in Impress are e Date fixed e Date variable updates automatically when you reload the file e Time fixed e Time variable updates automatically when you reload the file Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 205 e Author First and last names listed in the OpenOffice org user data e Page number slide number e File name To change the number format 1 2 3 or a b c or 1 ii iii etc for the page number field choose Format gt Page and then select Tip a format from the list in the Layout Settings area To change the author information go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt User Data Adding and formatting text Text in slides is contained in text boxes There are two ways to add text boxes to a slide e Choose a predefined layout from the Layouts section of the Tasks pane These text boxes are called AutoLayout text boxes e Create a text box using the text tool Using text boxes created from the Layout pane In Normal view 1 Click in the text box that reads Click to add text Click to add an outline or a similar notation 2 Type or paste your text in the text box Using text boxes created from the text box tool In Normal View 1 Click on the Text icon T on the Drawing toolbar If the toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Drawing 2 Click and drag to draw a box for the text on the slide Do not worry about the vertical size and positi
152. an use the entries in the OpenOffice org Paths dialog to Tip compile a list of files such as those containing AutoText that you need to back up or copy to another computer Paths used by OpenOffice org hormne jeanw eber openoffice org 3 userfautocorr AutoText home jeanw eber openoffice org 3 user autotext Backups home jeanw eber openoftice org 3 user backup Gallery home jeanw eber openoffice org 3 user gallery Graphics horne jeanw eber openoffice org 3 user gallery My Documents horne jeanw eber Documents Templates home jeanw eber openoffice org 3 user template Temporary files ftrnp gt Figure 24 Viewing the paths of files used by OpenOffice org Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 43 Color options On the OpenOffice org Colors page Figure 25 you can specify colors to use in OOo documents You can select a color from a color table edit an existing color and define new colors These colors are stored in your color palette and are then available in all components of OOo Propertes Name Blue 8 Add Colour Blue amp v Colour table i ii m oe E R x ft ft R 153 ta TCT TTT oie EnC EEES E M1 G ie g 255 f A BEEE ae E O O C E a ttt st Figure 25 Defining colors to use in color palettes in OOo To modify a color 1 Select the color to modify from the list or the color table 2 Enter the new values th
153. anced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Polygons Draw the first line from the start point with the left mouse button held down As soon as you release the mouse button a first corner point is drawn and you can move the mouse to see how the second line will look Every mouse click sets another corner point A double click ends the drawing A filled polygon automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off the figure and fills it with the current standard fill color A polygon without filling will not be closed at the end of the drawing Polygon 45 Just as with ordinary polygons these will be formed from lines but with angles of 45 or 90 degrees between them Freeform Line With this tool you can draw just like with a pencil Press and hold the left mouse button and move the mouse It is not necessary to end the drawing with a double click Just release the mouse button and the drawing is completed If you have selected Freeform Line Filled the end point is joined automatically to the start point and the object is filled with the appropriate color Writing text Use the Text tool T to write text and select the font color size and other attributes Click on an empty space in the workspace to write the text at that spot or drag an area to write inside the dragged frame Press Enter to drop to the next line When you have finished typing text click outside the text frame Double click on the text at any time to edi
154. and be sure the printer is set to the same orientation portrait or landscape as specified in the page setup for your document Usually the orientation does not matter but it does for brochures 2 Click Options In the Pages section of the Printer Options dialog choose Brochure and Right pages Click OK twice to print the first side of each page 3 Flip the pages and put them back into the printer in the correct orientation to print on the blank side You may need to experiment a bit to find out what the correct arrangement is for your printer 4 Choose File gt Print and check Properties to make sure the printer setup is still correct 5 Click Options again In the Pages section of the Printer Options dialog choose Brochure and Left page Click OK twice to print the second sides 6 If your printer can do double sided then click on the options for Left pages Right pages and Brochure and it should not only do those but collate too Printing envelopes Printing envelopes involves two steps setup and printing To set up an envelope to be printed by itself or with your document 1 Choose Insert gt Envelope from the menu bar 2 In the Envelope dialog start with the Envelope tab Figure 85 Verify add or edit the information in the Addressee and Sender boxes the from on the envelope You can type information directly into the Addressee and Sender boxes or use the right hand drop down lists to select the
155. and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Formatting x Defaut y 32 E 5 i c eo fl PTT ET TEE LET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 41 12 13 14 1 Open Styles and 5 Align Right 10 Numbering On Off Formatting Window 6 Justified 11 Bullets On Off 2 Apply Style 7 Line Spacing 1 12 Decrease Indent 3 Align Left 8 Line Spacing 1 5 13 Increase Indent 4 Centered 9 Line Spacing 2 14 Paragraph format dialog Figure 74 Formatting toolbar showing icons for paragraph formatting Formatting characters You can apply many formats to characters using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 75 shows the Formatting toolbar as a floating toolbar customized to show only the buttons for character formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View E Derun v Timesnewromen he y B 7 UM MII A Y AL x I E F PAPPLLTLLrs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 44 45 1 Open Styles and Formatting 6 Italic 12 Font Color Window 7 Underline 13 Highlighting 2 Apply Style 8 Superscript 14 Background Color 3 Font Name 9 Subscript 15 Open Character Format 4 Font Size 10 Increase Font Dialog 5 Bold 11 Reduce Font Figure 75 Formatting toolbar showing icons for character formatting To remove manual formatting select the text and choose Tip Format gt Default Formatting or right click and choose
156. apter 15 Using Forms in Writer in the Writer Guide Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 131 OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Calc Using Spreadsheets in OpenOffice org What is Calc Calc is the spreadsheet component of OpenOffice org OOo You can enter data usually numerical in a spreadsheet and then manipulate this data to produce certain results Alternatively you can enter data and then use Calc in a What If manner by changing some of the data and observing the results without having to retype the entire spreadsheet Other features provided by Calc include e Functions which can be used to create formulas to perform complex calculations on data e Database functions to arrange store and filter data e Dynamic charts a wide range of 2D and 3D charts e Macros for recording and executing repetitive tasks e Ability to open edit and save Microsoft Excel spreadsheets e Import and export of spreadsheets in multiple formats including HTML CSV PDF and PostScript If you want to use macros written in Microsoft Excel using the VBA macro code in OOo you must first edit the code in the OOo Basic IDE editor See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros in this book and Chapter 12 in the Calc Guide Note Spreadsheets sheets and cells Calc works with documents called spreadsheets Spreadsheets consist of a number of individual sheets each sheet containing cells arranged in rows and column
157. ar expressions so you cannot display contents that are similar but not identical by using automatic filters Standard filters are more complex than automatic filters You can set as many as three conditions as a filter combining them with the 170 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x operators AND and OR Standard filters are mostly useful for numbers although a few of the conditional operators such as and lt gt can also be useful for text Other conditional operators for standard filters include options to display the largest or smallest values or a percentage of them Useful in themselves standard filters take on added value when used to further refine automatic filters Advanced filters are structured similarly to standard filters The differences are that advanced filters are not limited to three conditions and their criteria are not entered in a dialog Instead advanced filters are entered in a blank area of a sheet then referenced by the advanced filter tool to apply them Sorting records Sorting arranges the visible cells on the sheet In Calc you can sort by up to three criteria with each criterion applied one after the other Sorts are handy when you are searching for a particular item and become even more powerful after you have filtered data In addition sorting is often useful when you add new information When a list is long it is usually easier to add new information at the bottom of the sheet
158. ar changes to show the options for editing the object The toolbar shown in Figure 284 appears when you use Fontwork in Writer 358 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Area Style Filling A Guides When Moving Figure 295 Formatting toolbar for a Fontwork object in Writer This figure shows the toolbar floating In its default docked position it is one of the toolbars located below the menu bar The example toolbar has also been customized to show all of the available options by default only a subset of these options is shown On the Formatting toolbar you have a large choice of options for customizing your object These choices are the same as the ones for other drawing objects For more information see the Draw Guide Line options Line icon Opens a dialog with three tabs Line Line Styles Arrow Styles Use the Line tab to edit the most common properties of the line around the selected Fontwork object by choosing from previously defined attributes including line style line color and arrow styles Use the Lines Styles and Arrow Styles tabs to edit the properties of line and arrow styles and define new styles Arrow Style icon Choose from the different arrow styles Line Style box Choose from the available line styles Line Width box Set the width of the line Line Color box Select the color of the line
159. ar in the contents list then use Tools gt Outline Numbering to tell Writer which styles go with which level in the table of contents See Chapter 4 for more information Defining a sequence of styles You can set up one paragraph style so that when you press Enter at the end of that paragraph the following paragraph automatically has the style you wish applied to it For example you could define a Heading 1 paragraph to be followed by a Text Body paragraph A more complex example would be Title followed by Author followed by Abstract followed by Heading 1 followed by Text Body By setting up these sequences you can avoid manually applying styles in most cases 86 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer Word Processing with OpenOffice org What ts Writer Writer is the word processor component of OpenOffice org OOo In addition to the usual features of a word processor spelling check thesaurus hyphenation autocorrect find and replace automatic generation of tables of contents and indexes mail merge and others Writer provides these important features e Templates and styles see Chapter 3 e Page layout methods including frames columns and tables e Embedding or linking of graphics spreadsheets and other objects e Built in drawing tools e Master documents to group a collection of documents into a single document e Change tracking during revi
160. ard MyMacros PrintHello Remove Save Document As Figure 313 PrintHello is assigned to the Open Document event Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 399 Extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into OpenOffice org to add new functionality Extensions can be written in almost any programming language and may be simple or sophisticated Extensions can be grouped into types e Calc Add Ins which provide new functionality for Calc including new functions that act like normal built in functions e New components and functionality which normally include some level of UI integration such as new menus or toolbars e Data pilots that are used directly in Calc e Chart Add Ins with new chart types e Linguistic components such as spell checkers e Document templates and images Although individual extensions can be found in different places there is an extension repository at http extensions services openoffice org For more about obtaining and installing extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Writing macros without the recorder The examples covered in this chapter are created using the macro recorder and the dispatcher You can also write macros that directly access the objects that comprise OpenOffice org In other words you can directly manipulate a document Directly manipulating OOo s internal objects is an advanced topic that is beyond the scope of this chapter A simple exam
161. ard toolbar or choose Edit gt Undo from the menu bar The Edit menu shows the latest change that can be undone see Figure 14 for an example from Writer Untitled OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Insert Format Table Te T p Undo Delete rabbi Ctrl Z Redo Typing fox Ctl Figure 14 Edit gt Undo last action Click the small triangle to the right of the Undo icon to get a list of all the changes that can be undone Figure 15 You can select multiple changes and undo them at the same time lur oS w Cet Pastecipboard i sts s Delete 1 Change style graphics 17 Insert graphics Delete graphics Undo 1 action Figure 15 List of actions that can be undone After changes have been undone Redo becomes active To redo a change select Edit gt Redo or press Control Y or click on the Redo icon ad As with Undo click on the triangle to the right of the arrow to get a list of the changes that can be reapplied To modify the number of changes OpenOffice org remembers choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Memory and in the Undo section change Number of steps Be aware that asking OOo to remember more changes consumes more computer memory Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 33 Closing a document To close a document choose File gt Close You can also close a document by clicking on the Close icon on the document window This button looks like
162. argin adjusts how far the header or footer is from the side of the page Spacing Spacing affects how far above or below the sheet the header or footer will print So if spacing is set to 1 00 then there will be 1 inch between the header or footer and the sheet Height Height affects how big the header or footer will be Page Style Default Xx Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Same content left right Left margin Right margin Spacing Height AutoFit height Figure 134 Header dialog Header or footer appearance To change the appearance of the header or footer click More From this dialog Figure 135 you can set the background and border of the header or footer Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 179 Border Background Borders Background Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Default Left 0 00cm E FE Right 0 00cem User defined Top 0 00cm A Bottom 0 00cm pe Synchronize Shadow style Position stance EE LPL 0 18cm Figure 135 Header Footer Border Background Contents of the header or footer The header or footer of a Calc spreadsheet has three columns for text Each column can have different contents To set the contents of the header or footer click the Edit button in the header or footer dialog shown in Figure 134 to display the dialog Shown in Figure 1
163. arted with OpenOffice org 3 x 3 Add a tilde in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator For example to select the Save All command by pressing Alt V enter Sa ve ALL Adding a command to a menu You can add commands to the supplied menus and to menus you have created On the Customize dialog select the menu in the Menu list and click the Add button in the Menu Content section of the dialog On the Add Commands dialog select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence Add Commands To add a command to a menu select the category and then the command You can also drag the command to the Commands list of the Menus tab page in the Customize dialog Category Commands Application z About OOo dev Add View AutoPilot Address Data Sourc Templates AutoPilot Presentation Edit Bibliography Database Options Create HTML Document BASIC Create Master Document Help Insert Edit Macros Documents Exit Format Extended Tips Controls a Help Navigate Help Agent Table Help on Help Drawing amp Load URL z Graphic v 4 gt Description Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights Figure 316 Adding a command to a menu Modifying menu entr
164. ary using Tools gt Languages gt More dictionaries online The language used for checking spelling is also shown in the status bar next to the page style in use You can also configure the language for a paragraph or a group of characters as None This option is particularly useful in the case where you insert in the document text that you do not want to spellcheck such as web addresses or programming language snippets Using AutoCorrect Writer s AutoCorrect function has a long list of common misspellings and typing errors which it corrects automatically For example hte will be changed to the 102 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Choose Tools gt AutoCorrect Options to open the AutoCorrect dialog There you can define which strings of text are corrected and how In most cases the defaults are fine AutoCorrect is turned on when Writer is installed To turn it off uncheck Format gt AutoCorrect gt While Typing To stop Writer replacing a specific spelling go to the Replace tab highlight the word pair and click Delete To add a new spelling to the list type it into the Replace and With boxes on the Replace tab and click New See the different tabs of the dialog for the wide variety of other options available to fine tune AutoCorrect AutoCorrect can be used as a quick way to insert special Tip characters For example c will be autocorrected to You can add your own special character
165. assword You will be asked to enter it once per session if OGo dey retrieves a password From the protected password list Waster Password Macro security Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted macro Macro Security developers File sharing options For this document Open this document in read only mode Figure 28 Choosing security options for opening and saving documents Macro security Click the Macro Security button to open the Macro Security dialog not shown here where you can adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted sources File sharing options for this document Select the Open this document in read only mode option to restrict this document to be opened in read only mode only This option protects the document against accidental changes It is still possible to edit a copy of the document and save that copy with the Same name as the original Select the Record changes option to enable recording changes This is the same as Edit gt Changes gt Record To allow other users of this document to apply changes but prevent them from disabling change recording click the Protect buton and enter a password Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 47 Security options and warnings Security warnings Warn if document contains recorded changes versions hidden information or notes When signing _ When printing _ When creating PDF files Security options
166. at are not consecutive To select nonconsecutive items as shown in Figure 67 using the mouse 1 Select the first piece of text 2 Hold down the Control key and use the mouse to select the next piece of text 3 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text copy it delete it change the style or whatever Macintosh users substitute the Command key when Note instructions in this chapter say to use the Control key 94 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x The Country of the Blind Th i r hi LLEN dred miles cl d Mare from Chimb eras HILG hundred from the STRAWS of Cotopaxi wastes of irniaemaite Chere lies that mysterious mountain valley cut off from all the w Country o ATG Long years apo that valley lay so far open to the world that men might through fiightiil gorges and over an icy pass into its equable meadows and thither indeed im or so of Peruvian halfbreeds fleeing from the lust and tyranny ofan evil BRERA Then stupendous outbreak of Mindobamba when it was night in ie for seventeen days and the at Yaguachi and all the fish floating dying even as far as EBERT everywhere alon i were land slips and switt thawings and sudden floods and one whole side of the old came down in thunder and cut off te TEE for ever from the exploring feet these carly settlers had chanced to be on the hither side of the gorges when the world had so itself and he perforce had to forget his wife and his chi
167. at before you add any data Deleting a table removes all of the data contained in every field of the table Unless you are sure do not delete a table Creating tables in Design View Design View is a more advanced method for creating a new table in which you directly enter information about each field in the table We will use this method for the tables of our database Note While the Field type and formatting are different in Design View the concepts are the same as in the Wizard Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 259 The first table to be created is Fuel Its fields are FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType 1 Click Create Table in Design View 2 FuellD field a Type FuellD as the first Field Name Press the Tab key to move to the Field Type column b Select Integer INTEGER as the Field Type from the dropdown list The default setting is Text VARCHAR A shortcut for selecting from the Field Type dropdown list press Tip the key for the first letter of the choice You can cycle through the choices for a given letter by repeatedly pressing that key c Change the Field Properties in the bottom section Change AutoValue from No to Yes d Set FuelID as the Primary key Right click on the green triangle to the left of FuelID Figure 186 and choose Primary Key from the menu This places a key icon in front of FuellD _ FieldName Field Type og FuellD Integer INTEGER
168. at define the color If necessary change the settings from RGB Red Green Blue to CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black or vice versa The changed color appears in the lower of the two color preview boxes at the top 3 Modify the Name as required 4 Click the Modify button The newly defined color is now listed in the Color table Alternatively click the Edit button to open the Color dialog shown in Figure 26 Here you can select a color from one of the color windows in the upper area or you can enter values in the lower area using your choice of RGB CMYK or HSB Hue Saturation and Brightness values The upper right color window is linked directly with the color input fields in the lower area as you choose a color in the upper window the numbers change accordingly The two color fields at the lower right Show the value of the selected color on the left and the currently set value from the color value fields on the right 44 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Modify the color components as required and click OK to exit the dialog The newly defined color now appears in the lower of the color preview boxes shown in Figure 17 Type a name for this color in the Name box then click the Add button A small box showing the new color is added to the Color table Cancel Hue 210 Saturation 40 a Y a a ok E mk Y Brightness 100 Another way to define or alter colors is t
169. aved mode mode changes Figure 7 Left end of status bar in Writer Outline Numbering Level 2 4 OG EG O 1e 120 Digital Object View Zoom Zoom signature Information lay out slider percent Figure 8 Right end of status bar in Writer Common status bar items are described below Page sheet or slide number Shows the current page sheet or slide number and the total number of pages sheets or slides in the document Double click on this field to open the Navigator Other uses of this field depend on the component Page style or slide design Shows the current page style or slide design To edit the current page style or slide design double click on this field Unsaved changes An asterisk appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 25 Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon el You can double click the icon to view the certificate shows here Object information Displays information relevant to the cursor s position or the selected element of the document Double clicking in this area usually opens a relevant dialog Zoom slider and percent To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Double clicking on the zoom level percent opens the Zoom amp View Layout dialog What a
170. b amp b alb nulls azb a b a b a b a b axb azb asb a b a b deb d b Figure 261 Tooltip indicates the Relations button Figure 262 After selecting Relations Step 4 Click on the a b symbol The equation editor now shows the markup pi lt gt simeq lt gt Step 5 Delete the lt gt text and add 3 14159 at the end of the equation We end up with the markup pi simeg 3 14159 The result is shown in Figure 263 3 14159 aria pe e pi simeq 3 14159 4 Figure 263 Final result Customizations Formula editor as a floating window The formula editor can cover a large part of the Writer window To turn the formula editor into a floating window do this 1 Hover the mouse over the editor frame as shown in Figure 264 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 319 2 Hold down the Control key and double click m Figure 264 Hold down the Control key and double click on the border of the formula editor to turn it into a floating window Figure 265 shows the result You can dock the floating window again by using the same steps Hold down the Control key and double click the window frame Commands Figure 265 Formula editor as a floating window How can I make a formula bigger This is one of the most common questions people ask about OOo Math The answer is simple but not intuitive 1 Start the formula editor and choose Format gt Font si
171. ble in over 40 languages and the OOo project provides spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries in over 70 languages and dialects OOo also provides support for both Complex Text Layout CTL and Right to Left RTL layout languages such as Hindi Hebrew and Arabic Consistent user interface All the components have a similar look and feel making them easy to use and master Integration The components of OpenOffice org are well integrated with one another All the components share a common spelling checker and other tools which are used consistently across the suite For example the drawing tools available in Writer are also found in Calc with similar but enhanced versions in Impress and Draw You do not need to know which application was used to create a particular file For example you can open a Draw file from Writer Granularity Usually if you change an option it affects all components However OOo options can be set at a component level or even document level File compatibility In addition to its native OpenDocument formats OOo includes PDF and Flash export capabilities as well as support for opening and saving files in many common formats including Microsoft Office HTML XML WordPerfect and Lotus 1 2 3 formats New in OO0o3 using an extension the ability to import and edit some PDF files Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 13 e No vendor lock in OO03 uses OpenDocument an XML
172. ble in a text document Tools contains functions such as Spelling and Grammar Customize and Options Window contains commands for the display window Help contains links to the OpenOffice org Help file What s This and information about the program See How to get help on page 15 Toolbars OOo has several types of toolbars docked floating and tear off Docked toolbars can be moved to different locations or made to float and floating toolbars can be docked Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 21 The top docked toolbar default position is called the Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is consistent across the OpenOffice org applications The second toolbar across the top default location is the Formatting toolbar It is a context sensitive bar that shows the relevant tools in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is on a graphic the Formatting bar provides tools for formatting graphics when the cursor is in text the tools are for formatting text Displaying or hiding toolbars To display or hide toolbars choose View gt Toolbars then click on the name of a toolbar in the list An active toolbar shows a checkmark beside its name Tear off toolbars are not listed in the View menu Submenus and tear off toolbars Toolbar icons with a small triangle to the right will display submenus tear off toolbars and other ways of selecting things depending on the
173. boxes in each slide is shown so if your slide includes other text boxes or drawing objects the text in these objects is not displayed Slide names are also not included Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Creating an Impress Presentation rai First Step Start File gt New gt Presentation Right click Quickstarter gt Presentation Second Step e Choose from Empty presentation New from scratch From template Figure 141 Outline view 188 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Outline view serves at least two purposes 4 Making changes in the text of a slide e You can add and delete the text in a slide just as you would in the Normal view e You can move the paragraphs of text in the selected slide up or down by using the up and down arrow buttons Move Up or Move Down on the Text Formatting toolbar e You can change the Outline Level for any of the paragraphs in a Slide using the left and right arrow buttons Promote or Demote e You can both move a paragraph and change its outline level using a combination of these four arrow buttons 5 Comparing the slides with your outline if you have prepared one in advance If you notice from your outline that another slide is needed you can create it directly in the Outline view pressing Enter when the cursor is on the first line of the slide or you can change to the Normal view to create it then return
174. button opens a directory picker The Further settings section in the bottom right part of the dialog is common to all the hyperlink types although some choices are more relevant to some types of links e Set the value of Frame to determine how the hyperlink will open This applies to documents that open in a Web browser e Form specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button e Text specifies the text that will be visible to the user e Name is applicable to HTML documents It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute in the HTML code behind the hyperlink e Event button this button will be activated to allow OOo to react to events for which the user has written some code macro This function is not covered in this book Editing hyperlinks To edit a hyperlink click anywhere in the link test and then open the Hyperlink dialog by clicking the Hyperlink icon on the Standard toolbar or choosing Edit gt Hyperlink from the menu bar Make your changes and click Apply If you need to edit several hyperlinks you can leave the Hyperlink dialog open until you have edited all of them Be sure to click Apply after each one When you are finished click Close The standard default behavior for activating hyperlinks within OOo is to use Ctrl click This behavior can be changed in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Security gt Options by deselecting the option Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks
175. c and are therefore capable of performing extremely complex calculations and data analysis If you need to analyze your data or apply formulas these operations are best performed in a Calc spreadsheet and the results displayed in an embedded Impress spreadsheet To add a spreadsheet to a slide select the corresponding layout in the list of predefined layouts in the Tasks pane This inserts a placeholder for a spreadsheet in the center of a slide To insert data and modify the 212 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x formatting of the spreadsheet it is necessary to activate it and enter the edit mode To do so double click inside the frame with the green handles Alternatively select Insert gt Spreadsheet from the main menu bar This opens a small spreadsheet in the middle of the slide When a spreadsheet is inserted using this method it is already in edit mode It is also possible to insert a spreadsheet as an OLE object To add a chart to a slide select the corresponding layout in the list of predefined layouts in the task pane or use the Insert Chart feature Impress offers the capability of inserting in a slide various other types of objects such as music or video clips Writer documents Math formulas generic OLE objects and so on A typical presentation may contain movie clips sound clips OLE objects and formulas other objects are less frequently used since they do not appear during a slide show For details on usi
176. ccc ce eceecec enc enseceecenees 220 THE basic drawing SWAP CS isis iecsuedwasnssentewinasandaneasdendatdaenstcasoaaensdenacin 227 Drawing geometric SNAPES ccceccescceccceccecceesceeseeeceesceestenseeeses ie BS EE TNS vos ees nae cas nen ew apn new nae DANIA aie aga aun aan IAEA AN TESES ENE AES Pee Selecting 0 6 20 i se es ae ee er 236 Moving and dynamically adjusting an object s SIZ cc ccc ee eee 237 Eating ODOC aeeie iinr ane EA E AAAA REINER 240 aT SPS a TE E EE E 242 Peca EEC ior ee ee E EEEE 243 Combining multiple objects seeessereseeseeseeresssssssssessssssrererereeee 245 Aids for positioning objects sessssesessssesssseeesssrrressreresseerrereeeeese 247 Inserting and editing pictureSsS sccsssesessressssereesererresereresssrerereeeee 247 6 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Working with OS setae ccs ccs resreecranacmsemnmneennoasmaienesesonmieneaniacean 247 ee aE K OPASAN E meee ee mene anor eter ene eae eer eer E ee E eee 248 Adding comments tO a CLAWING ccceccesccesceeesenceenseesseeeenseeees 248 Chapter 8 Getting Started With Base cccccssssssccccccccccccccccscsssccsssccees 250 TINO E E S E E 251 Planning a database esssseeesesereeeereresssrrressssereessreressseeerereereereeses 292 Creating a NEW database sssesessrerereerereerrsessssssssseseseeseereerereee 293 Creating database tableS seessseseseesereeeeseessss
177. ce org downlo ad_dictionary html How can you make it for free A large share of the development and much of the support for the project is currently Supplied or sponsored by Sun Microsystems There are also many other people who work on OOo as volunteers What if I need technical Support Read the section titled How to get help in Chapter 1 Introducting OpenOffice org 432 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Who owns the software Does that mean that they can take away the software The copyright is shared by Sun Microsystems and all the volunteers who have contributed No The licenses under which OOo is developed and distributed can never be revoked so it cannot be taken away I am writing a software application May I use programming code from OpenOffice org in my program You may within the parameters set in the LGPL Read the license http www openoffice org license html Why is my favorite feature from StarOffice not available in OOo That feature is probably a third party add on that Sun cannot distribute with OpenOffice org Why do I need Java to run OOo Is it written in Java OpenOffice org is not written in Java it is written in the C language Java is one of several languages that can be used to extend OOo The Java JDK JRE is only required for some features The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine Note Java is avai
178. ceceeceesensessenes 30 Using the gifs yale cls Gn ae i a ere re een etre eee 31 Undoing and redoing Changes ccceccescceccenccecteestenceenceesseeseess 33 Cosma a docume Ni eriein eree Eiren EEEE EE 34 Closing OpenOffice Org sseessesesesreressrserereseecesssreressseeresesesessseseeeee 34 Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice Org sssecsecccccsecceccsecsecccecoecseccsecsecseecceo 35 Choosing options for all Of OO0 ccc cece cece ce eeeeneeenseesseeeeenes 36 Choosing options for loading and saving document6 0008 92 Choosing language SettinGS cccecceceececcec enc eneensenceenseesseeseneeenees O7 Choosing Internet optionS ssesssssseesseressssereessreeesssreressseeresseeeeeee 60 Controlling OOo s AutoCorrect fUnctiOns ccc ccc ccc cece eee eneeeeeees 61 Chapter 3 Using Styles and Temp lates ccccccsccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 62 What is a template ccc ccc cccesececeeeceeeenseeecsseuceeeeuseeeseeeeuseseues 63 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 3 WY ie re 1S a EE E E EEE EE EEE EER 03 PN T E E E E AEEA EEA EAEN 05 Modifying styleS oeesssesseesesersessrererssrereessseeressseresserereesesserereereeeee 67 Creating new custom STYIES c cece cceccecencenceccecencessecseceecenseenees 69 Copying and moving SUVICS vccccissvistinccatianiaavsrbestanacesnatsnbarscswesoavensevesss 70 Deleting stylesS eesoseseeeeseresssrer
179. cess that tool from Tools gt Spelling and Grammar See Chapter 14 for more about installing extensions Note Choosing Internet options Use the Internet Options pages to define search engines and save proxy settings for use with OpenOffice org If you are using a Netscape or Mozilla browser such as Firefox you can enable the Mozilla Plug in so you can open OOo files in your browser print them save them and work with them in other ways If you are using a Unix or Linux based operating system including Mac OS X an additional page of E mail options is available where you can specify the e mail program to use when you send the current document as e mail Figure 43 Under Windows the operating system s default e mail program is always used Options Internet E mail OpenOffice org Load Save Language Settings OpenOffice org Writer E mail program mozilla thunderbird OpenOffice org Writer Web OpenOffice org Base Charts Internet Proxy Search Mozilla Plug in Sending documents as e mail attachments OHWBBAAAA BB Figure 43 Internet options showing E mail page available to Linux users 60 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Controlling OOo s AutoCorrect functions Some people find some or all of the items in OOo s AutoCorrect function annoying because they change what you type when you do not want it changed Many people find some of the AutoCorrect functions quite helpful if you do t
180. choose View gt Navigator on the Menu bar or double click on the Sheet Sequence Number Sheeti 3 in the Status Bar Type the cell reference into the top two fields labeled Column and Row and press Enter In Figure 103 the Navigator would select cell A7 You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main Calc window or leave it floating To dock or float the Navigator hold down the Control key and double click in an empty area near the icons at the top Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 141 eq Navigator Column Row 7 7 E Sheets Sheetl Sheet Sheet3 5 Range names gt Database Ranges P Linked areas gy Graphics Graphics 1 ldb OLE objects Comments sample m Drawing objects d lt Figure 103 The Navigator in Calc The Navigator displays lists of all the objects in a spreadsheet document grouped into categories If an indicator plus sign or arrow appears next to a category at least one object of this kind exists To open a category and see the list of items click on the indicator To hide the list of categories and show only the icons at the top click the Contents icon Click this icon again to show the list Moving from cell to cell In the spreadsheet one cell normally has a darker black border This black border indicates where the focus is see Figure 104 If a group of cells is selected they have a highlight color usually gray with the focus cell having a da
181. common use of page and paragraph styles are taken from Writer There are many other ways to use styles see the guides for the various components for details Defining a different first page for a document Many documents such as letters and reports have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document For example the first page of a letterhead typically has a different header or the first page of a report might have no header or footer while the other pages do With OOo you can define the page style for the first page and specify the style for the following pages to be applied automatically As an example we can use the First Page and Default page styles that come with OOo Figure 57 shows what we want to happen the first page is to be followed by the default page and all the following pages are to be in the Default page style Details are in Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Default Figure 57 Flow of page styles 84 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Dividing a document into chapters In a similar way you can divide a document into chapters Each Chapter might start with the First Page style with the following pages using the Default page style as above At the end of the chapter insert a manual page break and specify the next page to have the First Page style to start the next chapter as shown below Default Figure 58 Dividing a document into chapters using page styl
182. corporates HSQLDB as its default relational database engine It can also use dBASE Microsoft Access MySQL or Oracle or any ODBC compliant or JDBC compliant database Base also provides support for a subset of ANSI 92 SQL Math formula editor Math is OOo s formula or equation editor You can use it to create complex equations that include symbols or characters not available in standard font sets While it is most commonly used to create formulas in other documents such as Writer and Impress files Math can also work as a standalone tool You can save formulas in the standard Mathematical Markup Language MathML format for inclusion in web pages and other documents not created by OOo 12 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x The advantages of OpenOffice org Here are some of the advantages of OpenOffice org over other office Suites No licensing fees OOo is free for anyone to use and distribute at no cost Many features that are available as extra cost add ins in other office suites like PDF export are free with OOo There are no hidden charges now or in the future Open source You can distribute copy and modify the software as much as you wish in accordance with either of OOo s Open Source licenses Cross platform OOo3 runs on several hardware architectures and under multiple operating systems such as Microsoft Windows Mac OS X Linux and Solaris Extensive language support OOo s user interface is availa
183. ct formatting from selected text or objects as in Format gt Default Formatting Pastes unformatted text from the clipboard The text takes on the format that exists at the insertion point Activates the selected OLE object Activates text input mode Ctrl O Opens a document Ctrl S Saves the current document Ctrl N Creates a new document Shift Ctrl N Opens the Templates and Documents dialog Ctrl P Prints the document Ctrl Q Exits the application Ctrl X Cuts the selected items Ctrl C Copies the selected items 422 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Shortcut Keys Ctrl V Pastes from the clipboard Ctrl Shift V Opens the Paste Special dialog Ctrl A Selects all Ctrl Z Undoes last action Ctrl Y Redoes last action Ctrl Shift Y Repeats last command Ctrl F Calls the Find amp Replace dialog Ctrl Shift F Searches for the last entered search term Ctrl Shift J Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode in Writer or Calc Ctrl Shift R Refreshes redraws the document view Ctrl Shift I Enables or disables the selection cursor in read only text Ctrl I Applies the Italic attribute to the selected area or the word in which the cursor is positioned Ctrl B Applies the Bold attribute Ctrl U Applies the Underlined attribute Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 423 OpenOf Ticeorg3 Appendix B Background Information History licensing and file formats Introduction OpenOffice
184. cted in the Tables or queries dropdown list in the Report Wizard Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 305 4 Create the report Use gt gt to move both fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Click Next 5 Label fields Add a space to FuelCost to make it Fuel Cost two words Click Next 6 Group fields Click Date to highlight it Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 7 Choose layout We will be making no changes in the layout Click Next 8 Create report final settings e Use the suggested name which is the same as the query e Select Static report Click Finish Creating a dynamic report Now we will create a report with some statistics on our fuel consumption To do this we have to modify two queries End Reading and Fuel Economy We will be adding the FuelCost field to the End Reading query Then we will add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query When opening a query to edit it it might appear as in Figure Tip 247 If you move your cursor over the black line circled it becomes a double headed arrow Drag it to a lower position E Fuel E End Reading i ak FuellD FuellD Date Odometer CU FuelCost FuelQuantity E e jeld Date FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading Alias Quanity Begin End Distance Table Fuel End Reading Fuel End Reading sort Visible De De De De De unction t
185. d On Linux the OpenOffice org specific files are stored in a directory whose name begins with a period Directories and files with names beginning with a period are not shown ina Tip normal selection dialog To open the directory I navigated to the parent directory entered the name openoffice org2 0 and then clicked Open This opened the directory which was not initially shown Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 393 andrew0 home andy openoffice org 0 user basic MacroFormatterADP Ej c l erp ce at ri Lia dialog xlb XLB File 296 Bytes 10 26 2006 22 53 06 script xlb XLB File 357 Bytes 10 26 2006 22 53 06 File name script xlb kei Open File type BASIC Cancel ep Figure 307 Select a macro library to import Navigate to the directory containing the library to import There are usually two files from which to choose dialog xlb and script xlb It does not matter which of these two files you select both will be imported Select a file and click Open to continue see Figure 308 File name script xlb MacroFormatterADP N Cancel Options C Insert as reference read only Replace existing libraries Figure 308 Choose library import options If the library already exists it will not be replaced unless Replace existing libraries is checked If Insert as reference is checked the library is referenced in its current location but you cannot edit the library If Ins
186. d icon Columnar Labels on top The labels will be placed above their field 2 Arrangement of the subform a A a al Click the third icon As Data 2 0 SS Sheet The labels are column E2 S HH S amp R headings and the field entries Columnar Labels on Top are in spreadsheet format Arrangement of the subform Click Next As Data Sheet Step 6 Set data entry Unless you have a need for any of these entries to be checked accept the default settings Click Next Step 7 Apply styles 1 Select the color you want in the Apply Styles list I chose the beige which is Orange 4 in the Color table 2 Select the Field border you want I prefer the 3 D look You might want to experiment with the different possible settings 3 Click Next Step 8 Set name 1 Enter the name for the form In this case it is Fuel 2 Click Modify the form 3 Click Finish The form opens in Edit mode Modifying a form We will be moving the controls to different places in the form and changing the background to a picture We will also modify the label for the PaymentType field as well as change the field to a list box First we must decide what we want to change The discussion will follow this ten step outline of our planned changes 270 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 10 Provide a dropdown capability for the Date field in the main form and l
187. d scaling of the image Draw is perfectly integrated into the OpenOffice org suite and this makes exchanging graphics with all components of the suite very easy For example if you create an image in Draw reusing it in a Writer document is as simple as copying and pasting You can also work with drawings directly from within Writer and Impress using a subset of the functions and tools from Draw Draw s functionalities are very extensive and complete Although it was not designed to rival high end graphics applications Draw possesses more functions than the majority of drawing tools that are integrated into office productivity suites A few examples of drawing functions might whet your appetite layer management magnetic grid point system dimensions and measurement display connectors for making organization charts 3D functions enabling small three dimensional drawings to be created with texture and lighting effects drawing and page style integration and B zier curves to name a few This chapter introduces some of Draw s features but it does not attempt to cover all of them See the Draw Guide and the application Help for more information The Draw workspace The main components of the Draw workspace are shown in Figure 155 You can surround the drawing area with toolbars and information areas The number and position of the visible tools vary with the task at hand or user preferences Therefore your setup may appear a l
188. d width Separated by Tab Comma Other _ Semicolon _ Space _ Merge delimiters Text delimiter Fields Column type Standard Uurname firstname address city state poode Coury eher Jean FO Box 640 Airlie Beach QLD 4502 Aust Figure 101 Text Import dialog with Comma selected as the separator and double quotation mark as the text delimiter Saving spreadsheets Spreadsheets can be saved in three ways From the menu bar Choose File gt Save or Save All or Save As Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 139 From the toolbar Click the Save button on the Function bar If the file has been saved and no subsequent changes have been made this button is grayed out and not clickable From the keyboard Press the key combination Control S If the spreadsheet has not been saved previously then each of these actions will open the Save As dialog Here you can specify the spreadsheet name and the location in which to save it If the spreadsheet has been previously saved then saving will overwrite the existing copy without opening the Save As Note dialog If you want to save the spreadsheet in a different location or with a different name then select File gt Save As Saving as a CSV file To save a spreadsheet as a comma separate value CSV file 1 Choose File gt Save As 2 In the File name box type a name for the file 3 In the File type list select Text CSV and click Save Yo
189. d with Base 255 Step 1 Select fields We will use the CD Collection Sample table in the Personal category to select the fields we need 1 Category Select Personal The Sample Tables dropdown list changes to a list of personal sample tables Sample tables Select CD Collection The Available fields box changes to a list of available fields for this table Selected fields Using the gt button move the following fields from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window in this order CollectionID AlbumTitle Artist DatePurchased Format Notes and NumberofTIracks Selected Fields from another sample table Click Business as the Category Select Employees from the dropdown list of sample tables Use the gt button to move the Photo field from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window It will be at the bottom of the list directly below the NumberofIracks field 5 If you make a mistake in selecting fields click on the field name in the Selected fields list and use the lt button to move it from the Selected fields list back to the Available fields list 6 If you make a mistake in the order of the selected fields click on the field name that is in the wrong order and use the Up or Down arrow on the right side of the Selected fields list to move the field name to the correct position 7 Click Next 2 Ne 3 N 4 Ne Category Business Personal Sample tables Employee
190. described in Adding a command to a menu on page 407 Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 405 New Menu Menu name New Menu 1 Menu position File Edit View Insert Format Table OK Cancel Tools Window Help New Menu 1 Figure 315 Adding a new menu Modifying existing menus To modify an existing menu select it in the Menu list and click the Menu button to drop down a list of modifications Move Rename Delete Not all of these modifications can be applied to all the entries in the Menu list For example Rename and Delete are not available for the supplied menus To move a menu such as File choose Menu gt Move A dialog similar to the one shown in Figure 315 but without the Menu name box opens Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the menu into the required position To move submenus such as File Send select the main menu File in the Menu list and then in the Menu Content section of the dialog select the submenu Send in the Entries list and use the arrow keys to move it up or down in the sequence Submenus are easily identified in the Entries list by a small black triangle on the right hand side of the name In addition to renaming you can specify a keyboard shortcut that allows you to select a menu command when you press A t an underlined letter in a menu command 1 Select a menu or menu entry 2 Click the Menu button and select Rename 406 Getting St
191. displays the last 10 files that were opened in any of the OOo components Tip Opening CSV files Comma separated values CSV files are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet Each line in a CSV file represents a row ina spreadsheet Commas semicolons or other characters are used to separate the cells Text is put in quotation marks numbers are written without quotation marks To open a CSV file in Calc 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Locate the CSV file that you want to open 3 If the file has a csv extension select the file and click Open 4 If the file has another extension for example txt select the file select Text CSV in the File type box scroll down into the spreadsheet section to find it and then click Open 5 On the Text Import dialog Figure 101 select the Separator options to divide the text in the file into columns 138 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 6 You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the dialog Right click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column 7 Ifthe CSV file uses a text delimiter character that is not in the Text delimiter list click in the box and type the character 8 Click OK to open the file Caution yf you do not select Text CSV as the file type when opening the file the document opens in Writer not Calc Text Import sample csv Import Character set From row Ta aa a C Fixe
192. e 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name 15 Press Home to move to the start of the line 16 Press down arrow to move to the next line 17 Stop recording the macro and save the macro It takes much longer to read and write the steps than to record the macro Work slowly and think about the steps as you do them With practice this becomes second nature The generated macro has been modified to contain the step number in the comments to match the code to the step above Listing 2 Copy the numeric value to the start of the column sub CopyNumToColl rem ee eee eee rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem 2 2 ee rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem 2 Press Ctrl Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 3 Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array Cll 2 Seessseneerete en span ree eee ee een ee emer am ee ees dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 4 Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name dim args4
193. e the settings in the document For example your choice in the options for OOo Writer of how to update links is affected by the Load user specific settings option Load printer settings with the document If this option is not selected the printer settings that are stored with the document are ignored when you print it using the Print File Directly icon The default printer in your system will be used instead Edit document properties before saving If you select this option the Document Properties dialog pops up to prompt you to enter relevant information the first time you save a new document or whenever you use Save As Save AutoRecovery information every Choose whether to enable AutoRecovery and how often to save the information used by the AutoRecovery process AutoRecovery in OpenOffice org overwrites the original file If you also choose Always create backup copy the original file then overwrites the backup copy If you have this set recovering your document after a system crash will be easier but recovering an earlier version of the document may be harder Save URLs relative to file system internet Relative addressing to a file system is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located It is recommended to save relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server
194. e Insert gt Copy To insert an object as a link 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click then while pressing the Shift and Control keys drag and drop the object into the document Inserting an object as a background To insert an object as the background to a page or paragraph 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click right click on the object and choose Insert gt Background gt Page or gt Paragraph Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 347 SB Sa P aS Yelk paa Clo e 0S Rodi ER Default w Be Pon SB Bag see 1 ee Hew Theme a Fe Architecture overl 1 i Backgrounds daisy E Program Files OpenOffice org 2 2 share gallery www ba E es m f an ps a Architecture wine I Backgrounds SlueMan gh FS Bugs O Buildings PF f Apere a eee EE ETE Rete eer ees eee ETILEN OEE E ee eee eee eee eee eee Ab iv i gt Figure 286 Copying a graphic object from the Gallery into a document Managing the Gallery The default themes are locked no items can be added to or deleted from these themes The locked themes are easily recognizable by right clicking on them the only available option in the pop up menu is Properties In a default installation only the My themes theme is customizable although new th
195. e Navigator opens Click in the Page Number field and type the sequence number of the required page After a brief delay the display jumps to the selected page Page style Shows the style of the current page To change the page style right click on this field A list of page styles pops up choose a different style by clicking on it To edit the current page style double click on this field The Page Style dialog opens Language Shows the language for the selected text Click to open a menu where you can choose another language for the selected text or for the paragraph where the cursor is located You can also choose None Do not check spelling to exclude the text from a spelling check or choose More to open the Character dialog Insert mode Click to toggle between Insert and Overwrite modes when typing Selection mode Click to toggle between STD Standard EXT Extend ADD Add and BLK Block selection EXT is an alternative to Shift click when Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 89 selecting text See Working with text on page 94 for more information about ADD and BLK Unsaved changes An asterisk appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Outline Numbering Level 2 6 OO 25 O e 120 Digital Object View Zoom Zoom signature Information layout slider percent Figure 61 Right end of status bar Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon s
196. e Project Our other major corporate contributors include Novell RedHat RedFlag CH2000 IBM and Google Additonally over 450 000 people from nearly every curve of the globe have joined this Project with the idea of creating the best possible office suite that all can use This is the essence of an open source community With its free software licence and active Native Language Confederation OpenOffice org is a key player in the drive to eradicate digital exclusion and preserve minority languages threatened by being Appendix B Background Information 425 on the wrong side of the digital divide For tens of thousands of community members this makes the OpenOffice org community their volunteering opportunity of choice The OpenOffice org community invites contributors Whatever you do best you can do it for OpenOffice org As well as software developers the Community welcomes translators artists technical writers and editors testers people offering user support sales and marketing people lobbyists donors the list is long The Community operates internationally in all time zones linked by the internet How is OpenOffice org licensed OpenOffice org is distributed under the Open Source Initiative OSI approved Lesser General Public License LGPL The LGPL can be viewed on the OOo website at http www openoffice org licenses Igpl license html For more general information on OOo s licensing please refer to ht
197. e area fill line thickness and border to a set of objects This repetitive process can be greatly simplified by the use of styles Styles allow you to define a formatting template a style and then to apply that style to multiple objects For more information about styles see Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 242 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Special effects With Draw you can apply many special effects to objects and groups of objects This section describes a few of these effects Others include distorting shadows and transparency See the Draw Guide for examples of the many effects available Flip an object Select an object and click on the Flip icon 4 You will see a dashed line through the middle of the object This dashed line is the axis of symmetry The object will be reflected about this line Move one or both ends of the line with your mouse to set the axis Then grab any one of the eight green handles and move it across to the other side of the dashed line The new position of the figure is shown dashed until the mouse is released If you hold down the Shift key while moving the line the line will Note rotate in 45 degree increments Mirror copies Officially this useful command does not yet exist in Draw It can however be easily emulated Move the axis of symmetry to the desired location of the mirror axis Copy the object to the clipboard Flip the object then click on an emp
198. e box on the Formatting toolbar and choose a font from the list To choose whether to show the font names in their font or in plain text go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Tip and select or deselect the Show preview of fonts option in the Font Lists section For more information see Chapter 14 Setting Up and Customizing Calc of the Calc Guide To choose the size of the font click the arrow next to the Font Size box on the Formatting toolbar For other formatting you can use the Bold Italic or Underline icons To choose a font color click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to display a color palette Click on the required color To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Colors See Chapter 2 Automatic Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 165 To specify the language of the cell useful because it allows different languages to exist in the same document and be spell checked correctly use the Font tab of the Format Cells dialog Use the Font Effects tab to set other font characteristics See Chapter 4 of the Calc Guide for more information Formatting the cell borders To quickly choose a line style and color for the borders of a cell click the small arrows next to the Line Style and Line Color icons on the Formatting toolbar In each case a palette of choices is displayed For more control including the spacing between the cell borders and the text use the
199. e car s license plate and driver s license every four years did not fit into any of these It will be a table of its own license fees What fields fit the fuel purchases area Date purchased odometer reading fuel cost fuel quantity and payment method fit Fuel economy can be calculated with a query 252 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x What fields fit the maintenance area Date of service odometer reading type of service cost of service and next scheduled service of this type for example for oil changes list when the next oil change Should be But it would be nice if there was a way to write notes So a field for notes was added to the list What fields fit the vacations area Date odometer reading fuel including all the fields of the fuel table food including meals and snacks motel total tolls and miscellaneous Since these purchases are made by one of two bank cards or with cash I want a field to state which payment type was used for each item What fields fit into the food category Breakfast lunch supper and snacks seem to fit Do I list all the snacks individually or list the total cost for snacks for the day I chose to divide snacks into two fields number of snacks and total cost of snacks I also need a payment type for each of these breakfast lunch supper and total cost of snacks What are the fields that are common to more than one area Date appears in all of the areas as does odomete
200. e click on the formula to edit it For example here is the Riemann Zeta function C z gt 3 n 1 N You can reference an equation as shown in Equation 2 with these steps 1 Choose Insert gt Cross reference from the menu bar 2 On the Cross references tab Figure 270 under Type select Text 3 Under Selection select the equation number 4 Under Format select Reference 5 Click Insert Done If you later add more equations to the paper before the referenced equation all the equations will automatically renumber and the cross references will update To insert the equation number without parenthesis around it Tip choose Numbering instead of Reference under Format Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 325 Fields Document Cross references Functions DocInformation variables Database Selection Set Reference Insert Reference Headings Numbered Paragraphs Text Figure Bookmarks Insert reference to 45 Page Style Category and Number Caption Text Numbering Figure 270 Inserting a cross reference to an equation number 326 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 1 O Printing Exporting and E mailing Introduction This chapter provides general information about printing exporting and e mailing documents from OOo Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon to send the entire document to the default printer defined for you
201. e common shortcut keys can cause confusion frustration and possible data loss or corruption especially if other users share your computer To adapt shortcut keys to your needs use the Customize dialog as described below 1 Select Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Customize dialog opens 2 To have the shortcut key assignment available in all components of OpenOffice org select the OpenOffice org button 3 Next select the required function from the Category and Function lists 4 Now select the desired shortcut keys in the Shortcut keys list and click the Modify button at the upper right 5 Click OK to accept the change Now the chosen shortcut keys will execute the function chosen in step 3 above whenever they are pressed 412 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x All existing shortcut keys for the currently selected Function are listed in the Keys selection box If the Keys list is empty it indicates that the chosen key combination is free for use If it were not and you wanted to reassign a shortcut key Note combination that is already in use you must first delete the existing key Shortcut keys that are greyed out in the listing on the Customize dialog such as F1 and F10 are not available for reassignment Example Assigning styles to shortcut keys You can configure shortcut keys to quickly assign styles in your document Some shortcuts are predefined such as Ctri 0O for the Text body paragraph style C
202. e in the current category Ti You can hide or show the Formula Elements window with View Ip gt Formula Elements Example 1 5x4 For this example we will enter a simple formula 5x4 On the Formula Elements window Figure 256 1 Select the top left button of the categories top section 2 Click on the multiplication symbol Unary binary operators Multiplication Figure 256 Selecting the multiplication symbol When you select the multiplication symbol on the Formula Elements window two things happen e The equation editor shows the markup lt gt times lt gt e The body of the document shows a gray box like this Hx OS Gt lt gt times lt gt 4 gt Figure 257 Result of selecting the multiplication symbol Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 315 The lt gt symbols shown in Figure 257 are placeholders that you can replace by other text for example 5 and 4 The equation will update automatically and the result should resemble Figure 258 Deval 15x41 B 6 B 5 times 4 a iai Figure 258 Result of entering 5 and 4 next to the times operator To keep the equation from updating automatically choose View Tip gt AutoUpdate display from the menu bar To update a formula manually press F9 or choose View gt Update Right click menu Another way to access mathematical symbols is to right click on the equation editor This pops up the menu s
203. e more memory but the trade off is less memory available for other applications and you could run out of memory altogether If your documents contain a lot of objects such as images or the objects are large OOo s performance may improve if you increase the memory for OOo or the memory per object If you find that objects seem to disappear from a document that contains a lot of them increase the number of objects in the cache The objects are still in the file even if you cannot see them on screen To load the Quickstarter an icon on the desktop or in the system tray when you start your computer select the option near the bottom of the dialog This makes OpenOffice org start faster the trade off is OOo uses some memory even when not being used This option sometimes called Enable systray quickstarter is not available on all operating systems Undo Number of steps 100 m Graphics cache Use for OpenOffice org MB Memory per object 2 4 MB Remove from memory after 00 10 hhmm Cache for inserted objects Number of objects 20 OpenOffice org Quickstarter Load OpenOffice org during system start up Figure 20 Choosing Memory options for the OpenOffice org applications View options The options on the OpenOffice org View page affect the way the document window looks and behaves Some of these options are described below Set them to suit your personal preferences Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 39 User In
204. e you 56 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x create the OpenOffice org Basic macro otherwise the script will not be inserted OpenOffice org Basic macros must be located in the header of the HTML document Once you have created the macro in the OpenOffice org Basic IDE it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened choose Tools gt Customize gt Events See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information Export Display warning When the OpenOffice org Basic option see above is not selected the Display warning option becomes available If the Display warning option is selected then when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that OpenOffice org Basic macros will be lost Export Print layout Select this option to export the print layout of the current document as well The HTML filter supports CSS2 Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 for printing documents These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated Export Copy local graphics to Internet Select this option to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FIP Export Character set Select the appropriate character set for the export Choosing language settings You may need to do several things to set the language settings to what you want e Install the required dictionaries e Change s
205. eXtensible Markup Language file format developed as an industry standard by OASIS Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards These files can easily be unzipped and read by any text editor and their framework is open and published e You have a voice Enhancements software fixes and release dates are community driven You can join the community and affect the course of the product you use You can read more about OpenOffice org its mission history licensing and other organizational information on the OpenOffice org website Minimum requirements OpenOffice org 3 requires one of the following operating systems e Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or higher XP or newer e GNU Linux Kernel version 2 4 and glibc 2 3 2 or newer e Mac OS X 10 4 x X11 required Mac OS X 10 5 without X11 e Solaris 10 OS or higher Some OpenOffice org features wizards and the HSQLDB database engine require that the Java Runtime Environment JRE be installed on your computer Although OOo will work without Java support some features will not be available You can download OOo for some operating systems with or without JRE included If you have a slow machine and do not often need the features requiring JRE you can try to disable it to speed up the loading of the program For a more detailed and up to date listing of requirements see the OpenOffice org website How to get the software Many new computers come
206. eated Dynamic reports can be updated to show the latest data For example a report on expenses for a vacation in the past should probably be a static report because it is based upon specific data that does not change However a report on the fuel data should probably be a dynamic report because this report depends upon data that does change Dynamic reports update only the data that is changed or added to a table or query They do not show any modifications made to Caution the table or query itself For example after creating the report below open the fuel economy query created in the previous A section For the End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer column change the number 1 to the number 3 The report will be identical before and after you make the change All reports are based upon a single table or query So you need first to decide what fields you want to use in the report If you want to use fields from different tables you must first combine these fields in a single query Then you can create a report on this query For example a report on vacation expenses includes both fuel costs and meal costs These values are contained in fields of two different tables Vacations and Fuel So this report requires creating a query Creating a static report We will create a report on vacation expenses Certain questions need to be asked before creating the report e What information do we want in the report 302 Gettin
207. eb by typing a URL in the File name field on the Open dialog Using the Navigator The Navigator lists objects contained in a document collected into categories For example in Writer it shows Headings Tables J SHEE Text frames Comments Graphics Bookmarks and other items as Shown in Figure 12 In Calc it Shows Sheets Range Names Database Ranges Graphics Drawing Objects and other items Bookmarks In Impress and Draw it shows Sections Slides Pictures and other items Hyperlinks References Indexes E Comments GY Draw objects lt q Navigator Headings Tables Text frames Graphics OLE objects y Er al To open the Navigator click its icon D on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View gt Navigator on the menu bar You can dock the Navigator to i j either side of the main OOo window Figure 12 The Navigator or leave it floating see Docking floating windows and toolbars on page 23 Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 31 Click the marker or arrow by any of the categories to display the list of objects in that category To hide the list of categories and show only the toolbars at the top click the List Box On Off icon Click this icon again to show the list box The Navigator provides several convenient ways to move around a document and find items in it e When a category is showing the list of objects in it double click on an object to jump di
208. ection for a subtitle or Title Only however all but one layout the blank one contains a title section so you are not restricted to the two layouts described here If you do not know the names for the prepackaged layouts you can use the tooltip feature Position the cursor on an icon in the Layout section or on any toolbar icon and its name will be displayed in a small rectangle If the tooltips are not enabled you can enable them From the main menu select Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General gt Help and mark the Tips checkbox If the Extended tips checkbox is also marked you will get more detailed tooltip information but the tooltip names themselves will not be provided Tip Select a layout in the Layout section of the Tasks pane by clicking on it it appears in the Workspace To create the title click on Click to add title assuming the Blank Slide layout was not used and then type the title text Adjustments to the formatting of the title can be done by pressing the F11 key right clicking the Title presentation style entry and selecting Modify from the pop up menu If you are using the Title Slide layout click on Click to add text to add a subtitle Proceed as above to make adjustments to the formatting if required Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 197 Inserting additional slides The steps for inserting additional slides are basically the same as for selecting the title page It is a
209. ed with OpenOffice org 3 x OpenOf ficeorg3 Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts Introduction You can use OpenOffice org OOo without requiring a pointing device such as a mouse or trackball by using its built in keyboard shortcuts Tasks as varied and complex as docking and un docking toolbars and windows or changing the size or position of objects can all be accomplished with only a keyboard OOo has a general set of keyboard shortcuts available in all components and a component specific set directly related to the work of that component Writer Calc Impress Draw and Base This appendix lists some of the most common general shortcuts For component specific shortcuts see the relevant component guide or the OOo Help For help with OOo s keyboard shortcuts or using OOo with a keyboard only search the OOo Help using the shortcut or accessibility keywords In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in this Appendix you can define your own See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for instructions Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not Note available to OOo Try to assign different keys either for OOo described in Chapter 14 or for your desktop system see your system s documentation Choosing menu items using the keyboard Some of the characters shown on the menu bar are underlined You can open the
210. eessreresssserererereererereereeeeeserssesssseseeee 73 Using a template to create a CGOCUMENL cc ccc eccenceeeeeeceenceeeeess T3 Creating a template eoossseseseeeesssereessserressserereerereeeeeeressseseseessseeee 74 PaT aea ea T 77 Adding templates using the Extension Manager sssecscersssrcsseree 78 Setting a default template ccc ceesc ccc enccesteeceenceeseeessencsensesnees 79 Associating a document with a different template cc cece ee 80 Organizing TEMPLAtE S cececcececceccecencecceceecessessecceceseessesseceenseeesess 82 Examples of Mla gt a Ce ee sa ee eer 84 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer seccceccceccecccecoecocecceccecocecceeseeoee 87 a E AT a A E E N E E EE E E 88 The Writer interface ccccsceccsceccececcecestecesseceeteseeeessecesescessesescesaes 88 Changing document VIEWS ccccsceccecceccecencecceccestencsenceeseeestenseeees 91 Moving quickly through a COCUMENL ccc cece eee eceeecenseneeceecenees 92 Working With COCUMEMNUG ccccececcescceceenceenceessenceencessseessenseeeess 93 Working with teXxt cccc ccc cceccnceseecceceecensenseceeceesensessessecessensectecsenes 94 FOCE is 4 i nent r soe ere rent e nen ett te aero nnn nents tem rene creme etary eer 104 EOC EO Te aac clever tewiewsneravceevey seewersacwurvesseesnenuvestensabeungtenaans 109 Adding Comments to a COCUMENL cccecceccsceccecceceecense
211. eleting images 349 deleting objects 349 hide show 346 inserting object as background 347 location 350 open close 346 themes 346 views icon detailed 346 general options 37 glue points 232 GNU Linux system requirements 14 gradients 244 grammar checker 101 graphic files opening 429 saving 431 graphic styles 202 graphics adding from file 342 linking 343 vector 217 graphics styles formatting text 208 grid options 225 grid points 224 guiding lines 226 436 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x H handouts Impress 192 header different on right and left pages 85 Help Agent 38 Help system 15 Help Tips 37 hidden objects 236 high contrast 38 history of OpenOffice org 425 HTML compatibility 55 HTML export 56 HTML Export Wizard 374 hyperlinks editing 367 inserting 364 hyphenation manual 108 I icon size and style user interface 40 icons in menus 40 IDE 381 ignore font settings when importing HTML 56 image map 351 images adding from file 342 linking 343 scanned 345 importing files 427 importing numbers from an HTML page inclination 239 Insert Bookmark dialog 130 Insert Picture dialog 343 installing and setting up 15 Internet options 60 J Java options 50 Java Runtime Environment JRE 251 JRE Java Runtime Environment 14 51 K KDocker 19 keyboard shortcuts assigning 412 420 customizing 412 function keys 421 loading from afile 414 OpenOffice org general 422 resetting to default
212. eme Scheme OpenOffice org Custom colours On User interface elements Colour setting Preview Document background C Automatic A Text boundaries O e Application background Object boundaries C Automatic a Table boundaries Font colour an Unvisited links Visited links AritnfnollinaMmhao l Figure 30 Showing or hiding text object and table boundaries To show or hide items such as text boundaries select or deselect the options next to the names of the items e To change the default colors for items click the down arrow in the Color Setting column by the name of the item and select a color from the pop up box e To save your color changes as a color scheme click Save type a name in the Scheme box then click OK Accessibility options Accessibility options include whether to allow animated graphics or text how long help tips remain showing some options for high contrast display and a way to change the font for the user interface of the OpenOffice org program see Figure 31 Accessibility support relies on Sun Microsystems Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools See Java options below The Support assistive technology tools option is not shown on all OOo installations See Assistive Tools in OpenOffice org in the Help for other requirements and information Select or deselect the options as required Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 49 Misce
213. emes can be added as explained in Adding a new theme to the Gallery on page 350 Adding objects to the Gallery You may wish to add to the Gallery any images that you use frequently for example a company logo You can then very easily insert these graphics into a document later You can add images only to My Theme or to any other theme that you have created these are indicated by a green icon in the list of themes You cannot add images to the built in themes indicated by an icon of another color 348 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Method 1 selecting a file 1 In the theme s Properties on the Files page click the Find Files button The Select path dialog opens 2 You can enter the path for the file s directory in the Path text box or you can navigate to locate the file s directory Use the File type drop down list to help limit the search 3 Click the Select button to start the search 4 A list of graphic files is then displayed in the window You can use the File type filter again to further limit the search 5 Select the files to add To select more than one file hold the Control key down while you click on each file 6 Finally click Add Method 2 drag and drop 1 Open the document containing an image you want to add to the Gallery and display the Gallery theme to which you want to add it 2 Position the mouse pointer above the image without clicking 3 If the mouse poi
214. en the different Slides in the presentation from the Speed drop down menu Medium is a good choice for now 8 Click Create A new presentation is created You might want to accept the default values for both Effect and Speed unless you are skilled at doing this Both of these values Tip can be changed later while working with Slide transitions and animations These two are explained in more detail in Chapter 9 of the Impress Guide If you selected From template on step 1 of the Wizard the Next Note button will be active on step 3 and other pages will be available These pages are not described here 196 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Formatting a presentation Now put your presentation together based on your outline Remember to save frequently while working on the presentation to prevent any loss of information should Caution something unexpected occur You might also want to activate A the AutoRecovery function Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General Make sure Save AutoRecovery information every is selected and that you have entered a recovery frequency Creating the first slide The first slide is normally a title slide Decide which of the layouts will best suit your purposes for this first slide simplicity would be appropriate in this instance You can use the prepackaged layouts available in the Layout section of the Tasks pane Suitable layouts are Title Slide which also contains a s
215. en the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog For more about extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 311 OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math OpenOffice org s Equation Editor What is Math Math is OpenOffice org OO0o s component for writing mathematical equations It is most commonly used as an equation editor for text documents but it can also be used with other types of documents or stand alone When used inside Writer the equation is treated as an object inside the text document The equation editor is for writing equations in symbolic form as Note in equation 1 If you want to evaluate a numeric value see the Calc Guide In x tan x 1 Getting started To insert an equation choose Insert gt Object gt Formula The equation editor opens at the bottom of the screen and the floating Formula Elements window called Selection before Math 3 2 may appear A small box with a gray border also appears in your document where the formula will be displayed as shown in Figure 254 G Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Format Tools Window Help 2 822 aa r3 Formula Eleme x ea osb aeA L x da ad a 8 bY 1 8 Fa 7a a b a b axb a b aab a b a b avb Figure 254 Equation Editor Formula Elements window and location of resulting equation
216. engthen the field to show the day of the week month day and year Shorten the length of the payment fields all fields containing the word Payment Move the controls into groups food fuel subform and miscellaneous Change the wording of some of the labels Some single words should be two words Some abbreviations should be used if possible Misc for miscellaneous Change the lengths of several fields and labels Only Lunch Supper Motel and Tolls have acceptable lengths But for a better appearance changes will be made to these as well Replace all the fields whose label ends in Payment with a list box containing the entries from the Payment Type table Lengthen the Note field vertically add a scroll bar and move it Make changes in the Date and PaymentType columns of the subform that are similar to the changes in the main form Add headings for each group in the main form Change the background to a picture then modify some of the labels so that they can be read clearly Change the font color of the headings Here are some methods that we will be using in these steps The controls in the main form consists of a label and its field Sometimes we want to work with the entire control other times we want to work with only the label or the field and there are times when we want to work with a group of controls Clicking a label or field selects the entire control A border appears around the control with eight green handle
217. ent 2 Select the text so it is highlighted 3 Choose Edit gt AutoText or press Control F3 4 Enter a name for your shortcut Writer will suggest a one letter Shortcut which you can change 5 Click the AutoText button on the right and select New text only from the menu 6 Click Close to return to your document If the only option under the AutoText button is Import either Tip you have not entered a name for your AutoText or there is no text selected in the document AutoText is especially powerful when assigned to fields See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for more information Formatting text Using styles is recommended Styles are central to using Writer Styles enable you to easily format your document consistently and to change the format with minimal effort A style is a named set of formatting options Writer defines several types of styles for different types of elements characters paragraphs pages frames and lists See Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates in this book and Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide Formatting paragraphs You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 74 shows the Formatting toolbar as a floating toolbar customized to show only the buttons for paragraph formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating 104 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x system and the selection of icon size
218. ent as an image To start this procedure place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted and select Insert gt Picture gt Scan gt Select Source Although this practice is quick and easy it is unlikely to result in a high quality image of the correct size You may get better results by scanned material into a graphics program and cleaning it up there before inserting the resulting image into OOo Chapter 11 Graphics gt the Gallery and Fontwork 345 Modifying and positioning graphics OpenOffice org provides many tools for resizing modifying filtering and positioning graphics wrapping text around graphics and using graphics as backgrounds and watermarks These tools are described in relevant chapters of the other guides Some sophisticated adjustments of the graphics are best done in an image manipulation program and the results brought into OOo rather than using OOo s inbuilt tools Using the OpenOffice org Gallery The Gallery contains objects graphics and sounds that you can insert into your documents The Gallery is available in all components of OpenOffice org To open the Gallery choose Tools gt Gallery or click the Gallery icon If the Gallery is open these choices close it Graphics in the Gallery are grouped by themes such as Bullets Rulers and Backgrounds You can create other groups or themes The box on the left of the gallery window lists the available themes Click on a theme to see its c
219. ent icons to edit Fontwork objects we Fontwork Shape Edits the shape of the selected object You can choose from a palette of shapes Figure 293 Fontwork toolbar showing palette of shapes Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 357 Fontwork Same Letter Heights Changes the height of a characters in the object Toggles between normal height some characters taller than others for example capital letters d h and others and all letters the same height O ortadi ONOI Figure 294 Left normal letters right same letter heights Fontwork Alignment Changes the alignment Fontwork Alig of characters Choices are left align center time right align word justify and stretch justify The 2 effects of the text alignment can only be seen if Genter the text spans over two or more lines In the Right Align stretch justify mode all the lines are filled is Word Justify completely Stretch Justify v Fontwork Character Spacing Changes the Fontwork Charact _ character spacing and kerning in the object Very Tight For custom spacing input a percentage value Tight 100 is normal spacing less than 100 is Normal tight spacing more than 100 is expanded Loose Spacing Very Loose Custom Kern Character Pairs Using the Formatting toolbar Now let us go further and customize the Fontwork object with several more attributes Click on the Fontwork object The Formatting toolb
220. epackaged slide masters found in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane You can also create and save additional slide masters Modifying the slide show Now review the entire presentation and answer some questions Run the slide show at least once before answering them You might want to add some questions of your own 1 Are the slides in the correct order If not some of them will need to be moved 200 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 2 Would an additional slide make a particular point clearer If so another slide needs to be created 3 Would some custom animations help some of the slides Advanced technique 4 Should some of the slides have a different slide transition than others The transition of those slides should be changed 5 Do some of the slides seem unnecessary Delete the affected slide or Slides after checking if they are indeed unnecessary If one or more slides seems to be unnecessary hide the slide or Slides and view the slide show a few more times to make sure To hide a slide right click the slide in the Slides pane and select Hide Slide in the pop up menu Do not delete a Slide until you have done this otherwise you may have to create that slide again Tip Once you have answered these and your own questions you should make the necessary changes This is done most easily in the Slide Sorter view If you need one or more new slides create them using the steps listed in Inserti
221. er size or orientation available for your printer Having these warnings turned on can be quite helpful particularly if you work with documents produced by people in other countries where the standard paper size is different from yours Reduce print data Settings for Printer Print to file Printer _ Reduce transparency Reduce gradients _ Reduce bitmaps _ Convert colours to greyscale Printer warnings Paper size Transparency Paper orientation Figure 23 Choosing general printing options to apply to all OOo components 42 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x If your printouts are incorrectly placed on the page or chopped Tip off at the top bottom or sides or the printer is refusing to print the most likely cause is page size incompatibility Path options On the OpenOffice org Paths page you can change the location of files associated with or used by OpenOffice org to suit your working Situation In a Windows system for example you might want to store documents by default somewhere other than My Documents To make changes select an item in the list shown in Figure 24 and click Edit On the Select Paths dialog not shown add or delete folders as required and then click OK to return to the Options dialog Note that some items can have at least two paths listed one to a Shared folder which might be on a network and one to a user specific folder normally on the user s personal computer You c
222. ert as reference is not checked however the library is copied to the user s macro directory Macros can be stored in libraries inside OpenOffice org documents Select a document rather than a directory on disk as shown in Figure 307 to import libraries contained in a document 394 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Downloading macros to import Macros are available for download Some macros are contained in documents some as regular files that you must select and import and some as macro text that should be copied and pasted into the Basic IDE use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Macros dialog choose the macro to edit and then click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Some macros are available as free downloads on the Internet see Table 3 Table 3 Places to find macro examples Location Description http www ooomacros org Excellent collection of packaged macros http www pitonyak org oo php Reference materials regarding macros http www pitonyak org database Reference materials regarding database macros http development openoffice org Lots of links to everything http www oooforum org Many examples and help How to run a macro A typical method to run a macro is as follows 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 309 2 Select the library and module in the Library lis
223. es Changing page orientation within a document A Writer document can contain pages in more than one orientation A common scenario is to have a landscape page in the middle ofa document whereas the other pages are in a portrait orientation This can also be done with page breaks and page styles Different headers on right and left pages Page styles can be set up to have the facing left and right pages mirrored or only right first pages of chapters are often defined to be right page only or only left When you insert a header on a page style set up for mirrored pages or right and left pages you can have the contents of the header be the same on all pages or be different on the right and left pages For example you can put the page number on the left hand edge of the left pages and on the right hand edge of the right pages put the document title on the right hand page only or make other changes Controlling page breaks automatically Writer automatically flows text from one page to the next If you do not like the default settings you can change them For example you can require a paragraph to start on a new page or column and specify the style of the new page A typical use is for chapter titles to always start on a new right hand odd numbered page Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 85 Compiling an automatic table of contents To compile an automatic table of contents first apply styles to the headings you want to appe
224. es 73 4 Select the template that you want to use You can preview the selected template or view the template s properties e To preview the template click the Preview icon A preview of the template appears in the box on the right e To view the template s properties click the Document Properties icon The template s properties appear in the box on the right 5 Click Open The Templates and Documents dialog closes and a new document based on the selected template opens in OOo You can then edit and save the new document just as you would any other document Templates and Documents Business Correspondence a i t Business Letter 2 New Document E Business Letter 3 E Business Letter 4 A Business Letter 5 E Business Letter 6 A Facsimile Message 1 E Facsimile Message 2 A Facsimile Message 3 E Facsimile Message 4 E Facsimile Message 5 E Facsimile Message 6 Samples Get more templates online BG Title Business Letter 1 Ey Volker Ghrendt Sun Microsystems Date 13 06 2006 13 00 00 Modified by Volker Ahrendt Modified on 13 06 2008 16 00 00 Printed by Volker Shrendet Description Template created by Sun Microsystems ize Figure 52 Templates and Documents window Creating a template You can create your own templates in two ways from a document and using a wizard 74 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating a template from a document To c
225. es and the operation is not reversible Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 245 Grouping by common selection When several objects are selected any operations you carry out are applied to all of the objects For example you can rotate a group of objects in its entirety Groups obtained through common selection of several objects are undone as soon as you click outside the group However you can group objects and keep those selected objects grouped together Maintaining groups and undoing groups To group selected objects right click and choose Group from the pop up menu You can also use the keyboard shortcut Control Shift G or choose Modify gt Group from the menu bar When objects are grouped any editing operations carried out on that group are applied to all members of the group If you click on one member of the group the whole group is selected The objects of a group retain their own individual properties To undo a group right click and choose Ungroup from the pop up menu use the keyboard shortcut Control Alt Shift G or choose Modify gt Ungroup from the menu bar You can edit a member of a group individually without breaking the group To do this right click and choose Enter group or double click on the group Combining objects In contrast to grouping functions combinations create a new object Subsequent un combining in the same manner as ungrouping is not possible Select a collection of objects the
226. eseenseeeens 114 Creating a table of CONTENHS cece cc eceececceccecensenseceeceesensesssess 115 Creating indexes and bibliographies eescssssessressrressreeessrrersseeeess 116 Working with graphics essecseseseseseesesrecesssseresesereereerererereeeeereeees 116 Printing from Writer ssssseessereeseserererrersrsssessessssesseeseseeereeeeeereeee 117 Sending a fax USING Writer sssecsrseseseeressserecsssereessreecesserreesereeee 125 Tracking changes to a document esssessreessesssessesrererererrereereeeees 126 Do gid 6 A E EEES 127 4 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Linking to another part Of a COCUMENL ccccecceec cece eeceeneeeseees 127 Using mail Merge eesscssssessseresseserersssereresreresssreresseseeessseereesssseseeeee 130 Using master documents sssssssesessesserrerrerererereeeeeeresssesssseseseee 130 Creating mall news gs ee ren 131 Chapter 5 Getting Started With Call cccccccccccsccccccccccccssccccccccccccces 132 NATTA Vi OC AEE E A ren EI E OAE 133 Spreadsheets sheets and CeIS ccc cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeees 133 Parts of the main Calc windoW sessssesssecesssrersserssseressrecsssereeeee 134 Starting new SPrEadSheE ets ccecceccecccenccecsecceecceesseesseeceessesssess 137 Opening existing SPpreadSheets ccccecceceeccescceceenceesceessecssenees 138 Opening CSV BS Sires oatccaarcaa reeves ete wieai
227. ew tnieeninesensaneseemendedaeng ees vesioenenersiaedas 138 SAVING SPFEAQCSNEEUS ccececcecceccecenceccecceceeceecceessessseessecceessesstess 139 Navigating within spreadSheets cccccccceccecescesceceecenseseeeeceenees 141 Selecting items in a sheet or spreadsheet ccc cece ec eeeeeneeeeeees 145 Working with columns and LOWG cccceceeceecectenceenceeseeeeeenseeneees 148 Working with SNEEUS ccccccceccec enc ecceccecensensecsecensensecteceecensensenges 149 TO egress sane cas E E E AS 151 Entering data using the keyboard sscsssssessrsessereeessserrersseseereeees 155 Speeding up data entry scscseeseeesererssssrerssrereesesereeseeereeseseseseseeeee 156 Sharing content between SHEEtS cccecesceccecenceceecsectenceenceesess 160 Validating cell contents eecsseresesseressssereessseressereeessseereeeeerereeeses 160 E OA a E E cress T EE E AE A 160 POT T AE AEEA NE 162 Autoformatting cells and SheetS cece cece eccecenceseeceecenseneeceees 166 Formatting spreadsheets using themes cccccceeececeeeeenseeeeees 168 Using conditional formatting essessscsssserererrerereerereeesseserssssesese 168 Hidmg anad ShOwing dala sca ccacsee enact ceotucnecincsaeeceecsacenssawassvaeatenetaes 169 OT T C eE EEE ES 171 nA EA a PE E een E EA A PE VEN A EA T 172 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 5 Chapter 6 Getting Started With IM Peb
228. ext will be formatted with the outline style at the cursor position in an AutoLayout text box or with the default graphic style in a normal text box Formatting pasted text If pasting the text into an AutoLayout area then to give the pasted text the same look and feel of the rest of the presentation you need to apply the appropriate outline style to the text 1 Paste the text in the desired position Do not worry if it does not look right it will in a minute 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select Format gt Default formatting from the menu bar 4 Use the four arrow buttons in the Text Formatting toolbar to move the text to the appropriate position and give it the appropriate outline level The button with the arrow pointing left promotes the list entry by one level for example from Outline 3 to Outline 2 the right arrow button demotes the list entry by one level the up and down arrow buttons move the list entry 5 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text to change font attributes tabs and so on If you are pasting text in a text box you can still use styles to quickly format the text Note that one and only one graphic style can be applied to the copied text To do that 1 Paste the text in the desired position 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select the desired graphic style 4 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text 208 Getting Started with O
229. f the Page Style dialog Print You can specify which details to print Those details include Row and column headers Sheet grid prints the borders of the cells as a grid Notes prints the notes defined in your spreadsheet on a separate page along with the corresponding cell reference Objects and graphics Charts Drawing objects Formulas prints the formulas contained in the cells instead of the results Zero Values prints cells with a zero value 174 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Remember that since the print detail options are a part of the page s properties they are also a part of the page style s Note properties Therefore different page styles can be set up to quickly change the print properties of the sheets in the spreadsheet Scale Use the scale features to control the number of pages the data will print on This can be useful if a large amount of data needs to be printed more compactly or if the reader has poor eyesight text can be enlarged when it prints e Reduce Enlarge printout scales the data in the printout either larger or smaller For example if a sheet would normally print out as four pages two high and two wide a scaling of 50 would print as one page both width and height are halved e Fit print range s on number of pages defines exactly how many pages the printout will take up This option will only reduce a printout it will not enlarge it To enlarge a printout t
230. f the basic directory It is not important to understand where macros are stored for casual use If you know where they are stored however you can create a backup share your macros or inspect them if there is an error For 392 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x example on one or more of my OpenOffice org upgrades all of my macros disappeared Although the macros were still on disk the macros were not copied to the new directories The solution was to import the macros into the new installation Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Dialogs to open the OpenOffice org Macros organizer dialog Another common way to open this dialog is to use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Macros dialog and then click the Organizer button see Figure 306 Modules Dialogs Libraries Location Edit My Macros amp Dialogs weeeeeee ee Library ChangeStyles DBUti MacroFormatter l OOocAuthorForma New Pitonyak j PitonyakDatabas Import PitonyakDialogs PitonyakUtil RemoveFormatt Standard Figure 306 The macro organizer dialog Importing macros The OpenOffice org Macro Organizer dialog provides functionality to create delete and rename libraries modules and dialogs Select the library container to use and then click the Import button to import macro libraries see Figure 307 Tip You cannot import the library named Standar
231. fferent background color Right clicking on a comment pops up a menu where you can delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document From this menu you can also apply some basic formatting to the text of the comment You can also change the font type size and alignment from the main menu To navigate from one comment to another open the Navigator F5 expand the Comments section and click on the comment text to move the cursor to the anchor point of the comment in the document Right click on the comment to quickly edit or delete it You can also navigate the comments using the keyboard Use Ctri Alt Page Down to move to the next comment and Ctril Alt Page Up to move to the previous comment Creating a table of contents Writer s table of contents feature lets you build an automated table of contents from the headings in your document Before you start make sure that the headings are styled consistently For example you can use the Heading 1 style for chapter titles and the Heading 2 and Heading 3 styles for chapter subheadings Although tables of contents can be customized extensively in Writer often the default settings are all you need Creating a quick table of contents is simple 1 When you create your document use the following paragraph styles for different heading levels such as chapter and section headings Heading 1 Heading 2 and Heading 3 These are what wi
232. field or use the down arrow key to move from row to row Defining relationships Now that the tables have been created what are the relationships between our tables This is the time to define them based upon the questions we asked and answered in the beginning When on vacation we want to enter all of our expenses all at one time each day Most of these expenses are in the Vacations table but the fuel we buy is not So we will relate these two tables using the Date fields Since the Fuel table may have more than one entry per date this relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables is one to many It is designated 1 n The Vacations table also contains several fields for the type of payment used For each field listing the payment type there is only one entry from the Payment Type table This is a one to one relationship one field in one table to one entry from the other table It is designated 1 1 Other tables also contain fields for the type of payment The relationship between the fields of those tables and the Payment Type table are also 1 1 Since the Payment Type table only provides a static list we will not be defining a relationship between the Payment Type table and the fields of the other tables which use the entries of the Payment Type table That will be done when the forms are created The Fuel and Maintenance tables do not really have a relationship even though they share similar fields Date and Odometer
233. fields Step 3 Set primary key 1 Create a primary key should be checked 2 Select option Use an existing field as a primary key 3 In the Fieldname dropdown list select CollectionID 4 Check Auto value if it is not already checked 5 Click Next A primary key uniquely identifies an item or record in the table For example you might know two people called Randy Herring or three people living at the same address and the database needs to distinguish between them Note The simplest method is to assign a unique number to each one number the first person 1 the second 2 and so on Each entry has one number and every number is different so it is easy to say record ID 172 This is the option chosen here CollectionID is just a number assigned automatically by Base to each record of this table Step 4 Create the table 1 If desired rename the table at this point If you rename it make the name meaningful to you For this example make no changes 2 Leave the option Insert data immediately checked 3 Click Finish to complete the table wizard Close the window created by the table wizard You are now back to the main window of the database with the listing of the tables queries forms and reports Notice that a table named CD Collection is now listed in the Tables portion of the window 258 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating a table by copying an existing table If you have a large co
234. floating Table toolbar appears and when the cursor is in a numbered or bullet list the Bullets and Numbering toolbar appears You can dock these toolbars to the top bottom or side of the window if you wish see Moving toolbars above Docking floating windows and toolbars Toolbars and some windows such as the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window are dockable You can move resize or dock them to an edge Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 23 To dock a window Or toolbar do one l s T EEE Mee l of the following e Click on the title bar of the floating window and drag it to the side until you see the outline of a box appear in the main window then release the Styles and Formatting or E E ez A fal i Complimentary close Defau First line indent Hanging indent Wi window This method depends haraf on your system s window bam manager settings so it may not Heading 3 work for you Heading 4 Heading 5 e Hold down the Control key and double click on the frame of the floating window or in a vacant area near the icons at the top to dock it in its last position If ssa a ale sanck inate eee a e EE clicking without using the Figure 5 Docking a window Control key Automatic To undock a window hold down the Control key and double click on the frame or a vacant area near the icons at the to
235. formatting 205 208 default template 79 deleting files 30 derivative markup Math 323 Design View Base creating anew table 259 creating forms 283 creating queries 296 dictionaries installing 57 dictionary 101 different first page 84 digital rights management DRM 334 digital signature 339 DIM 383 dispatch framework 388 dispatch helper 383 distorting an image 244 dockable window 23 document closing 34 create from template 73 creating 27 opening 28 Starting new 27 document status option 38 Documentation Project 16 download updates automatically 51 downloading OpenOffice org 14 drag and drop 342 Draw 217 248 drawing circle or ellipse 229 duplication 244 Flash export 248 HTML export 248 inserting pictures 247 line 227 rectangle 229 Save in a foreign format 248 Drawing Object Properties toolbar 354 drawing objects grouping 3955 properties 354 Drawing toolbar 221 353 drawing tools 352 duplication 244 dynamic gradients 244 E e mailing Mail Merge Wizard 337 several recipients 337 Writer document as attachment 336 edit document properties before saving 53 ellipse drawing 229 en and em dashes 99 en dash and em dash 99 envelope formatting address blocks 122 mail merge from database 122 printing 121 envelope printing 121 EPS images in PDF 331 equation inserting 313 numbering 325 equation editor 313 brackets 321 derivative markup 323 equations over more than one line 322 floating window 319 font s
236. from a changed template The next time you open a document that was created from the changed template the following message appears The ternplate OOo03 chapter template on which this document is based has been modified Do you want to update style based formattings according to the modified ternplate Update Styles Keep Old Styles Figure 55 Update styles message Click Yes to apply the template s changed styles to the document Click No if you do not want to apply the template s changed styles to the document but see Caution notice below Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 77 If you choose No in the message box shown in Figure 54 that message will not appear again the next time you open the i document after changing the template it is based on You will not Caution get another chance to update the styles from the template A although you can use the macro given in the Note below to re enable this feature If you are using Writer you can also use the Template Changer extension see page 81 to reactivate the template Note To re enable updating from a template 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic Select the document from the list click the and select Standard If Standard has a beside it click that and select a module 2 Name the macro For example you could call it FixDocument If the Edit button is active click it If the Edit button is not active click New ty
237. function includes much more than mathematical functions See Chapter 7 in the Calc Guide The Sum button inserts a formula into the current cell that totals the numbers in the cells above the current cell If there are no numbers above the current cell then the cells to the left are placed in the Sum formula Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 135 The Function button inserts an equals sign into the selected cell and the Input Line thereby setting the cell ready to accept a formula When you enter new data into a cell the Sum and Equals buttons change to Cancel and Accept buttons x yw The contents of the current cell data formula or function are displayed in the Input line which forms the remainder of the Formula Bar You can either edit the cell contents of the current cell here or you can do that in the current cell To edit inside the Input line area click in the area then type your changes To edit within the current cell just double click the cell Individual cells The main section of the screen displays the individual cells in the form of a grid with each cell being at the intersection of a column and a row At the top of the columns and at the left hand end of the rows are a series of gray boxes containing letters and numbers These are the column and row headers The columns start at A and go on to the right and the rows start at 1 and go down These column and row headers form the cell references that a
238. g Started with OpenOffice org 3 x e How do we want the information arranged e What fields are required to provide this information e Will a query have to be created because these fields are in different tables e Are there any calculations required in the data before being added to the report The expenses for our vacation are motel tolls miscellaneous breakfast lunch supper snacks and fuel One possible report would simply list the totals of each of these expense groups Another possible report would list the expense totals for each day of the vacation A third possible report would list the totals for each expense group for each type of payment This would let us know where the money came from to pay the expenses The best way to create reports like these is to create the queries needed to gather the needed data insert the query data into a spreadsheet and use the necessary Calc functions on this data We will create two reports one listing the expenses each day other than fuel and the second listing the fuel costs each day The fields we need for the first report from the Vacations table are Date Motel Toll Breakfast Lunch Supper SnackCost and Miscellaneous This report will not require an additional query The second report involves the Fuel table Since this table includes fuel purchases at times other than during the vacation we need to create a query that contains only the fuel purchased during the vacation
239. g data in a form Records are used to organize the data we enter into a form They also organize the data we enter into a subform Fach type of field allows a different method to enter the data In many if not all cases more than one method can be used The first step to entering data in a form is to open it from the main database window Figure 183 1 Click the Forms icon in the Database list 2 Find the form s name in the Forms list Vacations 3 Double click the form s name 290 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x The quickest way to enter a date in the Date field is to click the arrow that opens the dropdown calendar Then click the day the you want Figure 224 Then press the Tab key to go to the Odometer field q September 2008 p SMTWTFS 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 190 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Today None Figure 224 Calendar dropdown The Odometer Tolls and Motel fields are numerical fields Enter values directly into them or use the up and down arrows When the value is entered use the Tab key to go to the next field e Clicking the up arrow increases the value and the down arrow decreases the value one unit e These two arrows only change the numerals to the left of the decimal place e Numerals to the right of the decimal place must be changed by deleting them and typing the desired ones The Motel s Payment field is a dropdown list If as in my case all of the eleme
240. g document You can also open an existing document in one of the following ways e Click File gt Open e Click the Open button on the main toolbar e Press Contro l O on the keyboard In each case the Open dialog appears Select the file you want and then click Open If a document is already open in OOo the second document opens in a new window In the Open dialog you can reduce the list of files by selecting the type of file you are looking for For example if you choose Text documents as the file type you will only see documents Writer can open including odt doc txt if you choose Spreadsheets you will see ods XSL and other files that Calc opens You can also open an existing document that is in an OpenDocument format by double clicking on the file s icon on the desktop or in a file manager such as Windows Explorer If you have associated Microsoft Office file formats with OOo you can also open these files by double clicking on them Under Microsoft Windows you can use either the OOo Open and Note Save As dialogs or the ones provided by Microsoft Windows See Using the Open and Save As dialogs on page 30 Saving documents To save a new document do one of the following e Press Control S e Choose File gt Save from the menu bar e Click the Save button on the main toolbar When the Save As dialog appears enter the file name verify the file type if applicable and click Save 28 Getting
241. g errors replacement of straight quotation marks by curly custom quotes and starting cell content with an uppercase capital letter are controlled by Tools gt AutoCorrect Options Go to the Custom Quotes Options or Replace tabs to deactivate any of the features that you do not want On the Replace tab you can also delete unwanted word pairs and add new ones as required Autolnput When you are typing in a cell Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column To turn the AutoInput on and off set or remove the check mark in front of Tools gt Cell Contents gt AutoInput Automatic date conversion Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates To ensure that an entry that looks like a date is interpreted as text type an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell Speeding up data entry Entering data into a spreadsheet can be very labor intensive but Calc provides several tools for removing some of the drudgery from input 156 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x The most basic ability is to drop and drag the contents of one cell to another with a mouse However Calc also includes several other tools for automating input especially of repetitive material They include the Fill tool selection lists and the ability to input information into multiple sheets of the same document Using the Fill tool on cells At its simplest the Fill tool is a way
242. g is likely to be generated Any work done inside the dialog is not usually recorded Examples include macro organization dialogs inserting special characters and similar types of dialogs Other possible problems using the macro recorder include things such as inserting a formula setting user data setting filters in Calc actions in database forms and exporting a document to an encrypted PDF file You never know for certain what will work unless you try it however The actions from the search dialog are properly captured for example Other options When the macro recorder is not able to solve a specific problem the usual solution is to write code using the OpenOffice org objects Unfortunately there is a steep learning curve for the OOo objects It is usually best to start with simple examples and then branch out slowly Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 389 as you learn more Learning to read generated macros is a good place to start If you record Calc macros and the recorder can correctly generate a macro there is an add in created by Paolo Mantovani which converts Calc macros when they are recorded The final code manipulates OpenOffice org objects rather than generating dispatches This can be very useful for learning the object model You can download the macro recorder from Paolo s web site directly or from the OOo Macros web site You should check both places to see which contains the latest version http www
243. g toolbar Edit Move Insert Delete Points advanced editing tools to manipulate the shape of a polygon hotspot Select the Edit Points tool to activate the other tools Active icon toggles the status of a selected hotspot between active and inactive Macro associates a macro with the hotspot instead of just associating an hyperlink Properties sets the hyperlink properties and adds the Name attribute to the hyperlink Below the toolbar specify for the selected hotspot Address the address pointed by the hyperlink You can also point to an anchor in a document to do this write the address in this format file lt path gt document name anchor name Text type the text that you want to be displayed when the mouse pointer is moved over the hotspot Frame where the target of the hyperlink will open pick among _blank opens in a new browser window self opens in the active browser window top or parent The value self for the target frame will work just fine in the vast Tip majority of occasions It is therefore not recommended to use the other choices unless absolutely necessary Using OO0o s drawing tools You can use Ooo s drawing tools to create graphics such as simple diagrams using rectangles circles lines text and other predefined Shapes You can also group several drawing objects to make sure they maintain their relative position and proportion You can place the drawing objects directly on a page in
244. gital Signatures 2 If you have not saved the document since the last change a message box appears Click Yes to save the file 3 After saving you see the Digital Signatures dialog Click Add to add a public key to the document 4 In the Select Certificate dialog select your certificate and click OK 5 You see again the Digital Signatures dialog where you can add more certificates if you want Click OK to add the public key to the saved file A signed document shows an icon in the status bar You can double click the icon to view the certificate 340 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 1 1 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork Introduction You can add graphic and image files including photos drawings scanned images and others to OpenOffice org documents OOo can import various vector line drawing and raster bitmap file formats The most commonly used graphic formats are GIF JPG PNG and BMP See Appendix B for a full list of the graphic formats OOo can import Graphics in OOo are of three basic types e Image files such as photos drawings and scanned images e Diagrams created using OOo s drawing tools e Charts created using OOo s Chart facility This chapter covers images and diagrams More detailed descriptions on working with drawing tools can be found in the Draw Guide and Impress Guide Instructions on how to create charts are given in the Calc Guide Adding
245. graphics Zero values Scale Scaling mode 6 Reduce enlarge printout Me Scaling factor 7 O eon Figure 9 Dialog showing common controls 1 Tabbed page not strictly speaking a control 2 Radio buttons only one can be selected at a time 3 Checkbox more than one can be selected at a time 4 Spin box click the up and down arrows to change the number shown in the text box next to it or type in the text box 5 Thumbnail or preview 6 Drop down list from which to select an item 7 Push buttons Starting a new document You can create a new blank document in OOo in several ways When OOo is open but no document is open for example if you close all the open documents but leave the program running a Welcome screen is shown Click one of the icons to open a new document of that type or click the Templates icon to start a new document using a template You can also start a new document in one of the following ways Ifa document is already open in OOo the new document opens in a new window e Use File gt New and choose the type of document e Use the arrow next to the New button on the main toolbar From the drop down menu select the type of document to be created Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 27 e Press Control N on the keyboard e Use File gt Wizards for some special types of documents Opening an existing document When no document is open the Welcome screen provides an icon for opening an existin
246. gt Options then OpenOffice org gt Appearance Figure 167 Color scheme Scheme OpenOffice org Save Custom colors On User interface elements YUL ale SL pEIT E Drawing Presentation Grid E Black kd Basic Syntax Highlighting Identifier L _ Automatic comment Automatic Number Automatic String Automatic Operator Automatic a Figure 167 Changing the grid color In the Drawing Presentation section you can change the color of the grid points On the Color Settings pulldown menu select a more Suitable visible color for example black Positioning objects with helper lines To simplify the positioning of objects it is possible to make visible guiding lines extensions of the edges of the object while it is being moved These guiding lines have no snap function The guiding lines can be activated or deactivated under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt View gt Guides when moving or by clicking on the tt icon on the Options toolbar 226 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x The basic drawing shapes Draw provides a wide range of shapes located in palettes accessed from the Drawing Toolbar This chapter describes only a few of the basic shapes see the Draw Guide for a complete description of the Shapes available These shapes include rectangles and squares circles ellipses and arcs 3D objects curves lines and arrows text and connectors
247. h the result that a particular object is hidden by one or more other objects above it You can rearrange the stacking order of objects move an object to the front or to the back of the stack by selecting the object clicking Modify gt Arrange and selecting the appropriate Bring Forward or Send Backward option or by right clicking the object and selecting Arrange from the context menu then selecting from the list of Bring Forward or Send Backward options On the Drawing toolbar the Arrange tear off menu on the button contains the above options A keyboard shortcut is Shift Ctrl to bring an object to the top and Shift Ctril to send an object to the bottom Draw also provides tools for aligning multiple objects details are given in the Draw Guide Selecting several objects To select or deselect several objects one by one press the Shift key and click on the various objects to be selected or deselected One click on an object selects it a second click deselects it Moving and dynamically adjusting an object s size There are several ways of moving or changing the size of an object The method described here will be called dynamic in the sense that it is carried out using the mouse When you dynamically change an object remember to check the central area of the status bar at the bottom of your screen This area shows detailed information about the ongoing manipulation This information changes when the mouse is moved
248. h to the Caution size you need As you adjust one dimension both dimensions A will change Failure to do so will cause the picture to become distorted Remember also that resizing a bitmap image will reduce its quality better by far to create an image of the desired size outside of Impress 3 Adding text to a slide If the slide contains text click on Click to add an outline in the text frame and then type your text The Outline styles from 1 to 10 are automatically applied to the text as you insert it You can change the outline level of each paragraph as well as its position within the text using the arrow buttons on the Text Formatting toolbar Step 4 To create additional slides repeat steps 1 3 Modifying the appearance of slides To change the background and other characteristics of all slides in the presentation you need to modify the slide master or choose a different slide master A Slide Master is a slide with a specified set of characteristics which is used as the beginning point for creating other slides These characteristics include the background objects in the background formatting of any text used and any background graphics OOo uses three interchangeable terms for this one concept Master slide slide master and master page all refer to a slide Note that is used to create other slides This book however will use only the term slide master except when describing the user interface Impress has 28 pr
249. ha ALPHA beta BETA gamma GAMMA psi PSI phi PHI theta THETA Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 317 Note A complete table of Greek characters is provided in the Math Objects chapter in the Writer Guide Another way to enter Greek characters is by using the Symbols catalog window Choose Tools gt Catalog This window is shown in Figure 260 Under Symbol set select Greek and double click on a Greek letter from the list Symbols Symbol set Figure 260 Symbols catalog used for entering Greek characters Example 2 mt 3 14159 For this example we will suppose that e We want to enter the above formula the value of pi rounded to 5 decimal places e We know the name of the Greek character pi e But we do not know the markup associated with the symbol Step 1 Type followed by the text pi This displays the Greek Character r Step 2 Open the Formula Elements window View gt Formula Elements Step 3 The symbol is a relation so we click on the Relations button If you hover the mouse over this button you see the tooltip Relations Figure 261 Figure 262 shows the Formula Elements window after clicking the Relations button The symbol we want is circled 318 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x lt j Formula Eleme Eg van ese f x Ea hs a om 8 A along acA f x 2a i d elation 92 a ad a F 74 azb asb alb afb a b a b axb a b aab a gt
250. handle on the right The cursor becomes a double headed arrow 3 Drag the cursor to the left until the field is 2 5 cm wide 1 inch If you have the Snap to Grid and Guides when moving icons Tip selected in the Design Format toolbar you will see how wide the field is as you shorten it 4 Repeat these steps to shorten these fields Lpayment SPayment SnPayment Mpayment and MiscPayment Step 3 Move the controls to group them by category We want to move the controls so that they look like Figure 204 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 278 m Figure 204 Positioning of controls 1 Click the first control you want to move A border appears around the control with eight green handles 2 Move the cursor over the label or field of the control It change shape to a drag icon 3 Drag and drop the control to where you want it Caution Do not use Control click when moving a field It moves either the field or the label but not both To move both use a mouse A click and drag to the desired spot 4 Use the same steps to move the rest of the controls to where they belong Step 4 Change the label wording Field names have been single words for some time However the labels for the fields in a form can be more than one word So we will change them by editing the text in the label The table wizard in Base contains suggested fields which are single words often consisting of two separate words Table names in
251. haracter set Western Europe Windows 12 w Figure 38 Choosing HTML compatibility options Import Use English USA locale for numbers When importing numbers from an HTML page the decimal and thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page The clipboard however contains no information about the locale If this option is not selected numbers will be interpreted according to the Language Locale setting in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages see page 58 If this option is selected numbers will be interpreted as for the English USA locale Import Import unknown HTML tags as fields Select this option if you want tags that are not recognized by OOo to be imported as fields For an opening tag an HTML ON field will be created with the value of the tag name For a closing tag an HTML OFF will be created These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export Import Ignore font settings Select this option to have OOo ignore all font settings when importing The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be used Export To optimize the HTML export select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box If OpenOffice org Writer is selected specific OpenOffice org Writer instructions are exported Export OpenOffice org Basic Select this option to include OOo Basic macros scripts when exporting to HTML format You must activate this option befor
252. he reduce enlarge option must be used e Fit print range s to width height defines how high and wide the printout will be in pages Using print ranges Print ranges have several uses including printing only a specific part of the data or printing selected rows or columns on every page For more about using print ranges see Chapter 6 Printing Exporting and E mailing in the Calc Guide Defining a print range To define a new print range or modify an existing print range 1 Highlight the range of cells that comprise the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Define The page break lines display on the screen You can check the print range by using File gt Page Preview Tip OOo will only display the cells in the print range Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 175 Adding to the print range After defining a print range you can add more cells to it This allows multiple separate areas of the same sheet to be printed while not printing the whole sheet After you have defined a print range 1 Highlight the range of cells to be added to the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Add This adds the extra cells to the print range The page break lines no longer display on the screen The additional print range will print as a separate page even if Note both ranges are on the same sheet Removing a print range It may become necessary to remove a defined print range for example if
253. he original presentation 7 Choose the navigation button style to use to move from one page 3 to another If you do not choose any OOo will create a text navigator Select button style E Text only 90000009 paaagnga Select the color scheme for the web pages Available schemes include the document s existing scheme one based upon browser colors and a completely user defined scheme You can save a new scheme so that it will appear on the first page of the HTML export wizard 376 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Select color scheme Apply color scheme from document Use browser colors _ Use custom color scheme Hyperlink Hyperlink x 1 Ma mafe g mm mil e Hl Lif amp Hi TPR Active Link Visited link Visited Link i 9 Click Create to generate the HTML files If this is a new design a small dialog pops up If you might want to reuse this design you can give it a name and save it Otherwise click Do Not Save Name HTML Design Do Not Save Saving Draw documents as web pages Exporting drawings from OpenOffice org s Draw application is similar to exporting a presentation from Impress Use File gt Export and select HTML Document as the file type When using the wizard you can choose to create the web page at any time by clicking the Create button Chapter 12 Creating WebPages I7 OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 1 3 Getting Started with Macro
254. he variable named document refers to a document s frame which receives dispatched commands document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame Most tasks in OpenOffice org are accomplished by dispatching a command OOo version 2 0 introduced the dispatch helper service which does most of the work to use dispatches in macros The method Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 383 CreateUnoService accepts the name of a service and it tries to create an instance of that service On completion the dispatcher variable contains a reference to a DispatchHelper dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper Declare an array of properties Each property has a name and a value In other words it is a name value pair The created array has one property at index zero dim args1 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue Give the property the name Text and the value Andrew Pitonyak which is the text that is inserted when the macro is run args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak This is where the magic happens The dispatch helper sends a dispatch to the document s frame stored in the variable named document with the command uno InsertText The next two arguments frame name and search flags are beyond the scope of this document The last argument is the array of property values to be used while executing the command InsertText dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0
255. hen select the relevant options But if you find unexplained changes appearing in your document this is a good place to look to find the cause To open the AutoCorrect dialog click Tools gt AutoCorrect Options You need to have a document open for this menu item to appear In Writer this dialog has five tabs as shown in Figure 44 In other components of OOo the dialog has only four tabs AutoCorrect 4 Use replacement table Correct TWo INitial CApitals Capitalise first letter of every sentence Automatic bold and _underline_ URL Recogniton Replace ist with 1 st Replace 1 2 with 4 Replace dashes Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line Ignore double spaces Apply numbering symbol Apply border Create table Apply Styles Remove blank paragraphs Reolace Custom Stvles M Replace while modifying existing text T AutoFormat AutoCorrect while typing y ma F E iw iw iw M E MAAT T TaT Figure 44 The AutoCorrect dialog in Writer showing the five tabs and some of the choices Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 61 OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 3 Using Styles and Iemplates What is a template A template is a model that you use to create other documents For example you can create a template for business reports that has your company s logo on the first page New documents created from thi
256. hese manually Running the macro quickly It is tedious to repeatedly run the macro using Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro see Figure 302 The macro can be run from the IDE Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the Basic Macro dialog Select your macro and click Edit to open the macro in the IDE The IDE has a Run Basic icon in the toolbar that runs the first macro in the IDE Unless you change the first macro it is the empty macro named Main Modify Main so that it reads as shown in Listing 3 Listing 3 Modify Main to call CopyNumToCol1 Sub Main CopyNumToColl End Sub Now you can run CopyNumToColl by repeatedly clicking the Run Basic icon in the toolbar of the IDE This is very fast and easy especially for temporary macros that will be used a few times and then discarded Sometimes the macro recorder fails Understanding the OpenOffice org internals helps to understand how and why the macro recorder frequently fails The primary offender is related to the dispatch framework and its relationship to the macro recorder The dispatch framework The purpose of the dispatch framework is to provide a uniform access to components documents for commands that usually correspond to menu items I can use File gt Save from the menu the shortcut keys Ctrl S or click on the Save toolbar icon All of these commands are translated into the same dispatch command which is sent to the current
257. hieve best quality Different sized icons will be scaled automatically Figure 318 Change Icon dialog i U To use a custom icon create it in a graphics program and import it into OOo by clicking the Import button on the Change Icon dialog Custom icons must be 16 x 16 or 26 x 26 pixels in size and cannot contain more than 256 colors 410 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Example Adding a Fax icon to a toolbar You can customize OpenOffice org so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax 1 Be sure the fax driver is installed Consult the documentation for your fax modem for more information 2 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Print The dialog shown in Figure 319 opens 3 Select the fax driver from the Fax list and click OK Contents Pages Comments Graphics Left pages None Tables Right pages O Comments only Drawings Reversed End of document Controls C Brochure End of page Background Print black Hidden text C Text placeholder Other Print automatically inserted blank pages C Create single print jobs Paper tray from ps Figure 319 Setting up OOo for sending faxes 4 Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard toolbar In the drop down menu choose Customize Toolbar The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog appears Figure 317 Click Add 5 On the Add Commands dialog Figure 320 select Documents in
258. hift key use the cursor arrows to select the rest of the range Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 145 The result of any of these methods looks like the right side of Figure 104 You can also directly select a range of cells using the Name box Click into the Name Box as described in Using a cell reference on page 141 To select a range of cells enter the Tip cell reference for the upper left hand cell followed by a colon and then the lower right hand cell reference For example to select the range that would go from A3 to C6 you would enter A3 C6 Range of non contiguous cells 1 Select the cell or range of cells using one of the methods above 2 Move the mouse pointer to the start of the next range or single cell 3 Hold down the Control key and click or click and drag to select a range 4 Repeat as necessary Selecting columns and rows Entire columns and rows can be selected very quickly in OOo Single column or row To select a single column click on the column identifier letter see Figure 96 To select a single row click on the row identifier number Multiple columns or rows To select multiple columns or rows that are contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Shift key 3 Click the last column or row in the group To select multiple columns or rows that are not contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Control key
259. his printing of this document only To specify default printing options you need to use two pages in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Print and Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer Print which looks very similar to the Printer Options dialog See Chapter 2 Some items of interest on the Printer Options dialog include e In the Contents section you might choose not to print graphics or page background in drafts for example to save toner or ink e In the Pages section you can choose Print only left even numbered pages or only right odd numbered pages These settings are useful when you want to print on both sides of the page but do not have a printer that handles this automatically Print in reversed page order Brochure the results of this selection are discussed in Printing a brochure on page 120 118 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x e In the Comments section you can choose whether to print any comments that have been added to your document using Insert gt Comment and where to print the comments Printing in black and white on a color printer You may wish to print documents in black and white on a color printer to save expensive color ink or toner Common uses are for drafts or documents to be photocopied in black and white Several choices are available To print the current document in black and white or grayscale 1 Choose File gt Print to open the Print d
260. hoose E mail as PDF OOo first creates a PDF using your default PDF settings as when using the Export Directly as PDF toolbar button and then opens your email program with the PDF file attached 336 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x E mailing a document to several recipients To e mail a document to several recipients you can use the features in your e mail program or you can use OO0o s mail merge facilities to extract email addresses from an address book You can use OOo s mail merge to send e mail in two ways e Use the Mail Merge Wizard to create the document and send it See Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge of the Writer Guide for details e Create the document in Writer without using the Wizard then use the Wizard to send it This method is described here To use the Mail Merge Wizard to send a previously created Writer document 1 Click Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard On the first page of the wizard select Use the current document and click Next Mail Merge Wizard Steps Select starting document for the mail merge 1 Select starting document Select the document upon which to base the mail merge document 2 Select document type E Use the current document 3 Insert address block _ Create a new document gt Start from existing document _ Start from a template Figure 278 select starting document 2 On the second page select E mail message and click Next Steps Select a document type
261. hotoshop or The Gimp See Chapter 6 Editing Pictures in the Draw Guide for details and examples Working with 3D objects Although Draw does not match the functionality of the leading drawing programs it does offer a wide array of tools and methods to produce and edit very good 3D drawings Draw offers two types of 3D objects the ones carried forward from OOo version 1 3D bodies and the ones introduced in version 2 3D shapes Depending on which type you choose there are different possibilities for further editing of the object rotation illumination perspective Setting up and editing 3D objects is simpler with 3D Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 247 Shapes than with 3D bodies but 3D bodies currently allow for more customizing than 3D shapes See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide for details Exporting graphics To save a Draw image in a foreign format use File gt Export Draw can save to many graphic file formats as listed in Appendix B Background Information You can export the entire file or selected objects You can also export Draw files to HTML PDF or Flash PDF export is the same as for any part of OpenOffice org as described in Chapter 10 Printing E mailing and Exporting Flash export creates a swf file HTML export uses a conversion wizard that creates as many web pages as there are pages in your Draw document You can optionally choose to display the pages in frames with a
262. hown automatic transition only Workspace The Workspace has five tabs Normal Outline Notes Handout and Slide Sorter These five tabs are called View buttons There are also many toolbars that can be used during slide creation they are revealed by selecting them with View gt Toolbars The Workspace is below the View buttons This is where you assemble the various parts of your selected slide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 185 Fach view is designed to make completing certain tasks easier In summary e Normal view is the main view for creating individual slides Use this view to format and design slides and to add text graphics and animation effects e Outline view shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Use this view to rearrange the order of slides edit titles and headings rearrange the order of items in a list and add new slides e Notes view lets you add notes to each slide that are not seen when the presentation is shown e Slide Sorter view shows a thumbnail of each slide in order Use this view to rearrange the order of slides produce a timed slide show or add transitions between selected slides e Handout view lets you print your slides for a handout You can choose one two three four or six slides per page from Tasks pane gt Layouts Thumbnails can be re arranged in this view by dragging and dropping them Toolbars The various Impress to
263. hown in Figure 259 The items in this menu correspond exactly to those in the Formula Elements window Unary Binary Operators a Relations a Set Operations a Functions a Operators Attributes Brackets Formats Others a b a b a cdot b a times b N a W h T r Y T T Y r Y a over b a div b a b a cire b a wideslash b a widebslash b nega aandb aorb Figure 259 Right click menu 316 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Markup You can type the markup directly in the equation editor For example you can type 5 times 4 to obtain 5x4 If you know the markup this can be the fastest way to enter a formula The formula markup resembles the way the formula reads in Tip English Below is a short list of common equations and their corresponding markup Display Command Display Command a b sqrt a a 2 an int f x dx suman a lt b infinity a times b x cdot y Greek characters Greek characters a f y etc are common in mathematical formulas These characters are not available in the Formula Elements window or on the right click menu Fortunately the markup for Greek Characters is simple Type a sign followed the name of the character in English e To write a lowercase character type the name of the character in lowercase e To write an uppercase character type the name of the character in uppercase See the table below for some examples Lowercase Uppercase a lp
264. hows here You can double click the icon to view the certificate Section or object information When the cursor is on a section heading or list item or when an object such as a picture or table is selected information about that item appears in this field Double clicking in this area opens a relevant dialog box For details consult the Help or the Writer Guide View layout Click an icon to change between single page side by side and book layout views Figure 62 You can edit the document in any view A Oo dh G BA EG G oG AR aR ia a Figure 62 View layouts single side by side book 90 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Zoom To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Zoom interacts with the selected view layout to determine how many pages are visible in the document window amp 100 Changing document views Writer has several ways to view a document Print Layout Web Layout and Full Screen To access these and other choices go to the View menu and click on the required view When in Full Screen view press the Esc key to return to either Print or Web Layout view When in Print Layout you can use both the Zoom slider and the View Layout icons on the Status bar In Web Layout you can use the Zoom Slider You can also choose View gt
265. hrough the Colors page of the Area dialog where you can also save and load palettes a feature that is not possible here In Calc draw a temporary draw object and use the context menu of this object to open the Area dialog If you load a palette in one component of OOo it is only active in that component the other components keep their own palettes Font options You can define replacements for any fonts that might appear in your documents If you receive from someone else a document containing fonts that you do not have on your system OpenOffice org will substitute fonts for those it does not find You might prefer to specify a different font from the one the program chooses On the OpenOffice org Fonts page Figure 27 1 Select the Apply Replacement Table option Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 45 2 Select or type the name of the font to be replaced in the Font box If you do not have this font on your system it will not appear in the drop down list in this box so you need to type it in 3 In the Replace with box select a suitable font from the drop down list of fonts installed on your computer 4 The checkmark to the right of the Replace with box turns green Click on this checkmark A row of information now appears in the larger box below the input boxes Select the options under Always and Screen 5 In the bottom section of the page you can change the typeface and size of the font used to display source code
266. ialog 2 Click Properties to open the properties dialog for the printer The available choices vary from one printer to another but you Should find an option for Color See your printer s help or user manual for more information 3 The choices for color may include black and white or grayscale Choose one of these Grayscale is best if you have any graphics in the document Click OK to confirm your choice and return to the Print dialog then click OK again to print the document To set up OOo to print all color text and graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Print 2 Select the Convert colors to grayscale option Click OK to save the change To set up OOo Writer to print all color text as black and all graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Print 2 Under Contents select the Print black option Click OK to save the change Previewing pages before printing The normal page view in Writer shows you what each page will look like when printed but it shows only one page at a time If you are designing a document to be printed double sided you may want to see what facing pages look like OOo provides two ways to do this e View Layout editable view see View layout on page 90 e Page Preview read only view from which you can print multiple pages onto one sheet of paper Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 119 To use Page P
267. ice org 3 x Labels Format Options Overy 4 User Horizontal pitch 3 94 Vertical pitch 3 94 Width 3 94 Height 3 94 Left margin 0 00 Top margin 0 00 Columns 1 ae ke k da a a Rows 1 Save Columns Figure 91 Labels dialog Format page 5 Click Save to save your new format 6 When you have finished formatting click New Document to make your sheet of labels or click Cancel or press the Esc key You can also click Reset to remove your changes and return to the original settings when the dialog opened On the Options page choose to print the entire page of labels or one single label then select which one by the column and row You can also change printer setup 7 You can print right away using the Print File Directly icon on the toolbar or by choosing File gt Print from the menu bar or you can save the file to print later Labels Format Options Distribute Entire page Single label Column il Wi km ial Printer HP LaserJet SL Setup Figure 92 Labels dialog Options page Sending a fax using Writer To send a fax directly from OpenOffice org you need a fax modem and a fax driver that allows applications to communicate with the fax modem Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 125 Sending a fax through the Print dialog 1 Open the Print dialog by choosing File gt Print and select the fax driver in the Name list 2 Click OK to open the dialog for
268. ick the element to highlight it The green squares show it is highlighted e Press the Delete key to remove it Sometimes you will accidentally select the wrong layout slide Tip or decide to change it This is safe and does not cause loss of the contents already on the slide 2 Add any elements to the slide that you do need a Adding pictures to the clipart frame if your chosen layout includes one e Double click the picture within the frame The Insert picture dialog opens e Browse to the location of the picture you want to include To see a preview of the picture check Preview at the bottom of the Insert picture dialog e Select the picture and click Open e Resize the picture as necessary Follow the directions in the Caution note below b Adding pictures from graphic files to places other than the clipart frame e Insert gt Picture gt From File The Insert picture dialog opens e Browse to the graphic file To see a preview of the picture check Preview at the bottom of the Insert picture dialog Select a picture and click Open e Move the picture to its location e Resize the picture if necessary c Adding OLE Objects is an advanced technique covered in Chapter 7 of the Impress Guide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 199 When resizing a graphic right click the picture Select Position and Size from the context menu and make sure that f Keep ratio is selected Then adjust the height or widt
269. ick the label PaymentType and choose Replace with gt List box from the menu 2 Again right click the label PaymentType to open the menu Select Column to open the Properties dialog Figure 211 3 In the Label box change PaymentType to Payment Type 4 Click the Data tab 5 From the Type of list contents dropdown list select Sql 6 Type the following exactly as it is written SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type 7 Close the Properties dialog General Data Events NAME ccccccccccceccccccescceee PaymentT ype rs PaymentType Enabled ccccecsse YES x Read only sasesana NO ki List ENES oe essessesene E PUN TUITPGNL vc hectccivecsveseces Border color EB Lime COUNT scccsssesescees 5 SI Default selection 1l E Additional information Help De E E REO o Figure 211 Properties window for control in a subform Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 279 Step 9 Add headings to groups This step is easier to do if you have end of paragraph markers visible Choose View gt Nonprinting Characters to turn them on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 10 Note Make sure the cursor in in the upper left corner If it is not click in that corner to move it there Press the Enter key to move the cursor down to the space between the Date field and the Breakfast field Change the Apply Styles dropdown list from Default to Heading 2 jk
270. ickstarter To close the Quickstarter right click on the icon in the system tray and then click Exit Quickstarter on the pop up menu The next time the computer is restarted the Quickstarter will be loaded again To prevent OpenOffice org from loading during system startup deselect the Load OpenOffice org during system start up item on the pop up menu You might want to do this if your computer has insufficient memory for example 18 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Reactivating the Quickstarter If the Quickstarter has been disabled you can reactivate it by selecting the Load OpenOffice org during system start up checkbox in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Memory Using the Quickstarter in Linux Some installations of OpenOffice org under Linux have a Quickstarter that looks and acts like the one described above for Windows the checkbox on the Memory page is labeled Enable systray quickstarter Preloading OOo under Linux KDE In Linux KDE you can use KDocker to have OOo loaded and ready for use at startup KDocker is not part of OOo it is a generic systray app docker that is helpful if you open OOo often Starting from the command line You may want to start OOo from the command line using the keyboard instead of the mouse By using the command line you have more control over what happens when OOo is started For example using the command line you can tell Writer to load a document and prin
271. icon Figure 2 shows a tear off toolbar from the Drawing toolbar The tear off toolbars can be floating or docked along an edge of the screen or in one of the existing toolbar areas To move a floating tear off toolbar drag it by the title bar See Moving toolbars below Click here and drag Toolbar tears off and floats __y Flowchart x OO 2 OO A ae O G O TRS U O O ae o a Ad Acn ona x O A Vie X O A Yeng a0 0a Of eee l Oe ee S Figure 2 Example of a tear off toolbar 22 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Moving toolbars To move a docked toolbar place the mouse pointer over the toolbar handle hold down the left mouse button drag the toolbar to the new location and then release the mouse button Figure 3 To move a floating toolbar click on its title bar and drag it to a new location Figure 4 Handles of docked toolbars Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help 3 BHS aaa Ss i d Default CentSchbook BT 11 hl IT Fh L Figure 3 Moving a docked toolbar Title bar of floating toolbar Bullets and Numbering Y X gt RP E Te PE ie m Figure 4 Moving a floating toolbar Floating toolbars OOo includes several additional context sensitive toolbars whose defaults appear as floating toolbars in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is in a table a
272. icon to insert the data into the spreadsheet cells Save the spreadsheet Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 289 Adding records to a spreadsheet is fairly easy You need to have the Data Source window open your spreadsheet open and the table you want to use selected 1 Click the gray box above the field name for the table s ID field 2 Drop and drag the gray box for the table s ID field to where you want the record to appear in the spreadsheet 3 Repeat until you have moved all of the fields you need to where you want them 4 Name and save the spreadsheet 5 Click a row of the table in the Data Source window 6 Drag the data in the ID field in the selected row onto the ID field in the spreadsheet The Save icon should activate 7 Click the Edit File button to make the spreadsheet read only Click Save when asked if you want to save the file 8 The Data Source window goes blank the fields in the spreadsheet are populated with data from the row you selected and the Form Navigation toolbar appears at the bottom of the spreadsheet Figure 223 j Record 2 of 2 lt E Figure 223 Navigation arrows of a form 9 Click the arrows on the Form Navigation toolbar to view the different records of the table The arrows are circled in red The number in the box changes when you change the record number by clicking an arrow The data in the fields changes correspondingly to the data for that particular record number Enterin
273. icrosoft WinWord 5 doc WordPerfect Document wpd WPS 2000 Office 1 0 wps rtf txt and csv StarWriter formats sdw sgl vor DocBook xml Unified Office Format text uot uof Ichitaro 8 9 10 11 jtd and jtt Hangul WP 97 hwp T602 Document 602 txt AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw Most of these file types are automatically detected by OOo so they can be opened without explicitly selecting the document type in the file picker When opening htm or html files used for web pages OOo customizes Writer for working with these files Opening spreadsheets In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxc and stc and the following spreadsheet formats Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls xlw and xlt Microsoft Excel 4 x 5 0 95 xls xlw and xlt Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Excel 2007 XML xlsx xlsm xlts xltm Microsoft Excel 2007 binary xlsb Lotus 1 2 3 wk1 wks and 123 Data Interchange Format dif Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc formats sdc and vor dBASE dbf SYLK slk Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos uof htm and html files including Web page queries Pocket Excel pxl Quattro Pro 6 0 wb2 428 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Opening presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp odg and otp Impress 3 can
274. id in the main form and use the Tab key to go to the next field When you use the Tab key to leave the Payment field it goes to the Date field of the next line and automatically enters the date Now you can enter your second set of fuel data for this day To move to another record when the form has a subform click any of the fields of the main form In this case click the Date field of the main form Then use the directional arrows at the bottom There are four of them from left to right First Record Previous Record Next Record and Last Record Figure 223 To the right of these arrows is the New Record icon To create a new record while in another record in the main form click either the Next Record icon or the New Record icon The number in the Record box is the number of the record whose data is shown in the form Tip If you know the number of the record you want you can enter it into the record box and then press Enter to take you to that record Figure 225 is a record with data inserted in its fields 292 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x ee ee ee a en ao n uon Re ke kw Friday May 25 2007 516 00 14 692 704 2 Kevin Friday May 25 2007 7 00 6 428 778 7 Dan Record i of 2 InooOe Figure 225 Sample record of the Vacation form and subform Creating queries Queries are used to get specific information from a database Query results are special tables within the database To demonstrate the
275. ies In addition to changing the sequence of entries on a menu or submenu you can add submenus rename or delete the entries and add group Separators To begin select the menu or submenu in the Menu list near the top of the Customize page then select the entry in the Entries list under Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 407 Menu Content Click the Modify button and choose the required action from the drop down list of actions Most of the actions should be self explanatory Begin a group adds a separator line after the highlighted entry Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org This section describes how to create new toolbars and add other icons commands to the list of those available on a toolbar To get to the toolbar customization dialog do any of the following e On the toolbar click the arrow at the end of the toolbar and choose Customize Toolbar e Choose View gt Toolbars gt Customize from the menu bar e Choose Tools gt Customize from the menu bar and pick the Toolbars page Figure 317 Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenOffice org Writer Toolbars Toolbar Content r Modify r modiy 7 iw i a Fit File lt Description Creates a new OpenOffice org document Figure 317 The Toolbars page of the
276. ies in this paragraph For example if there are two different font sizes or font styles A that particular property will remain the same as before 3 In the Styles and Formatting window select the style you want to update single click not double click then long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and click on Update Style Styles and Formatting malal ol al f le Complimentary close New Style from Selection Delault Update Style First line indent Hanging indent Load Styles Heading awry Figure 47 Updating a style from a selection Using AutoUpdate AutoUpdate applies to paragraph and frame styles only If the AutoUpdate option is selected on the Organizer page of the Paragraph Style or Frame Style dialog applying direct formatting to a paragraph or frame using this style in your document automatically updates the style itself 68 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x If you are in the habit of manually overriding styles in your Tip document be sure that AutoUpdate is not enabled Updating styles from a document or template You can update styles by copying or loading them from a template or another document See Copying and moving styles on page 70 Creating new custom styles You may want to add some new styles You can do this in two ways e Creating a new style using the Style dialog e Creating a new style from a selection Creating a new style using
277. if 4086 Bytes 04 11 2006 22 03 ii hi fy Pl as i File name lincoln_creek_rest_photo jpg ka style Graphics File type lt All formats gt bmp dxf emf eps gif jpa jpeg w colar Se Cur SY a nep _ Link Preview Figure 283 Insert picture dialog At the bottom of the dialog are two options Preview and Link Select Preview to view a thumbnail of the selected image on the right so you can verify that you have the correct file See below for the use of Link Linking an image file If the Link option in the Insert picture dialog is selected OOo creates a link to the file containing the image instead of saving a copy of the image in the document The result is that the image is displayed in the document but when the document is saved it contains only a reference to the image file not the image itself The document and the image remain as two separate files and they are merged together only when you open the document again Linking an image has two advantages and one disadvantage e Advantage Linking can reduce the size of the document when it is saved because the image file itself is not included File size is usually not a problem on a modern computer with a reasonable amount of memory unless the document includes many large graphics files OOo can handle quite large files Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontw
278. igning keyboard shortcuts is discussed in Chapter 14 Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 397 Event In OpenOffice org when something happens we say that an event occurred For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved OpenOffice org allows events to cause a macro to be called the macro is then called an event handler Full coverage of event handlers is well beyond the scope of this document but a little knowledge can accomplish much Be careful when you configure an event handler For example assume that you write an event handler that is Caution called every time that a key is pressed but you make a A mistake so the event is not properly handled One possible result is that your event handler will consume all key presses forcing you to forcibly terminate OpenOffice org Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Fvents tab see Figure 311 The events in the Customize dialog are related to the entire application and specific documents Use the Save In box to choose OpenOffice org or a specific document Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Event Assigned Action E Start Application Macro Close Application Create Document Open Document Remove Save Document As Document has been saved as Save Document Document has been saved Clase Document Document is closing Activate Document Deactivate Document Print Document Modified
279. iki http wiki services openoffice org wiki Documentation Information resources and mail lists in your language http projects openoffice org native lang html Support for installing and using OOo on Mac OS X http porting openoffice org mac index html Extensive discussion forum for OpenOffice org issues from setup to advanced programming features http user services openoffice org en forum Andrew Pitonyak the author of OpenOffice org Macros Explained maintains this site which provides extensive documentation on OOo s macro capability Many good referral links are also provided http www pitonyak org oo php Read more about the support options for OOo at http support openoffice org index html Paid support and training Alternatively you can pay for support services Service contracts can be purchased from a vendor or consulting firm specializing in OpenOffice org OOo is supported by Oracle under the Sun Software Support program which includes two levels of support that cover extended business hours or around the clock service for mission critical deployments A list of independent consultants and the services they offer listed alphabetically by region and then by country is provided on the OpenOffice org website 16 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Starting OpenOffice org The most common way to launch any component of OOo is by using the system menu the standard menu from which most a
280. il Web site information Copyright notice Preview Created 26 05 05 Modified 26 05 05 Back ext gt Cancel 7 Choose where to save the file and preview the page if you wish Click Finish 372 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Web Wizard Steps Where do you want to publish your web site Introduction Click Preview to see a preview in your browser Documents Preview Main layout Publish the new web site To a local Folder Layout details C Documents and Settings Jean Hollis weberi DocumentsiMy Websites Style To a ZIP archive Web site information E Preview Publishing via FTP Proxy is not supported Save settings recommended Save as Web Wizard Settings1 To edit or view the document s underlying HTML code click View gt HTML Source or click the HTML Source icon on the Main toolbar Saving Calc spreadsheets as web pages Calc can save files as HTML documents As for Writer use File gt Save As and select HTML Document or File gt Wizards gt Web Page If the file contains more than one sheet the additional sheets will follow one another in the HTML file Links to each sheet will be placed at the top of the document Calc also allows the insertion of links directly into the spreadsheet using the Hyperlink dialog Saving Impress presentations as web pages You can export presentations as Macromedia Flash files select File gt Export and choo
281. indow opens Find and select the extension you want to install and click Open The extension begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 415 4 When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog To get extensions that are listed in the repository you can open Ti the Extension Manager and click the Get more extensions Ip here link You do not need to download them separately as in step 1 above Extension Manager Mix English spelling and hyphenation dictionaries and thesaurus 2009 05 08 ise is French Classic and Reform 1990 spelling thesaurus and hyphen 3 4 1 Dicollecte ise Professional Template Pack II English 1 0 Sun Microsystems The second template pack by Sun Microsystems provides more than 120 professionally designed document spreadsheet presentation and database templates For professional and stunning looking documents and presentations Spanish spelling dictionary 2006 07 01 Temnlate Channer 175 Get more extensions online Figure 322 Using the Extension Manager Not To install a shared extension you need write access to the Tae OpenOffice org installation directory Using extensions This section describes a few of the more important and popular extensions to OpenOffice org In each case you need to first install the extension as described in the previous section PDF Import Enables you
282. ine character Attempting to rename a sheet with an invalid name will produce an error message Note Viewing Calc Using zoom Use the zoom function to change the view to show more or fewer cells in the window For more about zoom see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOfice org Freezing rows and columns Freezing locks a number of rows at the top of a spreadsheet or a number of columns on the left of a spreadsheet or both Then when scrolling around within the sheet any frozen columns and rows remain in view Figure 110 shows some frozen rows and columns The heavier horizontal line between rows 3 and 14 and the heavier vertical line between columns C and H denote the frozen areas Rows 4 through 13 and columns D through G have been scrolled off the page The first three rows and columns remained because are frozen into place Pia lol cE et Lg Eg En Li Li Lo Le J_ ja ies jv satety Poster safety Contract safety Quiz 2 nit Cony Pop Qu Element Quiz 1 Element Quiz 2 p 36 15 amp 16 Chp 1 1 1 7 p 35 F s H Date 10 r n 10 07 10 08 10 RED i eA 10 14 Possible 28 0 i aa Bi 180 26 0 4 0 6 0 Ti 35 io 750 GEUN 26 00 1 00 10011 50 8 00 6 00 0 00 5 00 6 00 360 3 6047 olie 27 00 ETETEN NE TATE TE DET NEZ 9 if 27 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 17 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 50 54 00 9 00 11 28 00 10 am Sun emo AD oon eoo 220 imn PEW 26 00 pon ro e 600 6 00 0 00 3 50 41 00 6 60 28 00 1 00 3 00 6 00
283. ing and editing the macro You can view and edit the macro that was just created Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog see Figure 302 Select the new macro and click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Integrated Development Environment Listing 1 Generated EnterMyname macro Sub Main End Sub sub EnterMyName rem rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 381 dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem dim args1 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args1 end sub The macro in Listing 1 is not as complicated as it first appears Learning a few things helps significantly in understanding the generated macros The discussion starts with features near the top of the macro listing and describes them If you like to avoid details then simply change the text Andrew Pitonyak to what you want to insert at the current cursor position Comments
284. ing objects except text objects 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213 14 15 16 1 Line 5 Line Color 9 To Foreground 13 Alignment 2 Arrow Style 6 Area 10 To Background 14 Change Anchor 3 Line Style 7 Area Style Filling 11 Bring to Front 15 Ungroup 4 Line Width 8 Rotate 12 Send to Back 16 Group Figure 289 Drawing Object Properties toolbar To change the properties for an existing drawing object 1 Select the object 2 Continue as described above You can also specify the position and size rotation and slant and corner radius properties of the drawing object 1 Right click on the drawing object and then click Position and Size from the pop up menu The Position and Size dialog is displayed 2 Choose any properties as required Resizing a drawing object The same considerations for resizing an image apply also to resizing an object Select the object click on one of the eight handles around it 354 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x and drag it to its new position For a scaled resizing select one of the corner handles and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the handle to its new position For more sophisticated control of the size of the object select Format gt Object gt Position and Size from the menu bar Use the Position and Size dialog to set the width and height independently If the Keep ratio option is selected then the two dimensions change so that the proportion is maintained allowing for a sca
285. irst column to contain the numeric value the second column the name and the third column the description The desired work is easily accomplished for every row except for DONTKNOW and NORMAL which do not contain a numeric value but I know that the values are 0 and 100 so I will enter those manually The data can be cleaned in multiple ways all of them easy The first example uses keystrokes that assume the cursor is at the start of the line with the text THIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 Use Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro to start recording Press Ctrl Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name Press Delete to delete the lower case s and then press S to add an upper case S Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the start of the number Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select and move the cursor before the sign Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard Press End to move the cursor to the end of the line Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 385 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the line 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the line 13 Pasting the value also pasted an extra space so press Backspace to remove the extra spac
286. is from a template of the Available for Use Same name If you have created your own ram templates or added templates from other sources slide masters from those templates will also appear in this list Figure 151 Available master pages slides 202 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating slide masters You can create a new slide master in a similar way to modifying the default slide master To start enable editing of slide masters by View gt Master gt Slide Master On the Master View toolbar click the New Master icon A second slide master appears in the Slides pane Modify this slide master to suit your requirements It is also recommended that you rename this new slide master right click on the slide in the Slides pane and select Rename master from the popup menu When you are done close the Master View toolbar to return to normal Slide editing mode Applying a slide master In the Tasks Pane be sure the Master Pages section is showing To apply one of the slide masters to all slides in your presentation click on it in the list To apply a different slide master to one or more selected slides 1 In the Slide Pane select the slides you want to change 2 In the Tasks Pane right click on the slide master you want to apply to the selected slides and click Apply to Selected Slides on the pop up menu Loading additional slide masters Sometimes in the same set of slides you may need
287. ish The sheet tab arrows that appear in Figure 106 only appear if Note you have some sheet tabs that can not be seen Otherwise they will appear faded as in Figure 106 144 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Move to the first sheet Move left one sheet Move right one sheet Move to the last sheet a Pm Sheet tabs HE sheets Sheet Sheet 3 2 Figure 106 Sheet tab arrows 4 Selecting items in a sheet or spreadsheet Selecting cells Cells can be selected in a variety of combinations and quantities Single cell Left click in the cell The result will look like the left side of Figure 104 You can verify your selection by looking in the Name box Range of contiguous cells A range of cells can be selected using the keyboard or the mouse To select a range of cells by dragging the mouse 1 Click in a cell 2 Press and hold down the left mouse button 3 Move the mouse around the screen 4 Once the desired block of cells is highlighted release the left mouse button To select a range of cells without dragging the mouse 1 Click in the cell which is to be one corner of the range of cells 2 Move the mouse to the opposite corner of the range of cells 3 Hold down the Shift key and click To select a range of cells without using the mouse 1 Select the cell that will be one of the corners in the range of cells 2 While holding down the S
288. it Fields Document Type select Format Date 12 31 1999 Dec 31 99 Dec 31 1999 31 Dec 1999 Figure 250 Modifying a date field b Since this is a dynamic report change the Select field from Date fixed to Date c Change the Format to what you desire I use the Friday December 31 1999 choice Click OK Step 2 Change the column widths The column widths can be changed by moving the cursor over the right border of each column so that it becomes a double headed arrow Then drag and drop it to where you want it This has to be done for each column in each table in the report This can also be done with the last column on the right even though there is no black border It should now look something like Figure 251 Figure 251 Realigned columns in a report Step 3 Change the number formatting in the cells The fuel quantity should have three decimal places The Begin End and Distance should have one decimal place Fuel Cost should be Currency and have two decimal places and Cost per mile should have three decimal places 1 Right click the cell below Quantity and select Number format The cell is circled in Figure 251 2 In the Options section Figure 252 a Change the number of Decimal places to 3 b Click the green checkmark Click OK Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 309 Options Decimal places Negative numbers red uh Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code 0 0
289. iterion gt 0 Figure 247 Appearance of query when opened for editing 306 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 1 Add the FuelCost field to the End Reading query a Right click the End Reading query and select Edit from the pop up menu b In the Fuel table list double click to add FuelCost to the bottom table Figure 248 c Save and close the query FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity FuelCost Fuel Fuel Fuel Fuel x x x x gt 0 Figure 248 Adding an additional field to the query 2 Add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query e Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Edit from the pop up menu e Double click the FuelCost field in the End Reading query list to add it to the query table at the bottom 3 Add a calculation field to the right of the FuelCost field e Type the following in a Field cell in the table at the bottom End Reading FuelCost End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer e Type the following in its Alias cell cost per mile If you use the metric system cost per km is the appropriate Note alias 4 Save and close the query 5 Open a new report Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Report Wizard 6 Select fields Move all the fields from the Available fields to the Fields in report list Use the gt gt to do so Click Next 7 Label fields Change FuelCost to Fuel Cost by placing a space between the words Click Next
290. ittle different For example many people put the main Drawing toolbar on the left hand side of the workspace not at the bottom as shown here You can split drawings in Draw over several pages Multipage drawings are used mainly for presentations The Pages pane on the left side of the Draw window in Figure 155 gives an overview of the pages that you create If the Pages pane is not visible on your setup you can enable it from the View menu View gt Page Pane Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 217 F Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Draw k Ea File Edit View Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help LET a 9 wit 12 10 E amp 4 2 2 4 6 B 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 Pages Slide 1 28 26 24 22 20 18 161412108 6 4 2 ict 20 76 29 98 0 00 x 0 00 Slide 1 1 Default B amp 31 Figure 155 Initial Draw window Rulers You should see rulers bars with numbers on the upper and left hand side of the workspace These show the size of a selected object on the page see the gray double lines highlighted in Figure 156 When no object is selected they show the location of the mouse pointer which helps to accurately position drawing Figure 156 Rulers show the objects You can also use the rulers size of the selected object to manage object handles and guide lines making it easier to position objects The page margins in the drawing area are also represented on the rulers Yo
291. ity numbers is one to one only one social security number for each name If you are acquainted with mathematical sets a relational database can easily be explained in terms of sets elements subsets unions and intersections The fields of a database are the elements The tables are subsets Relationships are defined in terms of unions and intersections of the subsets tables To explain how to use a database we will create one for automobile expenses In the process we will be explaining how a database works Planning a database The first step in creating a database is to ask yourself many questions Write them down and leave some space between the questions to later write the answers At least some of the answers should seem obvious after you take some time to think You may have to go through this process a few times before everything becomes clear in your mind and on paper Using a text document for these questions and answers makes it easier to move the questions around add additional questions or change the answers Here are some of the questions and answers I developed before I created a database for automobile expenses I had an idea of what I wanted before I started but as I began asking questions and listing the answers I discovered that I needed additional tables and fields What are the fields going to be My expenses divided into three broad areas fuel purchases maintenance and vacations The annual cost for th
292. ivity suite OOo 3 0 was a major upgrade of an already feature rich office suite and later releases have added more features If you have used previous versions of OpenOffice org you might want to look over the new features lists for 0003 0 O003 1 and OO03 2 OOo s native file format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents OOo can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office OOo includes the following components Writer word processor Writer is a feature rich tool for creating letters books reports newsletters brochures and other documents You can insert graphics and objects from other components into Writer documents Writer can export files to HTML XHTML XML Adobe s Portable Document Format PDF and several versions of Microsoft Word files It also connects to your email client Calc spreadsheet Calc has all of the advanced analysis charting and decision making features expected from a high end spreadsheet It includes over 300 functions for financial statistical and mathematical operations among others The Scenario Manager provides what if analyses Calc generates 2 D and 3 D charts which can be integrated into other OOo documents You can also open and work with Microsoft Excel workbooks and save them in Excel format C
293. ixed in location the other sides and edges move in relation to it as the mouse is dragged make sure that the handle icon is showing before dragging As with rotation you can set the inclination to occur as steps of 15 by pressing the Shift key while moving the handle Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 239 Editing objects To change an object s attributes such as color border width among others you can use the Line and Filling toolbar or the context menu If the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 178 is not visible you can display it using View gt Toolbars gt Line and Filling From here you can edit the most common object attributes You can also open the Line dialog by clicking on the Line a icon and the Area dialog by clicking on the Area amp icon to see more options REE Di wa 0 00em 3 Black a Color Blues mE J mra 7 7 T gt ereer gt 1 2 3 4 s 6 f 8 g 10 1 Styles and Formatting 4 Line Style 7 Area 2 Line 5 Line Width 8 9 Area Style Filling 3 Arrow Style 6 Line Color 10 Shadow Figure 178 Line and Filling toolbar When you select text this toolbar changes to show text formatting options The context menu When an object is selected you can right click on the object to bring up a context menu which provides additional access to
294. ize 321 Formula Elements window 314 formula layout 321 limits to sum integral 322 Index 435 markup 317 matrix markup 323 right click menu 316 event handling 398 export directly as PDF 329 export HTML 56 exporting to PDF 329 extended tips 37 extension Sun Report Builder 311 Extension Manager 78 311 extensions 400 415 extensions and addons sources of 15 F fax icon adding to toolbar 126 411 fax sending 125 FDF 331 fields 205 fields bookmarks 129 cross reference 128 Fields dialog box References tab 129 file locations 43 file sharing options 46 47 Fill Format 66 fill editing 242 Flash export 373 flip an object 243 floating toolbars 22 23 floating window 23 font history 41 ignore settings when importing HTML 56 options 45 preview 41 replacement table 45 replacements 45 sizes for HTML 55 Fontwork alignment 358 anchoring 360 area options 359 attributes 358 character spacing 358 creating an object 356 editing an object 357 Formatting toolbar 358 Gallery 356 grouping 300 line options 359 moving and resizing objects 361 positioning options 360 same letter heights 357 toolbar 355 357 Form Wizard 267 formatting conditional 168 Formatting toolbar 22 formula editor See equation editor 319 formula files opening 429 formula layout 321 Free Software Foundation FSF 427 function key shortcuts 421 G Gallery adding objects 348 copying object into document 347 creating a new theme 350 d
295. ized color palettes in Draw as well as change individual colors to your own taste This is done using the Area dialog reached by choosing Format gt Area or the pouring can icon on the Line and Filling toolbar On the Area dialog choose the tab marked Colors Figure 8 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 221 Area Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Properties Name Blue 8 Add Table standard a E E RGB wy Da GA R Jis amp E i E EHH E M1 G Cii g 2355 FED ie _ EE E fF Figure 162 Changing the color palette To load another palette click on the Load Color List button circled The file selector dialog asks you to choose one of the standard OOo palettes files bearing the file extension soc For example web soc is a color palette that is adapted to creating drawings that are going to appear in Web pages The colors will correctly display on workstations with screens displaying at least 256 colors The color selection box also lets you individually change any color by modifying the numerical values in the fields provided to the right of the color palette You can use the color schemes known as CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black and RGB Red Green Blue Clicking on the Edit button opens a special dialog to allow setting individual colors see Figure 163 Many more input possibilities are available in this dialog In the lower area you ca
296. jects can be positioned to grid points to special snap points and lines to object frames to single object points or to page edges This function is known as Snap In this manner objects can be very accurately positioned in a drawing If you want to use the snap function it is much easier to work with the highest practical zoom value It is possible to use two different snap functions at the same time for example snap to a guide line and to the page edge It is best however to activate only those functions that you really need This section describes the snap to grid function For more information about this and the other snap functions see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Snap to grid Use this function to move an object exactly to a grid point see Figure 165 This function can be switched on and off with View gt Grid gt Snap to Grid and on the Options toolbar with the icon Figure 165 With snap to grid objects_align to the grid precisely 224 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Showing the grid Make the grid visible under View gt Grid gt Display Grid Alternatively turn the grid on and off with the icon on the Options toolbar Configuring the grid The color spacing and resolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axis The spacing between the lines is defined in the Grid options dialog under the Drawing are
297. k HTML HyperText Markup Language Formatted text RTF Unformatted text Figure 69 Paste Special menu 96 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Finding and replacing text and formatting Writer has a Find and Replace feature that automates the process of searching for text inside a document In addition to finding and replacing words and phrases you can e Use wildcards and regular expressions to fine tune a search see the Help for details e Find and replace specific formatting see the Writer Guide e Find and replace paragraph styles see the Writer Guide To display the Find amp Replace dialog Figure 70 use the keyboard Shortcut Control F or choose Edit gt Find amp Replace from the menu bar 1 Type the text you want to find in the Search for box 2 To replace the text with different text type the new text in the Replace with box 3 You can select various options such as matching the case matching whole words only or doing a search for similar words 4 When you have set up your search click Find To replace text click Replace instead Find amp Replace Search for and Find All Replace with E Replace Or Replace All _ Match case Whole words only Less Options Current selection only _ Backwards Format _ Regular expressions _ Similarity search _ Search for Styles Figure 70 Expanded Find amp Replace dialog Chapter 4 Getting Started
298. k and choose Hide To hide or show selected cells choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or right click and choose Format Cells On the Format Cells dialog go to the Cell Protection tab Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Protection L Hide all Cell protection is only effective after the current sheet has been protected Protected L Hide formula Select Protect Document from the Tools menu and specify Sheet Print L Hide when printing The cells selected will be omitted when printing Figure 128 Hiding or showing cells Outline group controls If you are continually hiding and showing the same cells you can simplify the process by creating outline groups which add a set of controls for hiding and showing the cells in the group that are quick to use and always available If the contents of cells falls into a regular pattern such as four cells followed by a total then you can use Data gt Group and Outline gt AutoOutline to have Calc add outline controls based on the pattern Otherwise you can set outline groups manually by selecting the cells for grouping then choosing Data gt Group and Outline gt Group On the Group dialog you can choose whether to group the selected cells by rows or columns Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 169 When you close the dialog the outline group controls are visible between either the row or column headers and the edges
299. k text on white background High Contrast 1 Yellow text on black background High Contrast 2 Green text on black background High Contrast Black White text on black background High Contrast White Black text on white background Open Save dialogs To use the standard Open and Save dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use OpenOffice org dialogs option When this option is selected the Open and Save dialogs supplied with OpenOffice org will be used See Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org for more about the OOo Open and Save dialogs This book uses the OOo Open and Save dialogs in illustrations Document status If this option is selected then the next time you close the document after printing the print date is recorded in the document properties as a Change and you will be prompted to save the document again even if you did not make any other changes Year two digits Specifies how two digit years are interpreted For example if the two digit year is set to 1930 and you enter a date of 1 1 30 or later into your document the date is interpreted as 1 1 1930 or later An earlier date is interpreted as being in the following century that is 1 1 20 is interpreted as 1 1 2020 38 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Memory options In the Options dialog click OpenOffice org gt Memory Some considerations More memory can make OpenOffice org faster and more convenient for example more undo steps requir
300. kmarks as named destinations If you have defined Writer bookmarks Impress or Draw slide names or Calc sheet names this option exports them as named destinations to which Web pages and PDF documents can link Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 333 Convert document references to PDF targets If you have defined links to other documents with OpenDocument extensions such as ODT ODS and ODP this option converts the files names to PDF in the exported PDF document General Initial View User Interface Links Security _ Convert document references to PDF targets _ Export URLs relative to file system Cross document links Default mode Open with PDF reader application Open with Internet browser Figure 275 Links page of PDF Options dialog Export URLs relative to file system If you have defined relative links in a document this option exports those links to the PDF Cross document links Defines the behavior of links clicked in PDF files Security page of PDF Options dialog PDF export includes options to encrypt the PDF so it cannot be opened without a password and apply some digital rights management DRM features e With an open password set the PDF can only be opened with the password Once opened there are no restrictions on what the user can do with the document for example print copy or change it e With a permissions password set the PDF can be opened by anyone but
301. l Select Date from the Fuel table list Click in the cell to the right of this dropdown list This opens a dropdown list for the Vacations table Select Date from the Vacations table list It should now look like Figure 192 Click OK Tables involved Fuel T Vacations T Fields involved Vacations Date Date Figure 192 Selected fields in a relationship Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 265 5 Modifying the Update options and Delete options section of the Relation window a Right click the line connecting the Date fields in the two table lists to open a menu Select Edit to open the Relations dialog Figure 193 b c Select Update cascade d Select Delete cascade e Click OK to close the Relations dialog and choose File gt Save to save the Relation Design window While these options are not strictly necessary they do help Having them selected permits you to update a table that has a relationship defined with another table It also permits you to delete a field from the table Update options No action Update cascade _ J Set null Set default OK Cancel Delete options No action Set null Set default Help Figure 193 Update options and Delete options section 266 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating a database form Databases are used to store data But how is the data put into the database Forms are used to do this In the la
302. l To do this select the Shrink to fit cell size option in the Format Cells dialog Figure 121 Figure Figure 124 shows the results 3 The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog the quickbrows ta jimpe oerte Eeydoq 4 5 Figure 124 Shrinking font size to fit cells Formatting numbers Several number formats can be applied to cells by using icons on the Formatting toolbar Select the cell then click the relevant icon ah Oje Te o Figure 125 Number format icons Left to right currency percentage date exponential standard add decimal place delete decimal place For more control or to select other number formats use the Numbers tab Figure 126 of the Format Cells dialog e Apply any of the data types in the Category list to the data e Control the number of decimal places and leading zeros e Enter a custom format code The Language setting controls the local settings for the different formats such as the date order and the currency marker 164 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Language English UK 1 234 57 Negative numbers red Options AA Decimal places 2 AA Leading zeroes 1 Format code 0 00 RED 0 00 Figure 126 Format Cells gt Numbers Formatting the font To quickly choose the font used in a cell select the cell then click the arrow next to the Font Nam
303. l series Click New The Entries box is cleared Type the series for the new list in the Entries box one entry per line and then click Add Entries Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat ACT a Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd NSW ga Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug S NT January February March April May QLD SA TAS VIC WA Figure 119 Defining a new fill series Using selection lists Selection lists are available only for text and are limited to using only text that has already been entered in the same column To use a selection list select a blank cell and press Ctrl D A drop down list appears of any cell in the same column that either has at least one text character or whose format is defined as Text Click on the entry you require Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 159 Sharing content between sheets You might want to enter the same information in the same cell on multiple sheets for example to set up standard listings for a group of individuals or organizations Instead of entering the list on each sheet individually you can enter it in all the sheets at once To do this select all the sheets Edit gt Sheet gt Select then enter the information in the current one This technique overwrites any information that is already in Caution the cells on the other sheets without any warning For this reason when you are finished be sure to deselect all the A Sheets except the one
304. lable at no cost If you don t want to use Java you can still use nearly all of the features of OOo How can I contribute to OpenOffice org What s the catch You can help with the development of OOo in many ways and you do not need to bea programmer To start check out this webpage http www openoffice org contributing html There really is none you can read the licenses here http www openoffice org license html Appendix B Background Information 433 Index A accepting or rejecting changes 127 accessibility features 420 accessibility options 49 advantages of OpenOffice org 13 antialiasing screen font 40 appearance options 48 Apply Style list 66 area fill editing 242 arranging objects 237 arrow styles customizing 241 arrows 241 Asian language support 58 Asian languages enabled 207 AutoCorrect 61 102 AutoInput 156 AutoLayout 206 automatic changes 156 automatic saving 29 AutoRecovery 29 53 AutoUpdate styles 68 B background images from Gallery 347 Basic 379 bitmaps 247 BitTorrent 14 book preview 120 booklet printing 120 bookmarks 129 borders editing 240 brackets Math 321 bring forward 237 brochure printing 120 bulleted list 209 Bullets and Numbering dialog 210 C Calc macros 390 CD or DVD of OpenOffice org 14 check for updates automatically 51 circle drawing 229 clipboard 41 closing adocument 34 closing OpenOffice org 34 CMYK 222 Color Bar 22
305. lar planning tools are described in Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in OUdCUeGED the Draw Guide x oA V OD o aoad Callouts Use the Callouts icon to open the Callouts toolbar Stars and banners These tools are associated with the Stars icon T Stars and Ban X ae lt gt vy HE fe Ge Eine ge You can add text to all these shapes See Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide for details 234 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Selection modes There are three selection modes moving and changing size rotating and editing points The default mode for selecting objects depends on whether the Points button on the Drawing toolbar is active appears lit or not inactive appears dark or dimmed In standard mode when you begin a new drawing the Points button is not active and the default mode is for selections to be moved or changed in size these selections are indicated by small green squares When the Points button is active the default mode is for selections to be edited these selections are indicated by blue squares Some objects will have one or more extra handles which are larger or colored differently This is explained in more detail in the Draw Guide Selections for rotating objects are indicated by small red circles and a symbol representing the center of rotation To choose these selection
306. lates from and to which you want to copy Double click on the name of the template or document and then double click the Styles icon to show the list of individual styles Figure 50 4 To copy a style hold down the Ctrl key and drag the name of the style from one list to the other Caution If you do not hold down the Control key when dragging the style will be moved from one list to the other The style will A be deleted from the list you are dragging it from 5 Repeat for each style you want to copy If the receiving template or document hasmany styles you may not see any change unless you scroll down in the list When you are finished click Close Template Management My Templates 0207 WG WorkingWithStyles PHE C Drawing Untitled1 J HB Systems Commands C phb C Presentation C Presentation Backgrounds 7 Presentations C US Sizes Address Book Documents _ Selecting Document as source of styles Figure 49 Choosing to copy styles from a document not a template Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 71 Template Management x outline numbering test outline numbering test Close y Styles sample odt AJ OOoEmphasis E Commands AJ OOoComputerCode T Help AJ OOokeyvstroke AJ OOoChaphumber AJ OOoStrongEmphasis EF Default EF OOo able Text EF OOoFooter T OOoCompubercode PA Address Book Documents ka Documents yt File Figure 5
307. ld Type g FuellD Integer INTEGER Date Date DATE p FueiCost FuelQuantity Number NUMERIC Odometer Number NUMERIC PaymentTyp Text VARCHAR 4 Field Properties Entry required No wa Length Decimal places Default value fi Format example 0 00 ma Figure 187 Changing field properties Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 261 Format Alignment Category All a User defined Number Percent Currency Date Time Scientific Options Decimal places Leading zeroes Format Language USD English USA English USA 1 234 00 USD 1 234 00 USD 1 234 1 234 00 1 234 1 234 00 1 234 1 234 57 2 Negative numbers red 1 Thousands separator Figure 188 Field Format options 4 To access additional formatting options click the button to the right of the Format example field 5 Description can be anything or can be left blank 6 To save and close the table choose File gt Save Name the table Fuel Close the Fuel table Follow the same steps to create the Vacations table The fields and their field types are listed in Figure 189 Make sure you make the Date field the primary key before closing Right click the gray box to the left of Date and select Primary key from the menu Save the table and name it Vacations Close the Vacations table FedName Field Type Date Date DATE Odometer Number NUMERIC
308. ld and all the friends and possessions Figure 67 Selecting items that are not next to each other To select nonconsecutive items using the keyboard 1 Select the first piece of text For more information about keyboard selection of text see the topic Navigating and selecting with the keyboard in the Help 2 Press Shift F8 This puts Writer in Add mode The word ADD appears on the status bar 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the start of the next piece of text to be selected Hold down the Shift key and select the next piece of text 4 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text Press Esc to exit from this mode Selecting a vertical block of text You can select a vertical block or column of text that is separated by Spaces or tabs as you might see in text pasted from e mails program listings or other sources using OOo s block selection mode To change to block selection mode use Edit gt Selection Mode gt Block Area or click several times in the status bar on STD until it changes to BLK Pagel 1 Default English USA INSRT Now highlight the selection using mouse or keyboard as shown in Figure 68 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 95 January March April June July September October December Figure 68 Selecting a vertical block of text Cutting copying and pasting text Cutting and copying text in Writer is similar to cut
309. lds from the CD Collection table in the Available fields list a Click Artist and use the gt button to move it to the Fields in the Query list b Move the AlbumTitle and DatePurchased fields in the same manner c Click Next Ti To change the order of the fields select the field you want to Ip move and click the up or down arrow Select the fields columns for your query Tables Available fields Fields in the Query Collection ID CD Collection Artist Format CD Collection AlbumTitle Notes CD Collection DatePurchased Numberoflracks Photo A V Figure 226 First page of the Query Wizard 294 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Step 2 Select the sorting order Up to four fields can be used to sort the information of our query A little simple logic helps at this point Which field is most important In our query the artist is most important The album title is less important and the date purchased is of least importance Of course if we were interested in what music we bought on a given day the date purchased would be the most important sort by a Descending Then by Ascending Descending Figure 227 Sorting order page 1 Click the first Sort by dropdown list e Click CD Collection Artist to select it e To list the artists in alphabetical order a z select Ascending on the right 2 Click the second Sort by dropdown list e Click CD Co
310. led resizing Grouping drawing objects To group drawing objects 1 Select one object then hold down the Shift key and select the others you want to include in the group The bounding box expands to include all the selected objects 2 With the objects selected hover the mouse pointer over one of the objects and choose Format gt Group gt Group from the menu bar or right click and choose Group gt Group from the pop up menu You cannot include an embedded or linked graphic in a group Note with drawing objects Using Fontwork With Fontwork you can create graphical text art objects for making your work more attractive There are many different settings for text art objects line area position size and more so you have a large choice You will surely find one that fits your document Fontwork is available with each component of OOo but you will notice Small differences in the way that each component displays it The Fontwork toolbars You can use two different toolbars for creating and editing a Fontwork object e Go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Y kal 1B 4 Aj Aa Figure 290 The floating Fontwork toolbar Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 355 e Ifyou click on an existing Fontwork object the Formatting toolbar changes to display the Fontwork options as shown in Figure 284 The contents of this toolbar vary depending on the OOo component with which it is being used Creating a F
311. line is extremely important You may already know exactly what some of the slides will contain You may only have a general idea of what you want on some of the slides That is alright You can make some changes as you go Change your outline to match the changes you make in your slides The important part is that you have a general idea of what you want and how to get it Put that information on paper That makes it much easier to create the presentation Using the Presentation Wizard You can start Impress in several ways e From the OOo Welcome screen if no component is open e From the system menu or the OOo Quickstarter Details vary with your operating system see Chapter 1 for more information e From any open component of OOo Click the triangle to the right of the New icon on the main toolbar and select Presentation from Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 193 the drop down menu or choose File gt New gt Presentation from the menu bar When you start Impress the Presentation Wizard appears Figure 146 If you do not want the wizard to start every time you launch Impress select the Do not show this wizard again checkbox You can enable it again later if you need under Tools gt f Options gt OpenOffice org Impress gt General gt Wizard Tip and select the Start with wizard checkbox Leave the Preview checkbox selected so templates slide designs and slide transitions appear in the preview box as you choose
312. linked page in the appropriate program for example the default browser for an HTML page OOo Calc for a ODS file a PDF viewer for a PDF file You can create hotspots of various shapes and include several hotspots in the same image To use the image map editor 1 In your OOo document select the picture where you want to define the hotspots 2 Choose Edit gt ImageMap from the menu bar The ImageMap Editor Figure 287 opens 3 Use the tools and fields in the dialog described on the next page to define the hotspots and links necessary 4 Click the Apply icon to apply the settings 5 When done click the Save icon to save the imagemap to a file then click the X in the upper right corner to close the dialog g ImageMap Editor Ba REg x OeoAuthors Espa ol Portugues l a Mashed Hy Italiano Ao F Romana Aas Nederlands ao http www oooauthors org english 0 00 cm 0 00 cm 15 31 cm x 7 28 cm Figure 287 The dialog to create or edit an image map Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 351 The main part of the dialog shows the image on which the hotspots are defined A hotspot is identified by a line indicating its shape The toolbar at the top of the dialog contains the following tools Apply button click this button to apply the changes Load Save and Select icons Tools for drawing a hotspot shape these tools work in exactly the Same way as the corresponding tools in the Drawin
313. ll appear in your table of contents You can use more levels of headings but the default setting is to use only the first three levels in the table of contents 2 Place the cursor where you want the table of contents to be inserted 3 Choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables 4 Change nothing in the Insert Index Table dialog Click OK If you add or delete text so that headings move to different pages or you add delete or change headings you need to update the table of contents To do this Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 115 1 Place the cursor within the table of contents 2 Right click and choose Update Index Table from the pop up menu If you cannot place your cursor in the table of contents choose Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas section Note You can customize an existing table of contents at any time Right click anywhere init and choose Edit Index Table from the pop up menu Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies of the Writer Guide describes in detail all the customizations you can choose Creating indexes and bibliographies Indexes and bibliographies work in a similar way to tables of contents Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies in the Writer Guide describes the process in detail In addition to alphabetical indexes other t
314. ll as sub menus that is menus that are contained under another menu For example in addition to File Fdit View and so on there is File Send and File Templates The commands available for the selected menu are shown in the central part of the dialog 5 To customize the selected menu click on the Menu or Modify buttons You can also add commands to a menu by clicking on the Add button These actions are described in the following sections Use the up and down arrows next to the Entries list to move the selected menu item to a different position 6 When you have finished making all your changes click OK to save them 404 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Customize Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenOrrice org Writer Menus Menu Menu Content Entries t Reload Save In Openoffice org Writer Description Creates a new OpenOrrice arg document Figure 314 The Menus page of the Customize dialog Creating a new menu In the Customize dialog click New to display the dialog shown in Figure 315 1 Type a name for your new menu in the Menu name box 2 Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the new menu into the required position on the menu bar 3 Click OK to save The new menu now appears on the list of menus in the Customize dialog It will appear on the menu bar itself after you save your customizations After creating a new menu you need to add some commands to it as
315. llaneous options _ Support assistive technology tools program restart required Use text selection cursor in read only text documents Allow animated graphics Allow animated text Help tips disappear after 4 seconds Options for high contrast appearance Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system _ Use automatic font colour for screen display Use system colours for page previews Figure 31 Choosing accessibility options Java options If you install or update a Java Runtime Environment JRE after you install OpenOffice org or if you have more than one JRE installed on your computer you can use the OpenOffice org Java options page Figure 32 to choose the JRE for OOo to use Java options Use a Java runtime environment Java runtime environments JRE already installed Version Features Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 02 Parameters Class Path 4 gt Location C Program Files Java jre1 6 0_02 Figure 32 Choosing a Java runtime environment If you are a system administrator programmer or other person who customizes JRE installations you can use the Parameters and Class Path pages reached from the Java page to specify this information If you do not see anything listed in the middle of the page wait a few minutes while OOo searches for JREs on the hard disk 50 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x If OOo finds one or more JREs it will display them there You can
316. llection ArtistTitle and select Ascending 3 Repeat this process for CD Collection DatePurchased 4 Click Next Step 3 Select the search conditions The search conditions allow us to compare the name we entered with the names of the artist in our database and decide whether to include a particular artist in our query or not e is equal to the same as e is not equal to not the same as e is smaller than comes before e is greater than comes after e is equal or less than the same as or comes before e is equal or greater than the same as or comes after e like similar to in some way These conditions apply to numbers letters using the Note alphabetical order and dates Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 295 1 Since we are only searching for one thing we will use the default setting of Match all of the following 2 We are looking for a particular artist so select CD Collection Artist in the Fields list and is equal to as the Condition 3 Type the name of the artist in the Value box Click Next Step 4 Select type of query We want simple information so the default setting Detailed query is What we want Click Next at the bottom of the window Since we have a simple query the Grouping and Grouping Note conditions are not needed Steps 5 and 6 of the wizard are skipped in our query Step 7 Assign aliases if desired We want the default settings Click Next Step 8 Overview Name the query
317. llection of music you might want to create a table for each type of music you have Rather than creating each table from the wizard you can make copies of the original table naming each according to the type of music contained in it 1 2 3 4 5 6 Click on the Tables icon in the Database pane to see the existing tables Right click on the CD Collection table icon Choose Copy from the pop up menu Move the mouse pointer below this table right click and select Paste The Copy table dialog opens Change the table name to Pop and click Next Click the gt gt button to move all the fields from the left box to the right box and click Next Since all the fields already have the proper Field type no changes Should be needed However this is the time and place to make any changes if they are needed See Caution below for the reason why Click Create The new table is created Once tables have been created using the wizard and data has been entered editing them should be very limited Fields can be added or deleted but adding a field requires taking the time to enter the data for that one field for every record having an entry for that field Caution A Deleting a field deletes all the data once contained in that field Changing the field type of a field can lead to data being lost either partially or completely When creating a new table it pays to create the fields with the correct names length and form
318. llowing you to load your own design e Change slide layout for a group of slides simultaneously This requires using the Layouts section of the Tasks pane 184 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Tasks pane The Tasks pane has five sections Master Pages Here you define the page style for your presentation Impress contains 28 prepackaged Master Pages slide masters One of them Default is blank and the rest have a background Press F11 to open the Styles and Formating window where Tip you can modify the styles used in any slide master to suit your purpose This can be done at any time Layout Twenty prepackaged layouts are shown You can choose the one you want use it as it is or modify it to your own requirements At present it is not possible to create custom layouts Table Design Fleven standard table styles are provided in this pane You can further modify the appearance of a table with the selections to show or hide specific rows and columns or to apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Custom Animation A variety of animations for selected elements of a slide are listed Animation can be added to a slide and it can also be changed or removed later Slide Transition Fifty six transitions are available including No Transition You can select the transition speed slow medium fast You can also choose between an automatic or manual transition and how long you want the selected slide to be s
319. menus by pressing the underlined character together with the Alt key Once the menu is opened you can access menu items by pressing the underlined character key Using shortcut keys in dialogs When you open any dialog one element such as a button an option field an entry in a list box or a checkbox is highlighted or indicated by a dotted box around the field or button name This element is said to have the focus on it If the focal point is a button pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it with the mouse A checkbox is toggled on or off by pressing the spacebar If an option field has the focus use the arrow keys to 420 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x change the activated option field in that area Press the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one or press Shift Tab to go in the reverse direction Press Esc to close the dialog without saving changes or activating any commands Interrupting macros To terminate a macro that is currently running press Shift Ctrl Q Function key shortcuts Shortcut Keys Result Starts the OpenOffice org Help In the OpenOffice org Help jumps to main help page Activates What s This extended tip help for the mouse pointer which turns into a question mark Move the pointer over an item command icon or control to view the extended tip Shift F1 Displays an extended tip for the item command icon or control currently selected by using the keyboa
320. mmands When you create a new toolbar you need to add commands to it 1 On the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog select the toolbar in the Toolbar list and click the Add button in the Toolbar Content section of the dialog Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 409 2 The Add Commands dialog is the same as for adding commands to menus Figure 316 Select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close If you insert an item which does not have an associated icon the toolbar will display the full name of the item the next section describes how to choose an icon for a toolbar command 3 Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence 4 When you are done making changes click OK to save Choosing icons for toolbar commands Toolbar buttons usually have icons not words on them but not all of the commands have associated icons To choose an icon for a command select the command and click Modify gt Change icon On the Change Icon dialog you can scroll through the available icons select one and click OK to assign it to the command Change Icon E oA az Et EA MI go A R J bw ih A Y Y H pE S EG e m gig FSIE S h wo amp H E EA g amp He SE OQVeO a Mote The size of an icon should be 16x16 pixel to ac
321. mn or row to be deleted 2 Right click on the column or row header 3 Select Delete Columns or Delete Rows from the pop up menu 148 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be deleted at once rather than deleting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for deleting a single column or row above Working with sheets Like any other Calc element sheets can be inserted deleted and renamed Inserting new sheets There are several ways to insert a new sheet The first step for all of the methods is to select the sheets that the new sheet will be inserted next to Then any of the following options can be used e Chosse Insert gt Sheet from the menu bar e Right click on the sheet tab and select Insert Sheet e Click in an empty space at the end of the line of sheet tabs see Figure 108 Click here to insert a new sheet Figure 108 Creating a new sheet Fach method will open the Insert Sheet dialog Figure 109 Here you can select whether the new sheet is to go before or after the selected Sheet and how many sheets you want to insert If you are inserting only one sheet there is the opportunity to give the sheet a name Active Sheet FI Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 149
322. mp B FMI Insert as Hyperlink EEES Insert as Link T elas Insert as Copy gt B Tables E ied gt gt Text frames gt Gy Graphics ib OLE objects s Bookmarks gt gt Sections Il 0203W G3 W orkingwithText_JHw_20081 Figure 297 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator When using the Navigator to hyperlink to an object such as a graphic to have the hyperlink show useful text such as Figure 6 you need to give such objects useful names instead of leaving them as the default names Graphics6 or you need to edit the resulting link text using the Hyperlink dialog as described below Chapter 12 Creating WebPages 365 You can also use the Navigator to insert a hyperlink from one document the source to a specific place in another document the target Open the Navigator in the target document and drag the item to the spot in the source document where you want the hyperlink to appear Using the Hyperlink dialog To display the dialog click the Hyperlink icon amp on the Standard toolbar or choose Insert gt Hyperlink from the menu bar To turn existing text into a link highlight it before opening the dialog On the left hand side select one of the four types of hyperlink e Internet a web address normally starting with http e Mail amp News for example an email address e Document the hyperlink points to another document or to another place in the document e New document the h
323. mpany Forename Surname Tnitials Hillier Brook Street Postcode City Country Region Tite Position Tel Home Work Fax E mail Help Figure 18 Filling in user data General options The options on the OpenOffice org General page are described below Help Tips Extended tips Help Agent Reset Help Agent Help formatting Open Save dialogues Use OpenOffice org dialogues Document status _ Printing sets document modified status Year two digits Interpret as years between 1930 S and 2029 Figure 19 Setting general options for OpenOffice org Help Tips When Tips is active one or two words will appear when you hold the mouse pointer over an icon or field without clicking Help Extended tips When Extended tips is active a brief description of the function of a particular icon or menu command or a field on a dialog appears when you hold the mouse pointer over that item Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 37 Help Agent To turn off the Help Agent similar to Microsoft s Office Assistant deselect this option To restore the default behavior click Reset Help Agent Help formatting High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability To display Help in high contrast if your computer s operating system supports this choose one of the high contrast style sheets from the pull down list High contrast style Visual effect Default Blac
324. n languages are enabled in Tools gt Options gt Language Note Settings gt Languages Click on the button in the drawing toolbar to create a vertical text box Note that when editing the contents the text is displayed horizontally Quick font resizing Starting with OO03 1 Impress has convenient buttons on the Formatting toolbar to increase or decrease font size of selected text The amount by which the font size changes depends on the standard sizes available for the font in use Pasting text You can insert text into a text box by copying it from another document and pasting it into Impress However the pasted text will probably not match the formatting of the surrounding text or that of the other slides in the presentation This may be what you want on some occasions however in most cases you want to make sure that the presentation does not become a patchwork of different paragraph styles font types Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 207 bullet points and so on There are several ways to ensure consistency these methods are explained below Pasting unformatted text It is normally good practice to paste text without formatting and apply the formatting later To paste without formatting either press Control Shift V and then select Unformatted text from the dialog that appears or click on the small black triangle next to the paste symbol in the standard toolbar ES and select Unformatted text The unformatted t
325. n t need to share files A master document joins separate text documents into one larger document and unifies the formatting table of contents TOC bibliography index and other tables or lists Yes master documents do work in Writer However until you become familiar with them you may think that master documents are unreliable or difficult to use See Chapter 13 Working with Master Documents in the Writer Guide Creating fill in forms A standard text document displays information a letter report or brochure for example Typically the reader may edit everything or nothing in any way A form has sections that are not to be edited and other sections that are designed for the reader to make changes For example a questionnaire has an introduction and questions which do not change and spaces for the reader to enter answers Forms are used in three ways e To create a simple document for the recipient to complete such as a questionnaire sent out to a group of people who fill it in and return it e To link into a database or data source and allow the user to enter information Someone taking orders might enter the information for each order into a database using a form e To view information held in a database or data source A librarian might call up information about books Writer offers several ways to fill information into a form including check boxes option buttons text boxes pull down lists and spinners See Ch
326. n right up or Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 143 left Depending on the file being used or on the type of data being entered different directions can be useful The Enter key can also be used to switch into and out of editing mode Use the options under Input settings in Figure 105 to change the Enter key settings Input settings Press Enter to move selection Press Enter to switch to edit mode E Expand formatting Expand references when new columns rows are inserted Highlight selection in colurmn row headers Figure 105 Customizing the effect of the Enter key Moving from sheet to sheet Fach sheet in a spreadsheet is independent of the others though they can be linked with references from one sheet to another There are three ways to navigate between different sheets in a spreadsheet Using the keyboard Pressing Control PgDn moves one sheet to the right and pressing Control PgUp moves one sheet to the left Using the mouse Clicking on one of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet selects that sheet If you have a lot of sheets then some of the sheet tabs may be hidden behind the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen If this is the case then the four buttons at the left of the sheet tabs can move the tabs into view Figure 106 shows how to do this Notice that the sheets here are not numbered in order Sheet numbering is arbitrary you can name a sheet as you w
327. n enter values in the RGB and CMYK models as well as in the HSB Hue Saturation and Brightness model The two color fields at lower right show the value of the color as selected left and the new value from the chosen color value fields right For a more detailed description of color palettes and their options see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks in the Draw Guide 222 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x O Cancel om ere Magenta 20 f Red 153 E Hue 210 204 E Saturation 40 Ea Key 0 gi Ble 255 gi Brightness 100 Yellow Color schemes Figure 163 Defining color schemes Options toolbar The Options toolbar lets you activate or deactivate various drawing aids The Options toolbar is not displayed by default To display it select View gt Toolbars gt Options The functions of the various icons are described in Table 2 Options xX fie Beer SSS n AP Figure 164 Options toolbar Table 2 Functions on the Options toolbar Rotation mode after clicking object Display or hide the grid Display or hide the guides Display or hide guides when moving Snap to grid Snap to guides Snap to page margins Snap to object borders Snap to object points Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 223 Function Allow quick editing Select text area only Double click to edit text Simple handles Large handles Positioning objects with snap functions In Draw ob
328. n right click and choose Combine from the pop up menu After you have selected more than one object the Merge Subtract and Intersect functions can be reached in the Modify gt Shapes menu or though the group s right click menu under the heading Shapes 246 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Aids for positioning objects Draw has various tools to help you arrange the objects with respect to each other e Moving an object to the front or to the back e Aligning objects with respect to each other e Distributing the distance and space between objects See Chapter 5 Combining Multiple Objects in the Draw Guide for more information Inserting and editing pictures Draw contains a number of functions for editing raster graphics bitmaps for example photos and scanned images including import and and export as well as conversion from one format to another Draw can read in all the usual range of graphic file formats You can add pictures from several sources e The Gallery see Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork e Directly from a scanner Insert gt Picture gt Scan e Images created by another program including photographs from a digitial camera Insert gt Picture gt From File Draw provides tools for working with bitmap images the Picture toolbar and the bitmap image management palette However it does not have the same capabilities as the specialized raster graphics programs like Adobe P
329. n to the left of Load Save Options Load Save OpenOffice org Load Save General VBA Properties Microsoft Office This is where you define general settings for opening and sa Figure 34 Load Save options General Load Save options Most of the choices on the Load Save General page Figure 35 are familiar to users of other office suites Some items of interest are described below Load Load user specific settings with the document Load printer settings with the document Sawe Edit document properties before saving Always create backup copy Save AutoRecovery information every E l Minutes Sawe URLs relatiwe to file system Save URLs relative to internet Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version 1 2 recommended Size optimization for ODF format Warn when not saving in ODF or default format Document type Always Save as Text document y ODF Text Document y Figure 35 Choosing Load and Save options Load user specific settings with the document When you save a document certain settings are saved with it Some settings printer name data source linked to the document are always loaded with a document whether or not this option is selected If you select this option these document settings are 52 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x overruled by the user specific settings of the person who opens it If you deselect this option the user s personal settings do not overrul
330. nch or German on the Spelling and Grammar dialog e You can add a word to the dictionary Click Add in the Spelling and Grammar dialog and pick the dictionary to add it to e Click the Options button on the Spelling and Grammar dialog to open a dialog similar to the one in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids described in Chapter 2 There you can choose whether to check uppercase words and words with numbers and you can manage custom dictionaries that is add or delete dictionaries and add or delete words in a dictionary e On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can set paragraphs to be checked in a specific language different from the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for more information Writer does not include a grammar checker but you can install an extension such as Language Tool and access it from Tools gt Spelling and Grammar See Chapter 14 for more about installing extensions Language Tool adds a new menu item and submenu to the Tools menu from which you can configure the tool and check or recheck the document Using built in language tools Writer provides some tools that make your work easier if you mix multiple languages within the same document or if you write documents in various languages Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 101 The main advantage of changing the language is that you can then use the correct dictionaries t
331. nd Reading End Reading Fuel Function Figure 236 Typing in calculation of fields 2 Calculate the distance traveled Figure 237 e Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer in the Field cell e Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 299 End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer ol Figure 237 Field for distance traveled calculations 3 Calculate fuel economy Figure 238 Type End Reading Odometer Fuel O0dometer End Reading FuelQuantity in the next column to the right of the word Field Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity lias able SOrt x unction Figure 238 Fuel economy calculation field When entering fields for these calculations you must follow this format table or query name followed by a period follow by the field name For hyphenated or multiple word names table or query use double quotes around the table or query name Note The query will then add the rest of the double quotes as in Figure 230 Use the arithmetical symbol between the two More than one calculation can be done by using parentheses to group the arithmetical operations Step 9 Run the query and make some modification After we run the query to make sure it works correctly we will hide all of the fields that we do not need 1 Click the Run Query icon in the Design Quer
332. nd can be turned off 5 To change the title for the whole document go back to File gt Properties gt Description Fields are covered in detail in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide For more about headers and footers see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages and Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles in the Writer Guide Numbering pages To automatically number pages 1 Insert a header or footer as described in Creating headers and footers on page 111 2 Place the cursor in the header or footer where you want the page number to appear and choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Number Including the total number of pages To include the total number of pages as in page 1 of 12 1 Type the word page and a space then insert the page number as above Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 111 2 Press the spacebar once type the word of and a space then choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Count The Page Count field inserts the total number of pages in the document as shown on the Statistics tab of the document s Properties window File gt Properties If you restart page numbering anywhere in the document then the total page count may not be what you want See Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide for more information Note Restarting page numbering Often you will want to restart the page numbering at 1 for example on the page following a title page or a table of con
333. nd then click Modify Ctrl 9 now appears in the Keys list on the right and List 1 appears next to Ctrl 9 in the Shortcut keys box at the top 7 Make any other required changes and then click OK to save these settings and close the dialog Saving changes to a file Changes to the shortcut key assignments can be saved in a keyboard configuration file for use at a later time thus permitting you to create and apply different configurations as the need arises To save keyboard Shortcuts to a file 1 After making your keyboard shortcut assignments click the Save button on the Customize dialog Figure 321 2 In the Save Keyboard Configuration dialog select All files from the Save as Type list 3 Next enter a name for the keyboard configuration file in the File name box or select an existing file from the list If you need to browse to find a file from another location 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog appears if you are about to overwrite an existing file otherwise there will be no feedback and the file will be saved Loading a saved keyboard configuration To load a saved keyboard configuration file and replace your existing configuration click the Load button on the Customize dialog and then 414 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x select the configuration file from the Load Keyboard Configuration dialog Resetting the shortcut keys To reset all of the keyboard shortcuts to their default values click the Re
334. nderneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to delete 3 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Importing a template If the template that you want to use is in a different location you must import it into an OOo template folder To import a template into a template folder 1 In the Template Management dialog select the folder into which you want to import the template 2 Click the Commands button and choose Import Template from the drop down menu A standard file browser window opens 3 Find and select the template that you want to import and click Open The file browser window closes and the template appears in the selected folder 4 If you want type a new name for the template and then press Enter Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 83 Exporting a template To export a template from a template folder to another location 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to export A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to export 3 Click the Commands button and choose Export Template from the drop down menu The Save As window opens 4 Find the folder into which you want to export the template and click Save Examples of style use The following examples of
335. ne Level Figure 76 Bullets and Numbering toolbar Hyphenating words You have several choices regarding hyphenation let Writer do it automatically using its hyphenation dictionaries insert conditional hyphens manually where necessary or don t hyphenate at all Automatic hyphenation To turn automatic hyphenation of words on or off 1 Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window Figure 77 Styles and Formatting DWOGE A6 Figure 77 Modifying a style 107 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 2 On the Paragraph Styles page of the Styles and Formatting window right click on Default in the list and select Modify 3 On the Paragraph Style dialog go to the Text Flow page see Figure 78 Organizer Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Font Font Effects Position Hyphenation Characters at line end 2 S Characters at line begin H r Maximum number of consecutive hyphens Figure 78 Turning on automatic hyphenation 4 Under Hyphenation select or deselect the Automatically option Click OK to save Turning on hyphenation for the Default paragraph style affects all other paragraph styles that are based on Default You can individually change other styles so that hyphenation is not active for example you might not want headings to be hyphenated Any styles that are not based on Default are not affected Note You can also set hyphenation choices through To
336. ng additional slides on page 198 Slide masters and styles A slide master is a slide that is used as the starting point for other Slides It is similar to a page style in Writer it controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it A slide show can have more than one slide master OOo uses three terms for this one concept Master slide slide master and master page all refer to a slide which is used to create other slides This book uses the term slide master except when describing the user interface Note A slide master has a defined set of characteristics including the background color graphic or gradient objects such as logos decorative lines and other graphics in the background headers and footers placement and size of text frames and the formatting of text All of the characteristics of slide masters are controlled by styles The styles of any new slide you create are inherited from the slide master from which it was created In other words the styles of the slide master are available and applied to all slides created from that slide master Changing a style in a slide master results in changes to all the Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 201 Slides based on that slide master it is however possible to modify each individual slide without affecting the slide master Slide masters have two types of styles associated with them presentation styles and graphic styles The pre packaged presentation
337. ng ignored in a function Numbers can have leading zeros and be regarded as numbers as opposed to text if the cell is formated appropriately Right click on the cell and chose Format Cells gt Numbers Adjust the leading zeros setting to add leading zeros to numbers Tip When using an apostrophe to allow a leading O to be displayed the apostrophe is not visible in the cell after the Enter key is pressed if the apostrophe is a plain apostrophe not a smart quote apostrophe If smart quotes are selected for Note apostrophes the apostrophe remains visible in the cell To choose the type of apostrophe use Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Custom Quotes The selection of the apostrophe type affects both Calc and Writer Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 155 Caution When a number is formatted as text take care that the cell containing the number is not used in a formula because Calc A will ignore the value Entering dates and times Select the cell and type the date or time You can separate the date elements with a slant or a hyphen or use text such as 10 Oct 03 Calc recognizes a variety of date formats You can separate time elements with colons such as 10 43 45 Deactivating automatic changes Calc automatically applies many changes during data input unless you deactivate those changes You can also immediately undo any automatic changes with Ctrl Z AutoCorrect changes Automatic correction of typin
338. ng options for all of OOo This section covers some of the settings that apply to all the components of OpenOffice org For information on settings not discussed here see the online help Click Tools gt Options The list in the left hand box of the Options OpenOffice org dialog varies depending on which component of OOo is open The illustrations in this chapter show the list as it appears when a Writer document is open Click the sign by OpenOffice org on the left hand side A list of pages drops down Selecting an item in the list causes the right hand side of the dialog to display the relevant page Optons OpenOffice org User Data General Memory View Print Paths Colours Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Java Improvement Program Figure 17 OpenOffice org options The Back button has the same effect on all pages of the Note Options dialog It resets the options to the values that were in place when you opened OpenOffice org User Data options Because OOo uses the name or initials stored in the OpenOffice org User Data page for several things including document properties created by and last edited by information and the name of the author of notes and changes you will want to ensure that the correct information appears here Fill in the form shown in Figure 19 or amend or delete any existing incorrect information 36 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Address Co
339. ng spreadsheets charts and other objects in Impress refer to Chapter 7 of the Impress Guide Adding comments to a presentation Starting with OOo 3 2 Impress supports comments formerly called sticky notes similar to those in Writer and Calc In Normal View choose Insert gt Comment from the menu bar A Small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the slide with a larger text box beside it Impress has automatically added your name and the date at the bottom of this text box Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorte This is a comment Jean Hollis Weber Today 04 43 Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 213 Type or paste your comment into the text box You can optionally apply some basic formatting to parts of the text by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu you can also delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the page Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View gt Comments Select Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color
340. nge the text of the linked item although you can change it manually but changed text does automatically update in a cross reference e When using a hyperlink you do not have a choice of the content of the link for example text or page number but when using a cross reference you have several choices including bookmarks e To hyperlink to an object such as a graphic and have the hyperlink show useful text such as Figure 6 you need to either give such an object a useful name instead of leaving it as the default name Graphics6 or you need to use the Hyperlink dialog to modify the visible text In contrast cross references to figures with captions automatically show useful text and you have a choice of several variations of the name e If you save a Writer document to HTML hyperlinks remain active but cross references do not Both remain active when the document is exported to PDF Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 127 Using hyperlinks The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 Open the document containing the items you want to cross reference 2 Open the Navigator by clicking its icon choosing View gt Navigator or pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink See Figure 93 4 In the list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference
341. nguage of databases a form is a front end for data entry and editing Thursday April 12 2007 Fuel Purchases FuelQuanity Paymently pe Figure 194 Fields of a simple Figure 195 Simple form with form additions A simple form consists of the fields from a table Figure 194 More complex forms can contain much more including additional text graphics selection boxes and many other elements Figure 195 is made from the same table with a text label Fuel Purchases a list box placed in PaymentType and a graphic background Using the Wizard to create a form We will use the Form Wizard to create a Vacations form which will contain a form and a subform In the main database window Figure 183 click the Forms icon in the left column In the Tasks list double click Use Wizard to Create Form to open the Form Wizard Figure 196 Simple forms require only some of these steps while more complex forms may use all of them Step 1 Select fields 1 Under Tables or queries select Table Vacations Available fields lists the fields for the Vacations table 2 Click the right double arrow to move all of these fields to the Fields in the form list Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 267 Select the fields of your form Tables or queries Table Vacations F Available fields Fields in the form Date Odometer Breakfast Lunch Supper Motel Tolls BPayment LPayment E Figure 19
342. ning the template that you want to set as the default then select the template 3 Click the Commands button and choose Set As Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from this template Although many important settings can be changed in the Options dialog see Chapter 2 for example default fonts and page size more advanced settings such as page margins can only be changed by replacing the default template with a new one Resetting the default template To re enable OOo s Default template for a document type as the default 1 In the Template Management dialog click any folder in the box on the left 2 Click the Commands button and choose Reset Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from OOo s Default template for that document type Associating a document with a different template At times you might want to associate a document with a different template or perhaps you re working with a document that did not start from a template One of the major advantages of using templates is the ease of updating styles in more than one document as described on page 77 If you update styles by loading a new set of styles from a different template as described on page 72 the document has no association with the 80 Getting Star
343. nt place the cursor where you want the cross reference to appear 2 If the Fields dialog is not open click Insert gt Cross reference On the Cross references tab in the Type list select the type of item to be referenced for example Heading or Figure Document Cross references Functions Docinforrnation Variables Database Type selection set Reference Preface Insert Reference Why use OpenOffice org Headings What do you need to do first Numbered Paragraphs Other sources of information Table Acknowledgments ChapterNumber 1 Introduction to Writer Figure The Writer workspace Bookmarks Toolbars Footnotes Mites r E r E a a ae Insert reference to Page l Introduction to Writer Chapter Reference Above Below As Page Style ooo OE Number Number no context Number full context Figure 94 The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog You can leave this page open while you insert many cross references 3 Click on the required item in the Selection list which shows all the items of the selected type In the Format list choose the format required Usually this will be Reference to insert the full text of the heading or caption Category and Number to insert the word Figure or Table and its number but without the caption text Numbering to insert only the figure or table number without the word Figure or Table or Page to insert the number of the page the referenced text is on
344. nt the envelope 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog under Print range choose Pages and type 1 in the box Click OK to print Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 123 Printing labels Labels are commonly used for printing address lists where each label Shows a different address but they can also be used for making multiple copies of one label only for example return address stickers To print labels 1 Choose File gt New gt Labels on the menu bar The Labels dialog opens 2 On the Labels page fill in your own label text in the Inscription box or use the Database and Table drop down lists to choose the required information as described in Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide Labels Format Options Inscription Label text _ Address Database Table Database Field Format C Continuous Sheet User 3 94 x 3 94 1 x 1 Figure 90 Labels dialog Labels page 3 Select the label stock in the Brand drop down list The types for that brand then appear in the Type drop down list Select the size and type of labels required You can also select User in the Type drop down list and then make specific selections on the Format page 4 On the Format page Figure 91 choose the pitch sizes margins columns and rows for user defined labels or just verify with a brand of label stock you have loaded into the printer 124 Getting Started with OpenOff
345. ntainers whereas the Standard library cannot OpenOffice org allows you to import libraries into a library Caution container but it will not allow you to overwrite the library named Standard Therefore if you store your macros in the Ay Standard library you cannot import them into another library container Just as it makes good sense to give your libraries meaningful names it is prudent to use meaningful names for your modules By default OpenOffice org uses names such as Modulel1 Feel free to use your own meaningful name As you create your macros you must decide where to store them Storing a macro in a document is useful if the document will be shared and you want the macro to be included with the document Macros stored in the application library container named My Macros however are globally available to all documents Macros are not available until the library that contains them is loaded The Standard library and Template library however are automatically loaded A loaded library is displayed differently from a library that is not loaded To load the library and the modules it contains double click on the library Where are macros stored OpenOffice org stores user specific data in a directory under the user s home directory For example on Windows this is C Documents and Settings lt name gt Application Data User macros are stored in OpenOffice org2 user basic Each library is stored in its own directory of
346. nter changes to a hand symbol the image refers to a hyperlink In this case press the Alt key while you click the image to select it without activating the link If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol you can simply click the image to select it 4 Once the image is selected evident from the green selection handles around it release the mouse button Click again on the image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds Without releasing the mouse button drag the image into the document 5 Release the mouse button Deleting images from the Gallery To delete an image from a theme that you created 1 Right click on the name of the image file or its thumbnail in the Gallery 2 Click Delete on the pop up menu A message appears asking if you want to delete this object Click Yes Deleting the name of a file from the list in the Gallery does not Note delete the file from the hard disk or other location Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 349 Adding a new theme to the Gallery To add a new theme to the Gallery 1 Click the New Theme button above the list of themes Figure 285 2 In the Properties of New Theme dialog click the General tab and type a name for the new theme 3 Click the Files tab and add images to the theme as described earlier Deleting a theme from the Gallery You can delete only theme that you have added to the Gallery you cannot delete any of the inbuilt
347. nts of the list start with different letters typing the first letter selects the desired entry e If two or more elements of the list have the same first letter repeated typing of the first letter will cycle through the elements with this same first letter e When the selection is correct use the Tab key to go to the Misc field The rest of the fields of the main form are either numerical fields or dropdown lists until we reach the Misc Notes field It is a text field Type anything you desire in this field just as you would any simple text editor Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 291 Since the Tab key is used to move between fields it can not be used in a text field All spacing must be done by the spacebar Finally the Enter key only acts as a line break to move the cursor to the next line While the Enter key will move from non Note text fields to non text fields it will not do so from a text field Use the Tab key instead If we did not have a subform for fuel data pressing the Tab key in the last field would save all of the fields clear them and make the form ready to accept data on the second record Since we have a subform form using the Tab key places the cursor in the first Date field of the subform with the date automatically entered to match the Date field of the main form The FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer fields are numerical fields The Payment field is a dropdown list Enter the data just as you d
348. o check spelling and apply the localized versions of Autocorrect replacement tables thesaurus and hyphenation rules You can also set the language for a paragraph or a group of characters as None This option is especially useful when you insert text such as web addresses or programming language snippets that you do not want to check for spelling Specifying the language in character and paragraph styles is the preferred method because styles allow a greater level of control and make changing the language much faster On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can specify that certain paragraphs be checked in a language that is different from the language of the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles for information on how to manage the language settings of a style However starting with OpenOffice org 3 0 you can set the language for the whole document for individual paragraphs or even for individual words and characters all from Tools gt Language on the menu bar Another way to change the language of a whole document is to use Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages In the Default languages for documents section of the Options dialog you can choose a different language for all the text The spelling checker works only for those languages in the list that have the symbol next to them If you do not see the symbol next to your preferred language you can install the additional diction
349. odify a table in Writer adding and deleting rows and columns adjusting width and spacing adding borders background colors and so on Detailed information on working with tables and the Table Properties dialog can be found in Chapter 9 of the Writer Guide By modifying the style of the table from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane you can quickly change the appearance of the table or any newly created tables based on the Style options you select You can choose to add emphasis to a header and total row as well as the first and last columns of the table and apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Having completed the table design entering data into the cells is similar to working with text box objects Click in the cell you wish to add data to and begin typing To move around cells quickly use the following key options e The arrow keys move the cursor to the next table cell if the cell is empty otherwise they move the cursor to the next character in the cell e The Tab key moves to the next cell skipping over the contents of the cell Shift Tab move backwards in this manner Adding graphics spreadsheets charts and other objects Graphics in Impress are handled much the same as graphics in Draw For more information see Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw the Draw Guide or Chapters 4 5 and 6 in the Impress Guide Spreadsheets embedded in Impress include most of the functionality of spreadsheets in Cal
350. olbars can be displayed or hidden by clicking View gt Toolbars and selecting from the menu You can also select the icons that you wish to appear on each toolbar For more information refer to Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org Many of the toolbars in Impress are similar to the toolbars in OOo Draw Refer to the Draw Guide for details on the functions available and how to use them Status bar The Status bar Figures 138 and 139 is located at the bottom of the workspace In addition to fields common to several OOo components it includes several Impress specific fields For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Impress in the Impress Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the ruler units This unit is defined in Tools gt Note Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General where you can also change the scale of the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the status bar 186 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Rectangle selected co 1 56 463 495x 2590 i Information Position Unsaved Digital changes signature Figure 158 Left end of the Impress status bar Slide 1 1 Layout Default oe amp 75 i Slide Page Zoom slider Zoom number style percent Figure 139 Right end of Impress status bar Navigator The Navigator Figure 14
351. ols gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids In Options near the bottom of the dialog scroll down to the find the hyphenation settings Figure 79 Characters before line break 2 Characters after line break 2 E Hyphenate without inquiry Ie Hyphenate special regions Figure 79 Setting hyphenation options To change the minimal number of characters for hyphenation the minimum number of characters before a line break or the minimum number of characters after a line break select the item and then click the Edit button in the Options section Hyphenation options set on the Writing Aids dialog are effective only if hyphenation is turned on through paragraph styles 108 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Manual hyphenation To manually hyphenate words do not use a normal hyphen which will remain visible even if the word is no longer at the end of a line when you add or delete text or change margins or font size Instead use a conditional hyphen which is visible only when required To insert a conditional hyphen inside a word click where you want the hyphen to appear and press Control hyphen The word will be hyphenated at this position when it is at the end of the line even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off Formatting pages Writer provides several ways for you to control page layouts page styles columns frames tables and sections For m
352. ome locale and language settings e Choose spelling options Install the required dictionaries OOo3 automatically installs several dictionaries with the program To add other dictionaries be sure you are connected to the Internet and then use Tools gt Language gt More Dictionaries Online OOo will open your default web browser to a page containing links to additional dictionaries that you can install Follow the prompts to select and install the ones you want Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 57 Change locale and language settings You can change some details of the locale and language settings that OOo uses for all documents or for specific documents In the Options dialog click Language Settings gt Languages Options Language Settings OpenOffice org Load Save 4 E S El Language Selinas CAN Language Settings Languages Writing Aids OpenOffice org Writer This is where you make settings concerning language and w OpenOffice org Writer Aeb OpenOffice org Figure 39 Language Setting Options On the right hand side of the Language Settings Languages page Figure 40 change the User interface Locale setting Default currency and Default languages for documents as required In the example English UK has been chosen for all the appropriate settings If you want the language dictionary setting to apply to the current document only instead of being the default for all new documents select the
353. on the text box will expand if needed as you type 3 Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode gray hashed border with green resizing handles shown in Figure 152 4 Type or paste your text in the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it 206 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Dee EEE EE E ERP TA Al Click and drag to draw a box for the text on Jao o ethe slide Do not worry about the vertical size T eae Zand position the text box will expandif needed as you type To change the horizontal Hjt size see Resizing a text box to reposition the text box to a different part of the slide see Moving a text box a ER 2 e a z 7 a E rE n R EA a a ro DS WS E ke fi HS Ht h ri Co ro ot s pa m J r a zedit mode gray hashed border with green vesizing handles Sa 3 Type or paste your text in the text box z 24 Click outside the text box to de select it E E E eee w a SSSR RE ea ET Figure 152 Selected text box showing the green resizing handles and text toolbar You can move resize and delete text boxes For more information see Chapter 3 in the Impress Guide In addition to the normal text boxes where text is horizontally aligned it is possible to insert text boxes where the text is aligned vertically This choice is available only when Asia
354. on a table are in the Tasks list see Figure 183 Using the Wizard to create a table Wizards are designed to do the basic work Sometimes this is not sufficient for what we want in those cases we can use a wizard as a starting point and then build upon what it produces The Table Wizard in Base contains two categories of suggested tables business and personal Each category contains sample tables from which to choose Each table has a list of available fields We can delete some of these fields and add other fields A field in a table is one bit of information For example a price list table might have one field for item name one for the description and a third for the price Since none of the fields we need for our Automobile database are contained in any of the sample wizard tables we will create a simple table using the wizard that has nothing to do with our database This section is an exercise in explaining how the Wizard works The Wizard permits the fields of the table to come from more than one suggested table We will create a table with fields from three different suggested tables in the Wizard Every table requires a Primary key field What this field does will be explained later We will use this field to number our A entries and want that number to automatically increase as we add each entry Caution Click Use Wizard to Create Table This opens the Table Wizard Figure 184 Chapter 8 Getting Starte
355. on dialog select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet As soon as you select a theme some of the properties of the custom styles are applied to the open spreadsheet and are immediately visible 3 Click OK If you wish you can now go to the Styles and Formatting window to modify specific styles These modifications do not change the theme they only change the appearance of this spreadsheet document Using conditional formatting You can set up cell formats to change depending on conditions that you specify For example in a table of numbers you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red Conditional formatting depends upon the use of styles and the AutoCalculate feature Tools gt Cell Contents gt AutoCalculate must be enabled See Chapter 2 in the Calc Guide for details 168 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Hiding and showing data When elements are hidden they are neither visible nor printed but can still be selected for copying if you select the elements around them For example if column B is hidden it is copied when you select columns A and C When you need a hidden element again you can reverse the process and show the element To hide or show sheets rows and columns use the options on the Format menu or the right click context menu For example to hide a row first select the row and then choose Format gt Row gt Hide or right clic
356. only the current slide The Presenter Console displays the elements in three easily changeable views e The first view displays the current slide including the effects and the upcoming slide e The second view shows the speaker s notes in large clear and scalable type plus the current and upcoming slide e The third view is a slide sorter view with the slide thumbnails From Sun Microsystems Open source The Presenter Console works only on an operating system that Note Supports multiple displays Report Builder Creates stylish complex database reports from Base You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields Export your reports into PDF or OpenDocument formats or Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 417 send them as email attachments From Sun Microsystems Open source Professional Template Pack II Provides more than 120 templates for Writer Calc and Impress Available in several languages After you have installed this extension you will find the templates under File gt New gt Templates and Documents From Sun Microsystems Freeware Template Changer Adds two new items to the File gt Templates menu in Writer that allow you to assign a new template to the current document or to a folder of documents All styles and formatting will be loaded from that template and the document will behave as it was created using that template Open source 418 Getting Start
357. ons 224 Snap to grid 224 Solaris system requirements 14 sort order database fields 295 Special characters 103 spelling checker 101 spelling options 59 Spreadsheet using as data source 284 Spreadsheets opening 428 saving 430 Saving as CSV 140 Standard toolbar 22 StarBasic 379 starting anew document 27 starting OpenOffice org 17 Status Bar Draw 186 219 Style dialog 68 69 Styles 242 Apply Style list 66 assigning to shortcut keys 413 AutoUpdate 68 changing using Style dialog 68 creating by dragging and dropping 70 creating from selection 69 creating new 69 creating using Style dialog 69 custom 69 deleting 73 description 63 201 Fill Format 66 formatting text 208 graphic styles 202 linking 69 loading from template or document 72 modifying 67 presentation styles 202 types supported 63 updating from a selection 68 Styles and Formatting window 65 SUB 382 Subroutines 390 Subroutines in macros 382 sun Microsystems 425 Sun Report Builder 311 Support 15 system font user interface 40 T Table Wizard database 255 Tasks pane Impress 185 tear off toolbars 22 template createdocument from 73 440 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x create from document 75 create using wizard 76 deleting 83 description 63 editing 77 exporting 84 Extension Manager 78 folders 82 update document styles from 77 Template Changer extension 418 Template Management dialog 71 templates importing 83 text bulleted or numbe
358. ontents displayed in the Gallery window You can display the Gallery in Icon View Figure 285 or Detailed View and you can hide or show the Gallery by clicking on the Hide button similar to the Hide button for the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window when they are docked By default the Gallery is docked above the workspace To expand the Gallery position the pointer over the line that divides it from the top of the workspace When the pointer changes to parallel lines with arrows click and drag downward The workspace resizes in response As for other docked windows you can float the Gallery by moving the mouse pointer over an edge of the Gallery window holding down the Control key and double clicking Repeat this procedure to dock the Gallery again 346 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Co Backgrounds oa Bullets D Homepage a My Theme Ej Rulers B Sounds Control double click here to float Click to hide or show Gallery Figure 285 Icon view of one theme in the Gallery Inserting images into a document You can copy or link an object from the Gallery into a document To insert an object 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Standard toolbar 2 Select a theme 3 Select an object with a single click 4 Drag and drop the image into the document See Figure 286 You can also right click on the object and choos
359. ontwork object 1 On the Drawing or Fontwork toolbar click the Fontwork Gallery icon If the Drawing toolbar is not visible go to View gt Toolbars gt Drawing to display it 2 In the Fontwork Gallery Figure 291 select a Fontwork style then click OK The Fontwork object will appear in your document Notice the blue squares around the edge indicating that the object is selected and the yellow dot these are discussed in Moving and resizing Fontwork objects on page 361 Fontwork Gallery Select a Fontwork style Pomc rontwork pet Fonok w Figure 291 The Fontwork Gallery 3 Double click the object to edit the Fontwork text Type your own text in place of the black Fontwork text that appears over the object Figure 292 356 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Figure 292 Editing Fontwork text 4 Click anywhere in a free space or press Fsc to apply your changes Editing a Fontwork object Now that the Fontwork object is created you can edit some of its attributes To do this you can use the Fontwork toolbar the Formatting toolbar or menu options as described in this section If the selected Fontwork object is a 3D object you can also use the 3D Settings toolbar Using the Fontwork toolbar Make sure that the Fontwork toolbar shown in Figure 290 is visible If you do not see it go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Click on the differ
360. oolbar Figure 288 The mouse pointer changes to a drawing functions pointer 3 Move the cross hair pointer to the place in the document where you want the graphic to appear and then click and drag to create the drawing object Release the mouse button The selected drawing function remains active so you can draw another object of the same type 4 To cancel the selected drawing function press the Esc key or click on the Select icon the arrow on the Drawing toolbar Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 353 5 You can now change the properties fill color line type and weight anchoring and others of the drawing object using either the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 289 or the choices and dialogs reached by right clicking on the drawing object Set or change properties for drawing objects To set the properties for a drawing object before you draw it 1 On the Drawing toolbar Figure 288 click the Select tool 2 On the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 289 click on the icon for each property and select the value you want for that property 3 For more control or to define new attributes you can click on the Area or Line icons on the toolbar to display detailed dialogs The default you set applies to the current document and session It is not retained when you close the document or close Writer and it does not apply to any other document you open The defaults apply to all the draw
361. open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxi and sti and the following presentation formats Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt pps and pot Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 pptx pptm potx potm StarDraw and StarImpress sda sdd sdp and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop uof CGM Computer Graphics Metafile cgm Portable Document Format pdf Opening graphic files In addition to OpenDocument formats odg and otg Draw 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxd and std and the following graphic formats BMP JPEG JPG PCX PSD SGV WMF DXF MET PGM RAS SVM XBM EMF PBM PLT SDA TGA XPM EPS PCD PNG SDD TIF TIFF GIF PCT PPM SGF VOR Opening formula files In addition to OpenDocument Formula odf files Math 3 can open the format used by OOo 1 x sxm StarMath smf and MathML mml files When opening a Word document that contains an embedded equation editor object if the option for it is checked in Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt Microsoft Office the object will be automatically converted to an OpenOffice org Math object File formats OOo can save to Saving in an OpenDocument format guarantees the correct rendering of the file when it is transferred to another person or when the file is re opened with a later version of OpenOffice org It is strongly recommended that you use ODF as default file format However you can save files in other formats if you wish Appendix B Backgr
362. opened in OpenOffice org Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP Load Basic code Save original Basic code Microsoft Excel 97 2000 P Load Basic code _ Executable code Save original Basic code Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Load Basic code Save original Basic Figure 36 Choosing Load Save VBA Properties e If you choose Save original Basic code the macros will not work in OOo but are retained if you save the file into Microsoft Office format e If you choose Load Basic code to edit the changed code is Saved in an OOo document but is not retained if you save into a Microsoft Office format e Ifyou are importing a Microsoft Excel file containing VBA code you can select the option Executable code Whereas normally the code is preserved but rendered inactive if you inspect it with the StarBasic IDE you will notice that it is all commented with this option the code is ready to be executed 54 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Microsoft Office Load Save options On the Load Save Microsoft Office page Figure 37 you can choose what to do when importing and exporting Microsoft Office OLE objects linked or embedded objects or documents such as spreadsheets or equations Select the L options to convert Microsoft OLE objects into the corresponding OpenOffice org OLE objects when a Microsoft document is loaded into OOo mnemonic L for load Select the S options to convert OpenOffice org OLE objects into the
363. option in Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General Relative linking is only possible when the document you are working on and the link destination are on the same drive and you need to create the same directory structure on your hard disk as will apply on the destination website OOo uses absolute path names internally so when you move your mouse cursor over a hyperlink the tooltip displays the absolute reference even when it is set to be a relative link Note 364 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x You can also insert hyperlinks using the Navigator and the Hyperlink dialog and you can modify all hyperlinks using the Hyperlink dialog as described in this section Using the Navigator The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 Open the documents containing the items you want to cross reference 2 Open the Navigator by clicking its icon choosing View gt Navigator or pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink See Figure 297 4 In the list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference 5 In the Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink o 2 5 len a
364. option labelled For the current document only Language of User interface English UK v Locale setting English UK st Decimal separator key Same as locale setting Default currency GBP English UK lw Default languages for documents Western E English UK w ee PC _ For the current document only Enhanced language support _ Enabled for Asian languages _ Enabled for complex text layout CTL Figure 40 Choosing language options If necessary select the options to enable support for Asian languages Chinese Japanese Korean and support for CTL complex text layout languages such as Hindi Thai Hebrew and Arabic If you choose either of these options the next time you open this dialog you will see some extra choices under Language Settings as shown in Figure 41 These choices Searching in Japanese Asian Layout and Complex Text Layout are not discussed here 58 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Options Language Settings OpenOffice org 4 A _ Language Settings Languages Writing Aids Searching in Japanese This is where you make settings concerning language and writin Asian Layout OpenOffice org Complex Text Layout Figure 41 Extra pages available when enhanced language support options are selected Choose spelling options To choo
365. ore information see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Page layout is usually easier if you show text object table and section boundaries in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt Tip Appearance and paragraph ends tabs breaks and other items in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt Formatting Aids Which layout method to choose The best layout method varies depending on what the final document Should look like and what sort of information will be in the document Here are some examples For a book similar to this user guide with one column of text some figures without text beside them and some other figures with descriptive text use page styles for basic layout and tables to place figures beside descriptive text when necessary Items formatted as a table Wheat dom Conor grclodeT Shen gens m TTia nia aiaia ahiri Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 109 For an index or other document with two columns of text where the text continues from the left hand column to the right hand column and then to the next page all in sequence also known as snaking columns of text use page styles with two columns If the title of the document on the first page is full page width put it in a single column section For a newsletter with complex layout two or three columns on the page and f ine Trst page some articles that continue from one only page
366. org is both a product and an open source project If you are new to OOo its open source development and the community that produces and supports it you should read this appendix A short history of OpenOffice org The OpenOffice org project began when Sun Microsystems released the source code blueprints for its StarOffice software to the open source community on October 13 2000 This allowed Sun to use the technical expertise and rapid development times of an open source project in the development of its own software products All recent versions of Sun s StarOffice use source code developed by the OpenOffice org community However the products do not provide exactly the same features due to the copyrights of third parties that are not compatible with open source licensing OpenOffice org 1 0 the product was released on April 30 2002 Read more about OpenOffice org s history and organization at http about openoffice org Information about StarOffice can be found at http www sun com software star staroffice The OpenOffice org community OpenOffice org s Mission Statement is To create as a community the leading international office suite that will run on all major platforms and provide access to all functionality and data through open component based APIs and an XML based file format The OpenOffice org project is primarily sponsored by Sun Microsystems which is the primary contributor of code to th
367. ork 343 e Advantage You can modify the image file separately without changing the document because the link to the file remains valid and the modified image will appear when you next open the document This can be a big advantage if you or someone else perhaps a graphic artist is updating images e Disadvantage If you send the document to someone else or move it to a different computer you must also send the image files or the receiver will not be able to see the linked images You need to keep track of the location of the images and make sure the recipient knows where to put them on another machine so the document can find them For example you might keep images in a subfolder named Images under the folder containing the document the recipient of the file needs to put the images in a subfolder with the same name under the folder containing the document When inserting the same image several times in the document it would appear beneficial to create links however this is not necessary as OOo embeds in the document only one copy of the image file Note Embedding linked images If you originally linked the images you can easily embed one or more of them later if you wish To do so 1 Open the document in OpenOffice org and choose Edit gt Links 2 The Edit Links dialog Figure 283 shows all the linked files In the Source file list select the files you want to change from linked to embedded 3 Click the Break
368. other items on the list sequentially repeating from the top of the list when they reach the end of the list Fill Series x Direction Series type a OK Down J Linear _ C Up I Date Help AutoFill Start value January Figure 116 Specifying the start of a fill series result is in Figure 115 A l1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 selection shown in Figure 116 You can also use Edit gt Fill gt Series to create a one time fill series for numbers by entering the start and end values and the increment For example if you entered start and end values of 1 and 7 with an increment of 2 you would get the sequence of 1 3 5 7 In all these cases the Fill tool creates only a momentary connection between the cells Once they are filled the cells have no further connection with one another 158 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Defining a fill series To define a fill series go to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt Sort Lists This dialog shows the previously defined series in the Lists box on the left and the contents of the highlighted list in the Entries box Lists Entries merena me er aerar f Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd Mon E Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug S Tue January February March April May Wed Thu Sat Figure 118 Predefined fil
369. ou choose any of the connectors under the Connectors icon on the Drawing toolbar and then move the mouse pointer over the object Most objects have four gluepoints as shown in Figure 174 You can add more gluepoints and customize gluepoints using the toolbar under the Gluepoint icon 4 on the Drawing toolbar ee E ee ee ee ee k Figure 174 Four gluepoints Gluepoints are different from handles the small blue or green squares around an object Use the handles to move or resize an object use the gluepoints to attach connectors to an object Connectors are a type of line or arrow whose ends dock to glue points on other objects When you move the other object the connector moves with it Connectors are particularly useful for making organizational charts You can reorganize the blocks of your chart and all the connected objects stay connected 232 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Figure 175 shows two Draw objects and a connector Figure 175 A connector between two objects Draw has a range of advanced connector functions You can change connector types by opening the floating Connectors toolbar click on the Connector icon and modify various attributes of a selected connector by right clicking and choosing Connector from the pop up menu For more about connectors and gluepoints see Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Drawing geometric
370. ough the Impress environment while designing the easier presentations Although more difficult designs are mentioned throughout this chapter explanations for creating them are in the Impress Guide If you have a working knowledge of how to create slide Shows we recommend you use the Impress Guide for your source of information To use Impress for more than very simple slide shows requires some knowledge of the elements which the slides contain Slides containing text use styles to determine the appearance of that text Slides containing objects are created the same way that drawings are created in Draw For this reason we recommend that you also study Chapter 3 Working with Templates and Styles and Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw Parts of the main Impress window The main Impress window Figure 137 has three parts the Slides pane Workspace and Tasks pane Additionally several toolbars can be displayed or hidden during the creation of a presentation You can remove the Slides pane or Tasks pane from view by clicking the X in the upper right corner You can also show or hide these panes using View gt Slide Pane or View gt Tasks Pane Tip Slides pane The Slides pane contains thumbnail pictures of the slides in your presentation in the order they will be shown unless you change the order Clicking a slide selects it and places it in the Workspace While it is there you can apply any changes desired to that particular
371. ound Information 429 When sharing a document that you do not expect or want the recipient to modify the safest option is to convert the document to PDF OOo provides a very straightforward way to convert documents to PDF Tip Saving text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt and ott Writer 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document sxw OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 6 0 95 and 97 2000 XP doc Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 sdw StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 Template vor Text txt Text Encoded txt Unified Office Format text uot uof HTML Document OpenOffice org Writer html and htm DocBook xml AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw Encryption support within the Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP filter allows password protected Microsoft Word documents to be saved The rtf format is a common format for transferring text files between applications but you are likely to experience loss of formatting and images For this reason other formats should be used Note Saving spreadsheet files In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet sxc OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet Template stc Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP Template xlt Microsoft Excel 5 0 and 95
372. p of the docked window Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar You can also add icons and create new toolbars as described in Chapter 14 To access a toolbar s customization options use the down arrow at the end of the toolbar or on its title bar see Figure 6 Toolbar customization icons Ta O p die Ei ay y Figure 6 Customizing toolbars To show or hide icons defined for the selected toolbar choose Visible Buttons from the drop down menu Visible icons have a checkmark next to them Click on icons to select or deselect them 24 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Right click context menus You can quickly access many menu functions by right clicking on a paragraph graphics or other object A context menu will pop up Often the context menu is the fastest and an easier way to reach a function If you are not sure where in the menus or toolbars a function is located you can often find it by right clicking Status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the workspace It provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some features It is similar in Writer Calc Impress and Draw although each component includes some component specific items Page 3 14 Default English U54 INSRT STD Page number Page style Language Inset Selection Uns
373. p to their new location The same vertical black line appears to show you where the group of slides will go Selection of a group of slides works in a rectangular fashion Note Slides that do not fall within a rectangular area cannot be grouped Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 191 You can work with slides in the Slide Sorter view just as you can in the Slide pane To make changes right click a slide and do any of the following using the pop up menu Add a new Slide after the selected slide Delete the selected slide Change the slide layout Change the slide transition e For one slide click the slide to select it Then add the desired transition e For more than one slide select the group of slides and add the desired transition Mark a slide as hidden Hidden slides are not shown in the slide show Copy or cut and paste a slide Handout view Handout view is for setting up the layout of your slide for a printed handout Click the Handout tab in the workspace then choose Layouts in the Tasks pane Layout contains five choices 1 2 3 4 6 or 9 slides per page Figure 145 v Layouts Figure 145 Handout layouts To print a handout 1 2 3 4 5 Select the slides using the Slide Sorter Use the steps listed in selecting a group of slides on page 191 Select File gt Print or press Control P to open the Print dialog Select Options in the bottom left corner of the Print dialog Check
374. pages of the wizard This process is Slightly different for each type of template but the format is very Similar 3 In the last section of the wizard you can specify the name and location for saving the template The default location is your user 76 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x templates directory but you can choose a different location if you prefer 4 Finally you have the option of creating a new document from your template immediately or manually changing the template For future documents you can re use the template created by the wizard just as you would use any other template Editing a template You can edit a template s styles and content and then if you wish you can reapply the template s styles to documents that were created from that template Note that you can only reapply styles You cannot reapply content To edit a template 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management dialog opens see Figure 49 2 In the box on the left double click the folder that contains the template that you want to edit A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 3 Select the template that you want to edit 4 Click the Commands button and choose Edit from the drop down menu 5 Edit the template just as you would any other document To save your changes choose File gt Save from the main menu Updating a document
375. pe a module name in the pop up dialog and click OK 3 In the Basic window enter the following Sub FixDocV3 set UpdateFromTemplate oDocSettings ThisComponent createInstance _ com sun star document Settings oDocSettings UpdateFromTemplate True End Sub FixDocV3 4 Click the Run BASIC icon then close the Basic window 5 Save the document Next time when you open this document you will have the update from template feature back Adding templates using the Extension Manager The Extension Manager provides an easy way to install collections of templates graphics macros or other add ins that have been packaged into files with a OXT extension See Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org for more about the Extension Manager This Web page lists many of the available extensions http extensions services openoffice org 78 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension package and save it anywhere on your computer 2 In OOo select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the package of templates you want to install and click Open The package begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the package installation is complete the templates are available for use through File gt New gt Templates and Documents and
376. penDocument Text adt OpenDocument Text adt OpenDocument Text Template ott l OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sx Save with passwo OpenOfrice org 1 0 Text Document Template istw Microsoft Word 97 2000 P doch Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtF Starwriter 5 0 sci Starwriter 5 0 Template vor Figure 11 The OpenOffice org Save As dialog The three buttons in the top right of the OOo Open and Save As dialogs are from left to right e Go Up One Level in the folder directory hierarchy Click and hold this button for a second to drop down a list of higher level 30 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x folders to go to one of the folders on the list move the mouse pointer over its name and release the mouse button e Create New Folder e Default Directory For OOo documents that have been saved with more than one version use the Version drop down to select which version you wish to open in read only mode For Microsoft Office documents only the current version can be opened Use the File type field to specify the type of file to be opened or the format of the file to be saved The Read only option on the Open dialog opens the file for reading and printing only Consequently most of the toolbars disappear and most menu options are disabled An Edit File button is displayed on the Standard toolbar to open the file for editing You can open files from the W
377. penOffice org 3 x Presentation styles are very different from Writer styles and Tip are applied in quite a different way Creating bulleted and numbered lists The procedure to create a bulleted or numbered list is quite different depending on the type of text box used although the tools to manage the list and customize the appearance are the same In text boxes created automatically by Impress called AutoLayout the outline styles available are by default bulleted lists while for normal text boxes an additional step is required to create a bulleted list Creating lists in AutoLayout text boxes Every text box included in the available layouts is already formatted as a bulleted list therefore to create a bulleted list the only necessary steps are 1 From the Layout pane choose a slide design that contains a text box Those are easily recognizable from the thumbnail 2 Click in the text box that reads Click to add an outline 3 Type the text then press Enter to start a new bulleted line 4 The default list type is a bulleted list The mechanisms to change the list from bulleted to numbered and vice versa are explained in Changing the appearance of the list on page 210 Press Shift Enter to start a new line without creating a new bullet or number The new line will have the same indentation of the previous line Press instead the button bullets on off on the text formatting toolbar for a line without bullet If the text
378. ple however demonstrates how this works Listing 4 Append the text Hello to the current document Sub AppendHello Dim oDoc Dim sTextService Dim oCurs REM ThisComponent refers to the currently active document oDoc ThisComponent REM Verify that this is a text document STextService com sun star text TextDocument If NOT oDoc supportsService sTextService Then 400 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x MsgBox This macro only works with a text document Exit Sub End If REM Get the view cursor from the current controller oCurs oDoc currentController getViewCursor REM Move the cursor to the end of the document oCurs gotoEnd False REM Insert text Hello at the end of the document oCurs Text insertString oCurs Hello False End Sub Finding more information Numerous resources are available that provide help with writing macros Use Help gt OpenOffice org Help to open the OOo help pages The upper left corner of the OOo help system contains a drop down list that determines which help set is displayed To view the help for Basic choose OpenOffice org Basic from this list Included material Many excellent macros are included with OOo Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt OpenOffice org Basic to open the Macro dialog Expand the Tools library in the OpenOffice org library container Inspect the Debug module some good examples include WritedbgInfo document and printdbgInfo sheet
379. ppear in the Sheet Area box on the Formula Bar Figure 98 You can turn these headers off by selecting View gt Column amp Row Headers Sheet tabs At the bottom of the grid of cells are the sheet tabs which enable access to each individual sheet The visible active sheet has a white tab Clicking on another sheet tab displays that sheet and its tab turns white You can also select multiple sheet tabs at once by holding down the Control key while you click the names Status bar At the very bottom of the Calc window is the status bar which provides information about the spreadsheet and convenient ways to quickly change some of its features Most of the fields are similar to those in other components of OOo see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Calc in the Calc Guide 136 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Sheet 1 3 Default INSRT STD a Sheet Page Insert Selection Unsaved number style mode mode changes Figure 99 Left end of Calc status bar Sum 0 o A 100 i Digital Cell or object Zoom Zoom signature information slider percent Figure 100 Right end of Calc status bar Starting new spreadsheets A new spreadsheet can be opened from any component of OOo for example from Writer or Draw From the Start Center Click the Spreadsheet icon From the Menu bar Choose File gt New gt Spreadsheet From the toolbar Ifa document
380. pplications are started On Windows it is called the Start menu On GNOME it is called the Applications menu On KDE it is identified by the KDE logo On Mac OS X it is the Applications menu When OOo was installed on your computer in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to your system menu If you are using a Mac see note below The exact name and location of these menu entries depend on the operating system and graphical user interface Note for Mac users You should see the OpenOffice org icon in the Applications folder When you double click this icon a text document opens in Writer To open the other components Draw Calc Impress Base go to the File menu of the Writer window and select the component you want OOo does not automatically put a shortcut icon on the desktop but you can add one if you wish If you do not know how to add shortcut icons for launching programs please consult the help for your operating system Starting from an existing document You can start OOo by double clicking the filename of an OOo document in a file manager such as Windows Explorer The appropriate component of OOo will start and the document will be loaded Note for Windows users If you have associated Microsoft Office file types with OOo then when you double click on a doc Word file it opens in Writer xls Excel files open in Calc and ppt PowerPoint files open in Impress If you did not associate the
381. r Mame HP LaserJet SL v Status Default printer Ready Type HF LaserJet SL Location LPT1 Comment _ Print to file Print range Copies All Mumber of copies i O Pages Figure 83 The Print dialog On the Print dialog you can choose e Which printer to use if more than one are installed on your system and the properties of the printer for example orienta tion portrait or landscape which paper tray to use and what paper size to print on The properties available depend on the selected printer consult the printer s documentation for details Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 117 e What pages to print how many copies to print and in what order to print them Use dashes to specify page ranges and commas or semicolons to separate ranges for example 1 5 11 14 34 40 Selection is the highlighted part of a page or pages e What items to print Click the Options button to display the Printer Options dialog Figure 84 Printer Options Contents Fages Motes a Graphics Left pages None i nA Tables Right pages Notes only Drawings Reversed End of document Controls Brochure End of page Background Print black Other Print automatically inserted blank pages Create single print jabs d Paper tray From printer settings Figure 84 Printer Options dialog for Writer Selecting print options for a document Selections on the Printer Options dialog apply to t
382. r to call it up again 228 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Line with Arrow Circle Line with Arrow S quare Line Ends with AITow eal Line y a Line wg Uae Dry s Line with Arrows Line 45 i i Li ith S Ar Line Starts with anow ine with Square Arrow Line with Circle Arrow Figure 170 Lines and Arrows toolbar Drawing a rectangle or square Drawing rectangles is similar to drawing straight lines except that you use the Rectangle icon from the Drawing Toolbar The imaginary line drawn with the mouse corresponds to the diagonal of the rectangle In addition the outline of the future rectangle changes Shape as you drag the mouse around The outline is shown as a dashed line until you release the mouse button when the rectangle is drawn Starting point Figure 171 Drawing a rectangle Hold down the Shift key to draw a square Hold down the Alt key to draw a rectangle starting from its center To combine the effects hold down both the Shift and Alt keys simultaneously Drawing a circle or ellipse To draw an ellipse also called an oval or a circle use the Ellipse icon from the Drawing Toolbar A circle is simply an ellipse where the two axes are the same length The ellipse drawn is the largest ellipse that would fit inside the imaginary rectangle drawn with the mouse Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 229 Starting point Figure 172
383. r as a combination of a private key which must be kept secret and a public key which you add to your documents when you sign them You can get a certificate from a certification authority which may be a private company or a governmental institution When you apply a digital signature to a document a kind of checksum is computed from the document s content plus your personal key The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 339 When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of OpenOffice org the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum If both are the same the program will signal that you see the original unchanged document In addition the program can show you the public key information from the certificate You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority Whenever someone changes something in the document this change breaks the digital signature On Windows operating systems the Windows features of validating a Signature are used On Solaris and Linux systems files that are supplied by Thunderbird Mozilla or Firefox are used For a more detailed description of how to get and manage a certificate and Signature validation see Using Digital Signatures in the OOo Help To sign a document 1 Choose File gt Di
384. r computer You can change the action of the Print File Directly icon to send the document to the printer defined for the document Note instead of the default printer for the computer Go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and select the Load printer settings with the document option Controlling printing For more control over printing use File gt Print to display the Print dialog On the Print dialog you can choose e Which printer to use if more than one are installed on your system and the properties of the printer for example orientation portrait or landscape which paper tray to use and What paper size to print on The properties available depend on the selected printer consult the printer s documentation for details e What pages to print how many copies to print and in what order to print them Use dashes to specify page ranges and commas or semicolons to separate ranges for example 1 5 11 14 34 40 Selection is the highlighted part of a page or pages e What items to print Click the Options button to display the Printer Options dialog Selections on the Printer Options dialog are different in Writer Calc Impress and Draw but in all cases they apply to this printing of this document only For details see the chapters on the various OOo components To specify default printing options see Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org and the chapters on the various OOo components 328
385. r reading and payment type How will I use this information about these three fields While on vacation I want the expenses for each day to be listed together The date fields suggest a relationship between the vacation table and the dates in each of these tables fuel and food This means that the date fields in these tables will be linked as we create the database The type of payment includes two bank cards and cash So we will create a table with a field for the type of payment and use it in list boxes in the forms While we have listed fields we will create in the tables of the database there is one more field that may be needed in a table the field for the primary key In some tables the field for the primary key has already been listed In other tables such as the payment type an additional field for the primary key must be created Tip Creating a new database To create a new database choose File gt New gt Database from the menu bar or click the arrow next to the New icon on the Standard toolbar and select Database from the dropdown menu Both methods open the Database Wizard Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 253 On the first page of the Database Wizard select Create a new database and then click Next The second page has two questions Make sure the choice for the first question is Yes register the database for me and the choice for the second question is Open the database for editing Click Finish
386. rather than adding rows in the proper places After you have added information you can then sort it to update the Sheet You can sort by highlighting the cells to be sorted then selecting Data gt Sort The selected cells can be sorted by the order of information in up to three columns or rows in either ascending A Z 1 9 or descending Z A 9 1 order On the Options tab of the Sort dialog you can choose the following options Case sensitive If two entries are otherwise identical one with an upper case letter is placed before one with a lower case letter in the same position Range contains column labels Does not include the column heading in the sort Include formats A cell s formatting is moved with its contents If formatting is used to distinguish different types of cells then use this option Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 171 Copy sort results to Sets a spreadsheet address to which to copy the sort results Ifa range is specified that does not have the necessary number of cells then cells are added If a range contains cells that already have content then the sort fails Custom sort order Select the box then choose one of the sort orders defined in Tools gt Options gt Spreadsheet gt Sort Lists from the drop down list Direction Sets whether rows or columns are sorted The default is to sort by columns unless the selected cells are in a single column Printing Printing from Calc is the same as
387. rd Closes the current document Closes OpenOffice org when the last open document is closed Shift F2 Ctrl F4 or Alt F4 F5 Opens the Navigator window F6 Sets focus in next subwindow Shift F6 Sets focus in previous subwindow F10 Activates the first menu File menu Shift F10 Opens the context pop up menu F11 Opens the Styles and Formatting window Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 421 General shortcut keys for OpenOffice org Shortcut Keys Result Enter Esc Spacebar Arrow keys Tab Shift Tab Alt Down Arrow Del Shift Del Backspace Ctrl M Ctrl Alt Shift V Enter if an OLE object is selected Enter if a drawing object or text object is selected Activates the focused button in a dialog Terminates the action or dialog If in OpenOffice org Help goes up one level Toggles the focused checkbox in a dialog Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog This shortcut applies to combo boxes and to icon buttons with pop up menus Close an opened list by pressing the Esc key Deletes the selected items into the recycle bin Deletes the selected items without putting them in the recycle bin When a folder is shown goes up one level goes back Removes dire
388. re 233 Selecting queries to add to another query b Click End Reading c Click Add and then click Close ih Step 7 Add fields to the table at the bottom of the query We are going to calculate the fuel economy To do this we need the FuelQuantity and distance traveled Since the FuelQuantity we want to use is at the ending odometer reading we will use the End Reading query to get it We will also use the Odometer field from the Fuel table and End Reading query 298 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Fuel E End Reading r FuellD FuellD Date Odometer FuelCost FuelQuantity Cosh aati Figure 234 Tables in this query 1 Double click FuelQuantity in the End Reading query 2 Double click Odometer in the End Reading query 3 Double click Odometer in the Fuel table Field IFuelQuantity Odometer Odometer Alias Table Sort Visible Function Criterion Or Figure 235 Added fields to the query End Reading End Reading Fuel Step 8 Enter the FuelID difference field We want the difference between the FuellID value of the Fuel table and FuelID value of the End Reading query to equal one 1 1 Type End Reading FuelID Fuel FuelID in the field to the right of the Odometer field of the Fuel Table Figure 236 Type the numeral 1 one in the Criterion cell of this column Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Table _ E
389. re all these things called The terms used in OpenOffice org for most parts of the user interface the parts of the program you see and use in contrast to the behind the scenes code that actually makes it work are the same as for most other programs A dialog is a special type of window Its purpose is to inform you of something or request input from you or both It provides controls for you to use to specify how to carry out an action The technical names for common controls are shown in Figure 9 not shown is the list box from which you select an item In most cases we do not use the technical terms in this book but it is useful to know them because the Help and other sources of information often use them In most cases as long as the dialog is open your work is limited to the dialog After you make changes if any close the dialog usually clicking OK or another button saves your changes and closes the dialog Then you can again work with your document Some dialogs can be left open as you work so you can switch back and forth between the dialog and your document An example of this type is the Find amp Replace dialog 26 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Page Style Default Xx Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet 1 Left to right then down 3 A First page number Print C Column and row headers Charts L Grid Drawing objects C Notes C Formulas Objects
390. reate a template from a document 1 Open a new or existing document of the type you want to make into a template text document spreadsheet drawing presentation 2 Add the content and styles that you want 3 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Save The Templates dialog opens see Figure 53 4 In the New template field type a name for the new template 5 In the Categories list click the category to which you want to assign the template The category you choose has no effect on the template itself it is simply the folder in which you save the template Choosing an appropriate category makes it easier to find the template when you want to use it For example you might save Impress templates under the Presentations category To learn more about template folders see Organizing templates on page 82 6 Click OK to save the new template E Templates Mew template Templates Cancel Categories Templates Help My Templates Presentation Backgrounds Edit Presentations Organizer Figure 53 Saving a new template Any settings that can be added to or modified in a document can be saved in a template For example below are some of the settings although not a full list that can be included in a Writer document and then saved as a template for later use e Printer settings which printer single sided double sided and paper size and so on e Styles to be used including character
391. rectly to that object s location in the document Objects are much easier to find if you have given them names when creating them instead of keeping OOo s default graphics1 graphics2 Table1 Table2 and so on which may not correspond to the position of the object in the document If you only want to see the content in a certain category highlight the category and click the Content View icon Until you click the icon again only the objects of that category will be displayed e Click the Navigation icon O second icon from the left at the top of the Navigator to display the Navigation toolbar Figure 13 Here you can pick one of the categories and use the Previous and Next icons to move from one item to the next This is particularly helpful for finding items like bookmarks and indexes which can be difficult to see The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic or Next Bookmark Figure 13 Navigation toolbar e To jump to a specific page in the document type its page number in the box at the top of the Navigator A bit of experimentation with the other icons will demonstrate their functions Some component specific uses are described in the chapters on Writer and the other components 32 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Undoing and redoing changes To undo the most recent change press Control Z or click the Undo icon on the Stand
392. red list 209 default formatting 208 formatting pasted text 208 outline level 210 pasting 207 text boundaries show hide 49 text box AutoLayout 206 209 creating 206 moving 215 vertical alignment of text 207 text box tool 206 text documents opening 427 Text Formatting toolbar 208 text in Draw 231 theme deleting 350 themes 346 themes Gallery 350 title slide 197 toolbar icons macros 396 toolbars 186 adding commands 409 choosing icons for commands 410 Color Bar 221 creating 409 customizing 24 displaying or hiding 22 Draw 219 Drawing 221 Fontwork 355 Line and Filling toolbar 221 moving 23 Options Bar Draw 223 overview 21 tooltips 37 197 transparency 242 244 two digit years 38 typing errors autocorrect 156 U undoing groups 246 unformatted text pasting 208 ungrouping 246 unit of measurement 219 unsaved changes flag 90 URL Recognition 364 user data options 36 user guides 16 user interface options 40 user specific settings 52 V validity 160 variables in macros 383 VBA properties load save options 54 vector graphics 217 vertical alignment of text 207 video objects inserting 213 view options 39 W Web Layout 368 web page export Calc spreadsheets 373 Impress presentations 373 Web wizard Writer 369 Writer documents 368 369 wildcards 97 windows dockable floating 23 wizard form database 267 presentation 194 query database 293 report database 303 table database 255 web 3
393. restore or refresh the view of the Ip current document Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs Middle mouse button Defines the function of the middle mouse button e Automatic scrolling dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view e Paste clipboard pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the Selection clipboard at the cursor position The Selection clipboard is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit gt Copy Cut Paste or their respective Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 4 keyboard shortcuts Clipboard and Selection clipboard can contain different contents at the same time Function Clipboard Selection clipboard Copy content Edit gt Copy Select text table or object Control C Paste content Edit gt Paste Clicking the middle mouse Control V pastes at button pastes at the mouse the cursor position pointer position Pasting into No effect on the The last marked selection is another clipboard contents the content of the selection document clipboard Print options On the OpenOffice org Print page set the print options to suit your default printer and your most common printing method In the Printer warnings section near the bottom of the page Figure 23 you can choose whether to be warned if the paper size or orientation specified in your document does not match the pap
394. review 1 Choose File gt Page Preview or click the Page Preview button hn The Writer window changes to display the current page and the following page and shows the Page Preview toolbar in place of the Formatting toolbar ea el fo BE S 24 i Close Preview Figure 85 Page Preview toolbar 2 Click the Book Preview icon to display left and right pages in their correct orientation 3 To print the document from this page view click the Print page view icon to open the Print dialog Choose your options and click OK to print as usual 4 To choose margins and other options for the printout click the Ge Print options page view icon to display the Print Options dialog Print Options Distribution Rows Columns 2 ET Margins Left el Right Ea Top bal Bottom w EJ Default l Vertically ea Ea Spacing Horizontal Format Landscape Portrait Figure 86 Print Options dialog Printing a brochure You can print a document with two pages on each side of a sheet of paper arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half the pages are in the correct order to form a booklet or brochure To print a brochure on a single sided printer 1 Plan your document so it will look good when printed half size choose appropriate margins font sizes and so on Choose File 120 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x gt Print In the Print dialog click Properties
395. rid menu Note Snap to Grid on Ctrl deactivates the snap option for this activity Snap to Grid off Ctrl activates the snap option for this activity The spacing resolution of the grid points can be adjusted under Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt Grid See also Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks in the Draw Guide Hold down the Alt key to extend the line symmetrically outward from the start point the line extends to each side of the start point equally This lets you draw straight lines by starting from the middle of the line The line just drawn has all the default attributes such as color and line type To change the line attributes click on the line to select it and then use the tools in the Line and Filling toolbar or for more control right click on the line and choose Line to open the Line dialog Drawing an arrow Arrows are drawn like lines Draw classifies arrows as a subgroup of lines Lines with arrowheads They are shown in the information field on the status bar only as lines Click on the Line Ends with Arrow icon gt to draw an arrow Drawing lines and arrows T Click on the small black triangle on the Lines and Arrows icon to open a floating toolbar with ten tools for drawing lines and arrows Figure 170 Alternatively you can click directly on the symbol to repeat the last used command chosen from this toolbar In both cases the last used command will be stored on the toolbar to make it quicke
396. rk border Using the mouse To move the focus using the mouse simply move the mouse pointer to the cell where you want the focus to be and click the left mouse button This changes the focus to the new cell This method is most useful when the two cells are a large distance apart 142 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Figure 104 Left One selected cell and right a group of selected cells Using the Tab and Enter keys e Pressing Enter or Shift Enter moves the focus down or up respectively e Pressing Tab or Shift Tab moves the focus right or left respectively Using the arrow keys Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard moves the focus in the direction of the arrows Using Home End Page Up and Page Down e Home moves the focus to the start of a row e End moves the focus to the column furthest to the right that contains data e Page Down moves the display down one complete screen and Page Up moves the display up one complete screen e Combinations of Control and Alt with Home End Page Down Page Up and the cursor keys move the focus of the current cell in other ways Tip Holding down Alt Cursor key resizes a cell Customizing the Enter key You can customize the direction in which the Enter key moves the focus by selecting Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Calc gt General The four choices for the direction of the Enter key are shown on the right hand side of Figure 105 It can move the focus dow
397. rogramming See http www packtpub com openoffice ooobasic calc automation book 402 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x OpenOf ficeorg3 Chapter 1 4 Customizing OpenOffice org Introduction This Appendix describes some common customizations that you may wish to do You can customize menus toolbars and keyboard shortcuts in OpenOffice org add new menus and toolbars and assign macros to events However you cannot customize context right click menus Other customizations are made easy by extensions that you can install from the OpenOffice org website or from other providers Customizations to menus and toolbars can be saved in a template Note To do so first save them in a document and then save the document as a template as described in Chapter 3 Styles and Templates Customizing menu content In addition to changing the menu font described in Chapter 2 you can add and rearrange items on the menu bar add items to menus and make other changes To customize menus 1 Choose Tools gt Customize 2 On the Customize dialog pick the Menus page Figure 314 3 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed menu for the application for example Writer or fora selected document 4 In the section OpenOffice org lt name of the program example Writer gt Menus select from the Menu drop down list the menu that you want to customize The list includes all the main menus as we
398. rom the existing tables based upon how you create the query A report organizes the information of the fields of a query in a document according to your requirements The database in OOo requires Java Runtime Environment JRE If you do not have it on your computer you can download it Caution from www java com and install it following the instructions on the site It should be Java 5 0 or higher In OOo use Tools gt A Options gt OpenOffice org gt Java to register Java Windows version of JRE can not be used while there are other versions that can Base creates relational databases This makes it fairly easy to create a database in which the fields of the database have relationships with each other For example Consider a database for a library It will contain a field for the names of the authors and another field for the names of the Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 251 books There is an obvious relationship between the authors and the books they have written The library may contain more than one book by the same author This is what is known as a one to many relationship one author and more than one book Most if not all the relationships in such a database are one to many relationships Consider an employment database for the same library One of the fields contains the names of the employees while others contain the social security numbers and other personal data The relationship between the names and social secur
399. rt a comment in the text place the cursor in the place the comment refers to and choose Insert gt comment or press Ctrl Alt N The anchor point of the comment is connected by a dotted line to a box on the right hand side of the page where you can type the text of the comment Writer automatically adds at the bottom of the comment the author s name and a time stamp indicating when the comment was created Figure 82 shows an example of text with notes from two different authors Note sample riter document has been vastly improved in OOo notes are now displayed at the side of H m ria cheuuaeindenlh annie a anloaytoconnnanny eminehyaees fera ae ae ichele Zarri user who created them To insert a note in Yesterday 23 34 n the text the note refers to and select he anchor point of the note is connected by Cello Suite 1 le ofthe page where you can type your BWV1007 ttom the author of the note as wellasa Prelude created lt ref gt shows an example of text Allemande Minuets configure the name you want to appear in Sarabande it Courante nt each author will be ajitomatically Gigue Johan Sebastian Bach Today 23 37 Figure 82 Notes in OO03 114 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Choose Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the note or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a di
400. s Using word completion If Word Completion is enabled Writer tries to guess which word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you To accept the Suggestion press Enter Otherwise continue typing To turn off Word Completion select Tools gt AutoCorrect Options gt Word Completion and deselect Enable word completion You can customize word completion from the Word Completion page of the AutoCorrect dialog e Add append a space automatically after an accepted word e Show the suggested word as a tip hovering over the word rather than completing the text as you type e Change the maximum number of words remembered for word completion and the length of the smallest words to be remembered e Delete specific entries from the word completion list e Change the key that accepts a suggested entry the options are Right arrow End key Return Enter and Space bar Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word Note for the second time in a document Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 103 Using AutoText AutoText allows you to assign text tables graphics and other items to a key combination For example rather than typing Senior Management every time you use that phrase you can type sm and press F3 You can also save graphics or tables such as a formatted Tip like the one on this page as AutoText To assign some text to an AutoText shortcut 1 Type the text into your docum
401. s Using the Macro Recorder Your first macro A macro is a saved sequence of commands or keystrokes that are stored for later use An example of a simple macro is one that types your address The OpenOffice org macro language is very flexible allowing automation of both simple and complex tasks Macros are especially useful to repeat a task the same way over and over again OpenOffice org macros are usually written in a language called StarBasic or just abbreviated Basic Although you can learn Basic and write macros there is a steep learning curve to writing macros from scratch The usual method for a beginner is to use the built in macro recorder which records your keystrokes and saves them for use Most tasks in OpenOffice org are accomplished by dispatching a command sending a command which is intercepted and used The macro recorder works by recording the commands that are dispatched see The dispatch framework on page 388 Creating a simple macro Imagine repeatedly entering simple information Although you can store the information in the clipboard if you use the clipboard for something else the contents are changed Storing the contents as a macro is a simple solution In some simple cases including the example used here a better solution is to use AutoText 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro to start recording a macro _ A small window is displayed so you know that OpenOffice org i
402. s Available fields Selected fields City Collection ID Notes Album Title Photo Artist Title DatePurchased te ce LastName NumberofTracks Birthdate Figure 184 Selecting fields for the table 256 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Step 2 Set field types and formats In this step you give the fields their properties When you click a field the information on the right changes See Figure 185 You can then make changes to meet your needs Click each field one at a time and make the changes listed below Selected fields CollectionID AlbumTitle Artist DatePurchased Format Notes NumberoflTracks Photo Field information Field name Field type AutoValue Entry required Length Figure 185 Changing field types Note If any of these fields requires an entry set Entry required to Yes An entry with that field blank will then not be allowed In general only set Entry required to Yes if something must always be put in that field By default Entry required is set to No e CollectionID Change AutoValue from No to Yes e AlbumTitle Note Entry required Leave Entry required as No unless all of your music is in albums Length Unless you have an album title that exceeds 100 Characters counting the spaces do not change the length In Base the maximum length of each field must be specified on creation It is not easy to change this later so if in doubt specify
403. s A particular cell is identified by its row number and column letter Cells hold the individual elements text numbers formulas and so on that make up the data to display and manipulate Fach spreadsheet can have many sheets and each sheet can have many individual cells In Calc 3 x each sheet can have a maximum of 65 536 rows and a maximum of 1024 columns for a total of over 67 million cells Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 133 Parts of the main Calc window When Calc is started the main window looks similar to Figure 96 E Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Cale Hile zdt Yew insert Format loos Leta Window Help 5 AB ee ja Ee fd we OR or ABS ee ES BS oF fue Default Arial v fk EB toolbar Active cell Active cell reference Column Headers Name box Sheet tabs Status bar Sheets Sheetz x Iy gt Shee 113 Gefauk Ccunt 0 A e _ amp 100 Figure 96 Parts of the Calc window Title bar The Title bar located at the top shows the name of the current spreadsheet When the spreadsheet is newly created its name is Untitled X where X is a number When you Save a spreadsheet for the first time you are prompted to enter a name of your choice Menu bar Under the Title bar is the Menu bar When you choose one of the menus a submenu appears with other options You can modify the Menu bar as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org Toolbars
404. s Figure 199 You can then drag and drop it where you want Date J z Bo Figure 199 A selected control Control click a label or field selects only the label or the field Figure 200 You can press the Tab key to change the selection from the field to the label or the label to the field Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 271 Tolls Figure 200 Selecting a field of a control e Moving a group of controls is almost as easy as moving one of them 1 Click the field of the top left control to be moved to select it 2 Move the cursor to just above and to the left of the selected control 3 Drag the cursor to the bottom right of the group of controls and release the mouse button As you drag the cursor a dashed box appears showing what is contained in your selection Make sure it is big enough to include the entire length of all the controls When you release the mouse button a border with its green handles appears around the controls you selected Figure 201 Lu nch J Tolls SE m Figure 201 Selecting multiple controls Move the cursor over one of the fields It changes to a drag icon Drag the group of controls to where you want them When either changing size or moving a control two properties of the Form Design toolbar should be selected Snap to Grid and Tip Guides when Moving Your controls will line up better and an outline of what you are moving moves as the cursor moves You should also have both r
405. s click on the Effects drop down button from the Drawing toolbar Changing the selection mode To go from one mode to another you can do one of the following e Toggle the Points button on the Drawing toolbar to switch from the simple selection mode to the Points mode You can also use the keyboard shortcut F8 Points e Choose the Effects drop down button from the Drawing toolbar to activate the Rotation mode for a selected object e If you often work in Rotation mode you can choose the Rotation Mode after Clicking Object button from the Options bar you can cycle through normal and rotation modes just by clicking on the object This can be more convenient than clicking the object then clicking the Rotate button from the Drawing Toolbar e To stop working in Rotation mode click the Rotation Mode after Clicking Object button again Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 235 Selecting objects Direct selection To select an object the easiest way is to click directly on it For objects that are not filled click directly on the object s outline to select it Selection by framing You can select several objects by using the mouse to drag a large rectangle around the objects as shown For this to work the Select amp icon on the Drawing toolbar must be active Only objects that lie entirely within the rectangle are selected Selecting hidden objects Even if objects are located behind others
406. s template will all have your company s logo on the first page Templates can contain anything that regular documents can contain such as text graphics a set of styles and user specific setup information such as measurement units language the default printer and toolbar and menu customization All documents in OpenOffice org OOo are based on templates You can create a specific template for any document type text spreadsheet drawing presentation If you do not specify a template when you start a new document then the document is based on the default template for that type of document If you have not specified a default template OOo uses the blank template for that type of document that is installed with OOo See Setting a default template on page 79 for more information What are styles A style is a set of formats that you can apply to selected pages text frames and other elements in your document to quickly change their appearance When you apply a style you apply a whole group of formats at the same time Many people manually format paragraphs words tables page layouts and other parts of their documents without paying any attention to styles They are used to writing documents according to physical attributes For example you might specify the font family font size and any formatting such as bold or italic Styles are logical attributes Using styles means that you stop saying font size 14pt Times
407. s recording 2 Type the desired information or perform an appropriate series of operations In this case I typed my name Andrew Pitonyak 3 Click the Stop Recording button to stop recording save the macro and display the OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog see Figure 300 4 Be certain to open the library container named My Macros Find the library named Standard under My Macros Be warned every library container has a library named Standard Select the Standard library and click New Module to create a new module to contain the macro Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 379 Library Containers Macro name InspectMetaData Save macro in Existing macros in DBInspegtion ai Ca My Macros OpenOffice org Macros 011765 GettingStartedwithMacros AddResultSetToDoc ResultSetToData gt AndrewBase SupportedDBDrivers New Library DriverArgs New Module Forms o Help Hane Libraries e Standard E Untitled Modules 1 Figure 300 OOo Macro Organizer dialog DBInspection library selected 5 The default module name is Module1 choose a better name Although it is still not descriptive I used Recorded Type a descriptive name and click OK to create the module The OpenOffice org Basic Macros dialog is displayed again showing the new module Name OK Recorded Cancel e Figure 301 Give your module a meaningful name 6
408. s you to have up to four portions of the spreadsheet in view at any one time Why would you want to do this Imagine you have a large spreadsheet and one of the cells has a number in it which is used by three formulas in other cells Using the split screen technique you can position the cell containing the number in one section and each of the cells with formulas in the other sections Then you can change the number in the cell and watch how it affects each of the formulas 152 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x ea ee c Beta 3 2000 AD 01000 Al BetatAD U AD 0 2880 6 A2 Beta Ai 1 A1 0 6562 Aj BetatA AD 0 7219 Ca Ad Beta aAs 1 A3 0 6424 Dg AS5 Beta Aa 1 Ad 0 7351 ig AG Beta A5 1 45 0 6231 ai AT Beta As t1 As 0 7515 Ciz AS BetatAT AT 0 5975 13 AG Beta As t Asi 0 7696 aq A10 Beta agt 1 Ag 0 5875 as Al1 Beta alo 1 A10 0 7854 Figure 111 Split screen example Splitting the screen horizontally To split the screen horizontally 1 Move the mouse pointer into the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side of the screen and place it over the small button at the top with the black triangle L ae Split screen bar Figure 112 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar 2 Immediately above this button you will see a thick black line Figure 112 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows Figure 113
409. se Macromedia Flash for the file type You can also convert presentations into a series of web pages as described below Saving as web pages HTML format does not retain animation Note and slide transitions Chapter 12 Creating WebPages J73 1 To begin select File gt Export and choose HTML Document as the file type 2 Create a folder for the files supply a name for the resulting HTML file and click Save The HTML Export Wizard opens Depending on the size of your presentation and the number of graphics it contains the HTML export function creates many HTML JPG and GIF files If you simply save to your desktop not in a specific folder these separate HTML and graphics files will be all over your desktop So be sure to create a folder to hold all the files Note 3 Choose the design for all of the pages either from an existing design or by creating a new one If you have not previously saved a design the Existing Design choice is not available HTML Export Assign design New design C Existing Design Select an existing design or create a new one 4 Click Next to select the type of web pages to create e Standard HTML one page for each slide with navigation links to move from slide to slide e Standard HTML with frames one page with a navigation bar on the left hand side uses slide title as navigation links Click on links to display pages in right hand side e Automatic
410. se the mouse button and the screen is split into two views each with its own horizontal scroll bar You can scroll the left and right parts of the window independently Removing split views To remove a split view do any of the following e Double click on each split line e Click on and drag the split lines back to their places at the ends of the scroll bars e Choose Window gt Split to remove all split lines at the same time 154 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Entering data using the keyboard Most data entry in Calc can be accomplished using the keyboard Entering numbers Click in the cell and type in the number using the number keys on either the main keyboard or the numeric keypad To enter a negative number either type a minus sign in front of it or enclose it in parentheses brackets like this 1234 By default numbers are right aligned and negative numbers have a leading minus symbol Entering text Click in the cell and type the text Text is left aligned by default Entering numbers as text If a number is entered in the format 014681 Calc will drop the leading 0 Exception see Tip below To preserve the leading zero for example for telephone area codes type an apostrophe before the number like this 01481 The data is now regarded as text by Calc Formulas and functions will treat the entry like any other text entry which typically results in it being a zero in a formula and bei
411. se the options for checking spelling click Language Settings gt Writing Aids In the Options section of the page Figure 42 choose the settings that are useful for you Some considerations e If you do not want spelling checked while you type deselect Check spelling as you type and select Do not mark errors To find the second item scroll down in the Options list e If you use a custom dictionary that includes words in all upper case and words with numbers for example AS 400 select Check uppercase words and Check words with numbers e Check special regions includes headers footers frames and tables when checking spelling Writing aids Available language modules Hunspell SpellChecker Edit Libhyphen Hyphenator OpenOrrice org New Thesaurus User defined dictionaries soffice All New sun Al IgnoreAllList All Options Check spelling as you type en Check grammar as you type Check uppercase words Check words with numbers Check capitalization A ee E A ES a ee E A d A A Figure 42 Choosing languages dictionaries and options for checking spelling Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 59 Here you can also check which user defined custom dictionaries are active by default and add or remove dictionaries by clicking the New or Delete buttons OpenOffice org does not have a grammar checker but you can install a grammar checker extension such as Language Tool and ac
412. set button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog Use this feature with care as no confirmation dialog will be displayed the defaults will be set without any further notice or user input Assigning macros to events In OOo when something happens we say that an event occured For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved You can associate a macro with an event so the macro is run when the event occurs For example a common use is to assign the open document event to run a macro that performs certain setup tasks for the document To associate a macro with an event use the Events page of the Customize dialog For more information see Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros Adding functionality with extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into OpenOffice org to add new functionality Although individual extensions can be found in different places the official OpenOffice org extension repository is at http extensions services openoffice org Some extensions are free of charge others are available for a fee Check the descriptions to see what licenses and fees apply to the ones that interest you Installing extensions To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension and save it anywhere on your computer 2 In OOo select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog Figure 322 click Add 3 A file browser w
413. shapes Geometric shapes include basic shapes symbol shapes block arrows flowcharts callouts and stars Figure 176 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons referred to in the following sections Clicking on the arrow next to the icon opens a floating toolbar with the relevant work tools The use of all these tools is similar to that of the Rectangle tool even though they produce different geometric shapes Figure 176 Part of the main Drawing toolbar Basic shapes The Basic Shapes icon makes available the Basic Shapes x range of tools for drawing basic shapes noooaco0 o If you choose the rectangle tool from this toolbar it looks the same as a rectangle drawn GAKUSSA using the Rectangle tool on the Drawing SOO ALOA toolbar The only differences you will see are in R the information field in the status bar for 0 J E example shape selected Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 233 Symbol shapes The Symbol Shapes icon brings you to an Symbol Shapes x array of tools for drawing the various symbol O DZO shapes p oG O co Oge Block arrows The Block Arrows icon opens the Block Arrows Block Arrows x toolbar Eo a oe ot gt Jp g D Sf w gt DDO 0 amp CJ ap G2 fh a gt a P P Flowcharts The tools for drawing flowcharts are accessed by E A x clicking on the Flowcharts icon O O0 06s oOin The creation of flowcharts organization charts and 890d 7v simi
414. sheet tabs and choose Select All Sheets from the pop up menu Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 147 Working with columns and rows Inserting columns and rows Columns and rows can be inserted individually or in groups When you insert a single new column it is inserted to the left of the highlighted column When you insert a single new row it is inserted above the highlighted row Cells in the new columns or rows are formatted like the corresponding cells in the column or row before or to the left of which the new column or row is inserted Note Single column or row Using the Insert menu 1 Select the column or rows where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Select either Insert gt Columns or Insert gt Rows Using the mouse 1 Select the column or rows where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Right click the header 3 Select Insert Rows or Insert Columns Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be inserted at once rather than inserting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for inserting a single column or row above Deleting columns and rows Columns and rows can be deleted individually or in groups Single column or row A single column or row can only be deleted by using the mouse 1 Select the colu
415. sions e Database integration including a bibliography database e Export to PDF including bookmarks see Chapter 10 e And many more These features are covered in detail in the Writer Guide The Writer interface The main Writer workspace is shown in Figure 59 The menus and toolbars are described in Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org Some other features of the Writer interface are covered in this chapter Standard toolbar Formatting toolbar i e bod i 4 Pagel 1 Default English USA INSRT STD G i T Figure 59 The main Writer workspace in Print Layout view 88 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Status bar The Writer status bar provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some document features Page 3 14 Default English U54 INSRT STD Page number Page style Lanquage Insert Selection Unsaved mode mode changes Figure 60 Left end of status bar Page number Shows the current page number the sequence number of the current page if different and the total number of pages in the document For example if you restarted page numbering at 1 on the third page its page number is 1 and its sequence number is 3 If any bookmarks have been defined in the document a right click on this field pops up a list of bookmarks click on the required one To jump to a specific page in the document double click on this field Th
416. sssssssssssssessrereeeee 295 Defining relatiOnNSHips ccccececceccncencecceceecensestecceceessenceessessqens 264 Creating a database TORN xen darionioxienessesdutaecties wanstitacesieniasheseareaenrds 267 Accessing Other data SOULCES ccccecc ese sceccecenceneecseceecensenseneeseees 284 Using data Sources in OpeNnOPffiCe OFG ccc ccc ecc eee eeeeeeeeeneeenseees 285 Entering data in Oh pcan tranin te emegicaaeadswaaeirancaneanaetenaseaveurotaneeaeeeeseras 290 Creating queries ssssssssssseccrecrrrsssssseoecrecccereesesessseccccceessssssseeeeee 293 GE T TEOT E EN 302 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math sesscsecceseccececcececcececcececcesecceseo 312 VECE DI aR E A AE E EEE E E 313 Entering a fOrmula ccc ccc cc ccc ececcecceceeseneeceeceeeenseneeseeneeenseegnens 314 CUSO ZAO eii EET 319 PPO O ea EA AE 321 Numbering equationS seseeeeseressssrrerreerererserrsssssssssesseseseeeeereeeee 325 Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing ccccccccccccccccccccccees 327 OOUR EELER EIE 90 AAEE E E E A A ve eee se A A T E E ces 328 B A T o A PEE PE E E E EEE ETS 328 I T a A E 328 FG O FOT araa E E OEE EARE 329 Exporting to other formats eesessssseeserrerrererrseererseesessssrseseseseee 336 E mailing GOCUMENUS 5cinissccncssnasasseatuesensesdesdcaecdegeaiesaeciadometsdeagbiudenss 336 Digital Signing Of COCUMENMS cceccceccenccenccesceecsenceencessseessenes 339
417. start with REM The keyword REM short for remark starts a macro comment All text after REM on the same line is ignored As a short cut the single quote character can also be used to start a comment StarBasic is not case sensitive for keywords so REM Rem and rem all start a comment If you use symbolic constants Tip defined by the API it is safer to assume that the names are case sensitive symbolic constants are an advanced topic not usually needed by people that use the macro recorder Defining subroutines with SUB Individual macros are stored in subroutines defined with the keyword SUB The end of a subroutine is indicated by the words END SUB The code starts by defining the subroutine named Main which is empty and does nothing The next subroutine EnterMyName contains the generated code Ti OpenOffice org creates an empty subroutine named Main Ip when it creates a module There are advanced topics that are beyond the scope of this document but knowing about them might be of interest e You can write a macro so that values can be passed to the subroutine The values are called arguments Recorded macros do not accept arguments 382 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x e Another kind of subroutine is called a function A function is a Subroutine that returns a value The keyword FUNCTION is used rather than SUB to define a function Generated macros are always of type SUB Defining variables using DIM You
418. styles can be modified but new presentation styles cannot be created However not only can the prepackaged graphic styles be modified but new graphic styles can also be created What styles to use and when to use them is described later in this chapter Presentation styles affect three elements of a slide master the background background objects such as icons decorative lines and text frames and the text placed on the slide Text styles are further divided into Notes Outline 1 through Outline 9 Subtitle and Title The outline styles are used for the different levels of the outline to which they belong For example Outline 2 is used for the subpoints of Outline 1 and Outline 3 is used for the subpoints of Outline 2 Graphic styles affect many of the elements of a slide Notice that text styles exist in both the presentation and graphic style selections Working with slide masters Impress comes with 28 prepackaged slide masters They are shown in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane Figure 153 This section has three subsections Used in This Presentation Recently Used and Available for Use Click the sign next to the name ofa Subsection to expand it to show thumbnails of the slides or click the sign to collapse the subsection to hide the thumbnails oo Tasks View X Master Pages Used in This Presentation sii Used aa a hd Fach of the slide masters shown in the i Available for Use list
419. suggestion Query Artists To the right of this are two choices Select Display Query Click Finish Using the Design View to create a query Creating a query using Design View is not as difficult as it may first seem It may take multiple steps but each step is fairly simple What fuel economy is our vehicle getting miles per gallon in the USA This question requires creating two queries with the first query being used as part of the second query Step 1 Open the first query in Design View Click Create Query in Design View Step 2 Add tables Add Table or Query Tables C Queries CD Collection Fuel Maintenance Payment Type Vacations Figure 228 Add Tables or Query window 296 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 1 Click Fuel to highlight it 2 Click Add Click Close Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the fuel table Figure Tip 229 and drag the to make it longer and easier to see all of the fields in the table EJ Fuel FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuanity Odometer Payment ype Figure 229 Fuel table in query Step 3 Add fields to the table at the bottom 1 Double click the FuellD field in the Fuel table 2 Double click the Odometer field 3 Double click the FuelQuantity field The table at the bottom of the query window should now have three columns Figure 230 Field Odometer FuelQuantity Alias Table Sort Visible Function Criterion Figure 230 Query t
420. t The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic Next Bookmark or Continue search forward For more uses of the Navigator in Writer see the Writer Guide 92 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Working with documents Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org includes instructions on starting new documents opening existing documents and saving documents Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates covers how to create a document from a template Saving as a Microsoft Word file If you need to exchange files with users of Microsoft Word they may not know how to open and save odt files Microsoft Word 2007 with Service Pack 2 SP2 can do this Users of Word 2007 2003 XP and 2000 can also download and install a free OpenDocument Format ODF plugin from Sun Microsystems Some users of Microsoft Word may be unwilling or unable to receive x odt files Perhaps their employer won t allow them to install the plug in In this case you can save a document as a Microsoft Word file 1 Important First save your document in the file format used by OOo Writer odt If you do not any changes you made since the last time you saved will appear only in the Microsoft Word version of the document 2 Then choose File gt Save As 3 On the Save As dialog Figure 66 in the File type or Save as type drop down menu select the type of Word format you need 4 Choose
421. t left hand side 3 Select the macro in the Macro name list right hand side 4 Click Run to run the macro Although you can use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to run all macros this is not efficient for frequently run macros A more common technique is to assign a macro to a toolbar button menu item keyboard shortcut or a button embedded in a document While choosing a method it is also good to ask questions such as e Should the macro be available for only one document or globally for all documents e Does the macro pertain to a specific document type such as a Calc document e How frequently will the macro be used Chapter 13 Getting Started withMacros 395 Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name E ognanina extract 1st HyperlinkURL te ExtractSelected FindComponentWithURL FindLastSpace GetCalcLanguageData GetCellAl AA e Figure 309 Use the Macro Selector dialog to run macros The answers will determine where to store the macro and how to make it available For example you will probably not add a rarely used macro to a toolbar To help determine your choices see Table 4 Table 4 Methods for starting a macro OpenOffice org Document Type Document Toolbar Yes Menu Yes Shortcut Yes Event No To add a menu item keyboard shortcut or toolbar icon that calls a macro use the
422. t Misc Payment needs to be changed to 3 cm 1 2 inches 1 Right click Breakfast and choose Position and Size On the Position and Size dialog change Width to 2 cm 2 Repeat for the other listed controls using 3 cm for Misc Payment Caution When changing the position or size of an entire control use the Position and Size dialog or the drag and drop method A When working with either the label or the field but not both at the same time you can use the Properties dialog to make these changes when you want to be exact However you need to be careful not to accidentally select the entire control for use with the Properties dialog or you will apply the exact same values to both the label and field For example if you enter the values for a new position both the field and the label moves to the same position and the field is positioned on top of the label Then you have to move each of them to where you want them To open the Properties window right click a control and select Control from the pop up menu Or you can click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar Just be careful and use Control Z to undo any mistakes you may make Detailed instructions on how to use the Properties window will be in the Base Guide Note Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 275 Step 6 Replace fields with other fields We want to replace the PaymentType field with a List Box Then we can choose the type of payment from the Payment T
423. t it When you type text the upper toolbar includes the usual paragraph attributes indents first line and tab stops You can change the style of all or part of the text The Styles and Formatting window also works here select Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 to launch so you can create Graphics styles that you can reuse for other text frames Graphics styles affect all of the text within a text frame To style parts of the text use direct formating with the toolbar Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 231 Text frames can also have fill colors shadows and other attributes just like any other Draw object You can rotate the frame and write the text at any angle These options are available by right clicking on the object Use the Callout tool located on the Drawing toolbar to create callouts also known as captions or figure labels If you double click on an object or press F2 or the Text icon in the Drawing toolbar when an object is selected text is written in the center of the object and remains within the object Nearly any kind of object contains such an additional text element These texts have slight differences to those in text frames concerning position and hyphenation For more about text see Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Gluepoints and connectors All Draw objects have associated invisible gluepoints which become visible when y
424. t it immediately or to start without showing the splash screen Note Most users will never need to do this There is more than one way to start OOo from the command line depending on whether you have installed a customized version or the standard download from the OOo website If you installed using the download on the OOo website you can start Writer by typing at the command line soffice writer or Swriter Writer will start and create a new document Likewise you can start other OOo components from the command line Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org 19 Type of document Component Command line option Text Writer writer Spreadsheet Calc calc Drawing Draw draw Presentation Impress impress Formula Math math Database Base base Web page Writer web To see a list of options you can use when starting Writer at the command line type soffice Below is a list of some of the more popular options Description help Get a complete list of options nologo Do not show the startup screen show lt odp file gt Start presentation immediately view lt documents Open documents in viewer read only mode minimized Start OOo minimized norestore Suppress restart restore after fatal errors invisible No startup screen no default document and no UI This is useful for third party applications that use functionality provided by OOo If you have a customized version of OOo such as the one provided
425. ted with OpenOffice org 3 x template from which the styles were loaded so you cannot use this method What you need to do is associate the document with the different template You can do this in two ways In both cases for best results the names of styles should be the same in the existing document and the new template If they are not you will need to use Search and Replace to replace old styles with new ones See Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer for more about replacing styles using Search and Replace Method 1 This method includes any graphics and wording such as legal notices that exists in the new template as well as including styles If you don t want this material you need to delete it 1 Use File gt New gt Templates and Documents Choose the template you want If the template has unwanted text or graphics in it delete them 2 Open the document you want to change It opens in a new window Press Control A to select everything in the document Paste into the blank document created in step 1 3 Update the table of contents if there is one Save the file Method 2 Writer only This method does not include any graphics or text from the new template it simply includes styles from the new template and establishes an association between the template and the document 1 Download the Template Changer extension from http extensions services openoffice org and install it as described on page 78 2
426. tents In addition many documents have the front matter such as the table of contents numbered with Roman numerals and the main body of the document numbered in Arabic numerals starting with 1 You can restart page numbering in two ways Method 1 1 Place the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page 2 Choose Format gt Paragraph 3 On the Text Flow tab of the Paragraph dialog Figure 78 on page 108 select Breaks 4 Select Insert and then With Page Style and specify the page style to use 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Method 1 is also useful for numbering the first page of a document with a page number greater than 1 For example Tip you may be writing a book with each chapter in a separate file Chapter 1 may start with page 1 but Chapter 2 could begin with page 25 and Chapter 3 with page 51 Method 2 1 Insert gt Manual break 2 By default Page break is selected on the Insert Break dialog Figure 80 3 Choose the required page Style 4 Select Change page number 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK 112 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Insert Break C Line break anna E Page break E Help Style Figure 80 Restarting page numbering after a manual page break Changing page margins You can change page margins in two ways e Using the page rulers quick and easy but does not have fine control
427. ter whereas Options deals with OOo s settings 3 Select Print only selected sheets This choice affects the print preview export and printing of your spreadsheet Click OK Caution If you keep the selected sheets selected when you enter data on one sheet you enter data on all sheets at the same time A This might not be what you want Selecting the page order details and scale To select the page order details and scale to be printed 1 Select Format gt Page from the main menu 2 Select the Sheet tab Figure 118 3 Make your selections and then click OK Page Order You can set the order in which pages print This is especially useful in a large document for example controlling the print order can save time if you have to collate the document a certain way Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 173 Where a sheet prints on more than one page of paper it can be printed either by column where the first column of pages prints and then the second column and so on or by row as shown in the graphic on the top right of the dialog shown in Figure 132 Page Style Default Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Page order Left to right then down First page number 1 a Print C Column and row headers Charts Grid Drawing objects L_ Notes C Formulas Objects graphics Zero values Scaling factor 100 Figure 132 The Sheet tab o
428. terface Scaling If the text in the help files or on the menus of the OOo user interface is too small or too large you can change it by specifying a scaling factor Sometimes a change here can have unexpected results depending on the screen fonts available on your system However it does not affect the actual font size of the text in your documents User Interface Graphics output Scaling 100 P Use hardware acceleration Icon size and style Use Anti Aliasing Use suctiera tient ar user interface n Mouse positioning Wo automatic positioning yt M eng Middle mouse button Icons in menus peere EEEE Automatic scrolling w Show preview of Fonts Transparency eh Show font history Figure 21 Choosing View options for OOo applications User Interface Icon size and style The first box specifies the display size of toolbar icons Automatic Small or Large The Automatic icon size option uses the setting for your operating system The second box specifies the icon style theme here the Automatic option uses an icon set compatible with your operating system and choice of desktop for example KDE or Gnome on Linux User Interface Use system font for user interface If you prefer to use the system font the default font for your computer and operating system instead of the font provided by OOo for the user interface select this option User interface Screen font antialiasing Not available in Windows not shown in
429. th Page Styles visible You can move this window to a convenient position on the screen or dock it to an edge hold down the Ctrl key and drag it by the title bar to where you want it docked 2 Click on one of the icons at the top left of the Styles and Formatting window to display a list of styles in a particular Category 3 To apply an existing style except for character styles position the insertion point in the paragraph frame or page and then double click on the name of the style in one of these lists To apply a Character style select the characters first At the bottom of the Styles and Formatting window is a dropdown list In Figure 45 the window shows Automatic Tip meaning the list includes only styles applied automatically by OOo You can choose to show all styles or other groups of styles for example only custom styles Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 65 New Style from Selection Update Style Load Styles Fill Format Mode Figure 45 The Styles and Formatting window for Writer showing paragraph styles Using Fill Format mode Use Fill Format to apply a style to many different areas quickly without having to go back to the Styles and Formatting window and double click every time This method is quite useful when you need to format many scattered paragraphs cells or other items with the same style 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and select the style you
430. the As dropdown list from Color to Graphic c Click Browse to find and select the graphic file you want to use and click Open d In the Type section of the Background tab select Area e Click OK to close the dialog The form should look like Figure 215 modes ei as 1 4 ars a pV 8 CABS a ee Sede UB Be I a ee 10 ee 14 00 75 7 de Figure 215 Finished form Step 11 Change the tab order The Tab key moves the cursor from field to field This is much easier to do than to click each field to enter data into it It also permits us to group our expenses into areas before we begin entering data For example all of our meal receipts can be grouped together as can our snacks and also our fuel purchases 1 Control click the Date field 2 Click the Form Design icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Form Design toolbar Figure 216 or choose View gt Toolbars gt Form Design to open this toolbar 3 Click the Activation Order icon circled 282 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x RE aks e amp 2H we RAH Figure 216 Form Design toolbar with Activation Order icon circled 4 Rearrange the order of the fields in the Tab Order window a Find the txtMPayment listing near the bottom of the list and click it b Click the Move Up button until txtPayment is just below fmtMotel c Use the same two steps to put the fields in the same order as in Figure 217 Click OK Controls Move Up
431. the Draw Guide Using the 3D Settings toolbar If the selected Fontwork object is a 3D object you can also use the options on the 3D Settings toolbar You can also change a 2D Fontwork object into a 3D object or change a 3D object into a 2D object by clicking the Extrusion On Off icon on the 3D Settings toolbar For more information see the Draw Guide 3D Settings ee BS be amp J 9 H a l 3D Color Extrusion Depth On Off Direction Tilt Down Up Lighting Surface Left Right Figure 296 3D Settings toolbar Moving and resizing Fontwork objects When you select a Fontwork object eight blue squares known as handles appear around the edge of the object as shown below You can drag these handles to resize the object A yellow dot also appears on the object This s o dot may be along an edge of the object or it may be somewhere else see figure to right for an example If you hover the pointer over this yellow dot the pointer turns into a hand symbol You can drag the dot in different directions to distort the object Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 361 Hovering the pointer over other parts of the object turns the pointer into the usual symbol for dragging the object to another part of the page For precise control of the location and size of the object use the Position and Size dialog 362 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x OpenOf Ticeorg3 Chapter 1 2 Creating
432. the other layout choices After selecting a choice drag the Report Wizard Note window out of the way so that you can see what you have selected Move the cursor over the Title Bar of the window and then drag and drop Vacation fuel report 1 Create a query containing only fuel bought on the days of the vacation a Open a query in Design View b Follow the steps for adding tables in Add tables on page 296 to add the Fuel table c Inthe Fuel table double click Date and FuelCost to enter them in the table at the bottom of the query d In the Criterion cell of the Date field type the following BETWEEN 5 25 200 7 AND 5 26 200 7 Field Date FuelCost Table Fuel Fuel Sort x x Criterion BETWEEN 05 25 2007 AND 05 26 2007 Figure 246 Setting the criterion for a query 2 Save name and close the query Suggestion Vacation Fuel Purchases When using dates in a query enter them in numerical form MM DD YYYY or DD MM YYYY depending upon your language s default setting for dates my default setting is MM DD YYYY Fach date must have a before and after it Hence May 25 2007 is written 05 25 2007 or 25 5 2007 depending upon your language s default setting for dates Tip 3 Open a new report e Right click the Vacation Fuel Purchases query e Select Report Wizard from the pop up menu When a new report is opened in this way the query used to Note open it is automatically sele
433. the whole sheet needs to be printed later Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Remove This removes all defined print ranges on the sheet After the print range is removed the default page break lines will appear on the screen Editing a print range At any time you can directly edit the print range for example to remove or resize part of the print range Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit See Chapter 2 of the Calc Guide for details Printing rows or columns on every page If a sheet is printed on multiple pages you can set up certain rows or columns to repeat on each printed page For example if the top two rows of the sheet as well as column A need to be printed on all pages do the following 1 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit On the Edit Print Ranges dialog type the rows in the text entry box under Rows to repeat For example to repeat rows 1 and 2 type 1 2 In the Rows to repeat list none changes to user defined 176 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Edit Print Ranges Print range none CA s a Rows to repeat T Columns to repeat Figure 133 Specifying repeating rows 2 Columns can also repeat type the columns in the text entry box under Columns to repeat For example to repeat column A type A In the Columns to repeat list none changes to user defined 3 Click OK You do not need to select the entire range of the rows to be Note
434. the wizard have been that way also However you can use multiple words as the name of a field label or table We will do so when we create a list box for each of the payment type controls Note 1 Control click the SnackNo label Do one of the following e Right click the SnackNo label and select Control from the pop up menu e Or click the Control icon in the Form Control toolbar Figure 202 274 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 2 The dialog that opens is labeled Properties Label Field It contains all of the properties of the selected label e In the Label selection edit the label to Snack No e Close the Properties dialog 3 Use the same procedure to change these labels as well BPayment to Payment LPayment to Payment SPayment to Payment Miscellaneous to Misc SnackCost to Snack Cost MPayment to Payment MiscPayment to Misc Payment and MiscNotes to Misc Notes You can modify all of the listings in the Properties window For example if you change the Alignment from Left to Center the Tip word or words in the label are centered within the label When you have some time you might want to experiment with different settings just to see the results you get Step 5 Change the widths of the labels and fields We want the following controls to be 2 cm wide 0 8 inches Breakfast Lunch Supper Odometer Snack No Tolls Snack Cost Motel and Misc All of the payment fields were changed in step 2 bu
435. them Presentation Wizard Sa C Empty presentation From template O Open existing presentation Preview _ Do not show this wizard again Figure 146 Choosing the type of presentation 1 Select Empty Presentation under Type It creates a presentation from scratch From Template uses a template design already created as the basis for a new presentation The wizard changes to show a list of available templates Choose the template you want Note Open Existing Presentation continues work on a previously created presentation The wizard changes to show a list of existing presentations Choose the presentation you want Both of these options are covered in the Impress Guide 194 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 2 Click Next Figure 147 shows the Presentation Wizard step 2 as it appears if you selected Empty Presentation at step 1 If you selected From Template an example slide is shown in the Preview box Presentation Wizard 2 Select a slide design Presentation Backgrounds iw lt Original gt Dark Blue with Orange Subte Accents Select an output medium Angne Screen Overhead sheet C Slide O Paper Figure 147 Selecting a slide design E Preview 3 Choose a design under Select a slide design The slide design section gives you two main choices Presentation Backgrounds and Presentations Each one has a list of choices for slide designs If
436. them Details are in the Writer Guide Not all changes are recorded For example changing a tab Tip stop from align left to align right and changes in formulas equations or linked graphics are not recorded 126 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Using fields Fields are extremely useful features of Writer They are used for data that changes in a document such as the current date or the total number of pages and for inserting document properties such as name author and date of last update Fields are the basis of cross referencing see below automatic numbering of figures tables headings and other elements and a wide range of other functions far too many to describe here See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for details Linking to another part of a document If you type in cross references to other parts of a document those references can easily get out of date if you reorganize the order of topics add or remove material or reword a heading Writer provides two ways to ensure that your references are up to date by inserting links to other parts of the same document or to a different document e Hyperlinks e Cross references The two methods have the same result if you Control click the link when the document is open in Writer you are taken directly to the cross referenced item However they also have major differences e The text in a hyperlink does not automatically update if you cha
437. then select the Use a Java runtime environment option and if necessary choose one of the JREs listed Online Update options On the OpenOffice org Online Update page Figure 18 you can choose whether and how often to have OOo check the OOo website for program updates If the Check for updates automatically option is selected an icon appears at the right hand end of the menu bar when an update is available Click this icon to open a dialog where you can choose to download the update Online Update Options Check for updates automatically Every Day Every Week Every Month Last checked 21 09 07 18 10 00 Check now _ Download updates automatically Download destination D Download Change Figure 33 Configuring Online Update If the Download updates automatically option is selected the download starts when you click the icon To change the download destination click the Change button and select the required folder in the file browser window Improvement program On the OpenOffice org Improvement Program page you can choose whether or not to participate in the OpenOffice org Improvement Program which collects anonymous statistics about how you use OOo Chapter 2 Setting up OpenOffice org 51 Choosing options for loading and saving documents You can set the Load Save options to suit the way you work If the Options dialog is not already open click Tools gt Options Click the sig
438. ting and copying text in other applications You can use the mouse or the keyboard for these operations You can copy or move text within a document or between documents by dragging or by using menu selections icons or keyboard shortcuts You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a Writer document To move cut and paste selected text using the mouse drag it to the new location and release it To copy selected text hold down the Control key while dragging The text retains the formatting it had before dragging When you paste text the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it If you click on the Paste icon any formatting the text has such as bold or italics is retained Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may also be placed into frames or tables If you do not like the results click the Undo icon or press Control Z To make the pasted text take on the formatting of the surrounding text where it is being pasted choose either e Edit gt Paste Special or e Click the triangle to the right of the Paste icon or e Click the Paste icon without releasing the left mouse button Then select Unformatted text from the resulting menu The range of choices on the Paste Special menu varies depending on the origin and formatting of the text or other object to be pasted See Figure 69 for an example with text on the clipboard cS i a He e 3 OpenOffice org Writer DDE lin
439. to Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org Writer gt General settings Measurement unit inch we Tab stops 0 50 Figure 72 Selecting a default tab stop interval You can also set or change the measurement unit for rulers in the current document by right clicking on the ruler to open a list of units as Shown in Figure 77 Click on one of them to change the ruler to that unit The selected setting applies only to that ruler I a milimetre centimetre i inch l point pica Figure 73 Ruler showing default tab stops 100 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Checking spelling and grammar Writer provides a spelling checker which can be used in two ways Ac AutoSpellcheck checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words When the word is corrected the line disappears lt f To perform a separate spelling check on the document or a text selection click the Spelling and Grammar button This checks the document or selection and opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog if any misspelled words are found Here are some more features of the spelling checker e You can right click on a word with a wavy underline to open a context menu If you select from the suggested words on the menu the selection will replace the misspelled word in your text Other menu options are discussed below e You can change the dictionary language for example Spanish Fre
440. to duplicate existing content Start by selecting the cell to copy then drag the mouse in any direction or hold down the Shift key and click in the last cell you want to fill and then choose Edit gt Fill and the direction in which you want to copy Up Down Left or Right Caution Choices that are not available are grayed out but you can still choose the opposite direction from what you intend which A could cause you to overwrite cells accidentally A shortcut way to fill cells is to grab the handle in the lower right hand corner of the cell and drag it in the direction you Tip want to fill If the cell contains a number the number will fill in series If the cell contains text the same text will fill in the direction you chose A Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Original Ciriginal WO CO sw OO Ls U N e Figure 115 Using the Fill tool Using a fill series A more complex use of the Fill tool is to use a fill series The default lists are for the full and abbreviated days of the week and the months of the year but you can create your own lists as well To add a fill series to a spreadsheet select the cells to fill choose Edit gt Fill gt Series In the Fill Series dialog select AutoFill as the Series Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 157 type and enter as the Start value an item from any defined series The selected cells then fill in the
441. to include in the PDF the type of compression to use for images which affects the quality of images in the PDF and other options General Initial View User Interface Links Security Range all O Fages Selection Images O Lossless compression JPEG compression Quality 90 ain _ Reduce image resolution 200 GFI General _ FPDF A 1a _ Tagged POF Create POF Form Submit Format FOF a Export bookmarks a Export comments _ Export automatically inserted blank pages Figure 272 General page of PDF Options dialog Range section e All Exports the entire document e Pages To export a range of pages use the format 3 6 pages 3 to 6 To export single pages use the format 7 9 11 pages 7 9 and 11 You can also export a combination of page ranges and single pages by using a format like 3 6 8 10 12 e Selection Exports whatever material is selected Images section e Lossless compression Images are stored without any loss of quality Tends to make large files when used with photographs Recommended for other kinds of images or graphics 330 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x JPEG compression Allows for varying degrees of quality A setting of 90 works well with photographs small file size little perceptible loss of quality Reduce image resolution Lower DPI dots per inch images have lower quality For viewing on a computer screen generally a resolution of 72dpi for Windows or 96dpi GNU Linux
442. to some place several pages later use page styles for basic layout Place en a articles in linked frames and anchor frame on graphics to fixed positions on the page if necessary For a document with terms and translations to appear side by side in What appear to be columns use a table to keep items lined up and so you can type in both columns Thi pigti a prah Je rice Chee rire coe veetee SCAU UU PECERE AUER EE LE 3 A A EL 110 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Creating headers and footers A header is an area that appears at the top of a page A footer appears at the bottom of the page Information such as page numbers inserted into a header or footer displays on every page of the document with that page style To insert a header choose Insert gt Header gt Default or the page style if not Default Other information such as document titles and chapter titles is often put into the header or footer These items are best added as fields That way if something changes the headers and footers are updated automatically Here is one common example To insert the document title into the header 1 Choose File gt Properties gt Description and type a title for your document 2 Add a header Insert gt Header gt Default 3 Place the cursor in the header part of the page 4 Choose Insert gt Fields gt Title The title should appear ona gray background which does not show when printed a
443. tp www openoffice org license html What is open source The ideals of open source software can be explained by the four essential rights which are embodied within the Free Software Foundation s General Public License GPL e The right to use the software for any purpose e Freedom to redistribute the software for free or for a fee e Access to the complete source code of the program that is the blueprints e The right to modify any part of the source or use portions of it in other programs Another view of this philosophy comes from the Open Source Definiton The basic idea behind open source is very simple When programmers can read redistribute and modify the source code for a piece of software the software evolves People improve it people adapt it people fix bugs And this can happen at a speed that if one is used to the slow pace of conventional software development seems astonishing 426 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x For more information on Free and Open Source software visit these websites Open Source Initiative OSI http www opensource org Free Software Foundation FSF http www gnu org What is OpenDocument Starting with Version 2 0 OpenOffice org by default saves documents in Open Document Format ODF OpenOffice org 3 has adopted version 1 2 of the OpenDocument standard OpenDocument is an XML based file format for office documents text documents spre
444. transition the new slide is previewed in the Slide Design area including its transition effect Tip Running the slide show To run the slide show do one of the following e Click Slide Show gt Slide Show e Click the Slide Show button on the Presentation toolbar Presentation x Slide s Slide Design Slide Show Figure 154 Presentation Toolbar e Press F5 or FY If the slide transition is Automatic after x seconds let the slide show run by itself If the slide transition is On mouse click do one of the following to move from one slide to the next e Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to go to the next slide or to go back to the previous one e Click the mouse to move to the next slide e Press the spacebar on the keyboard to advance to the next slide Right click anywhere on the screen to open a menu from which you can navigate the slides and set other options To exit the slide show at any time including at the end press the Esc key Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 215 OpenOf Tice org3 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw Vector Drawing in OpenOffice org What ts Draw Draw is a vector graphics drawing program It offers a series of powerful tools that enable you to quickly create all sorts of graphics Vector graphics store and display an image as vectors two points and a line rather than a collections of pixels dots on the screen Vector graphics allow for easier storage an
445. tri 1 for the Heading 1 style and Ctrl 2 for Heading 2 You can modify these shortcuts and create your own 1 Click Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Keyboard page of the Customize dialog Figure 321 opens Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Shortcut keys C OpenOffice org Writer List 1 Bold Double Underline Centered Numbering Modify OpenOffice org Macrc El Styles eee Ies PageStyles 3 NumberingStyles hal Figure 321 Defining keyboard shortcuts for applying styles Chapter 14 Customizing OpenOffice org 413 2 To have the shortcut key assignment available only with one component for example Writer select that component s name in the upper right corner of the page otherwise select OpenOffice org button to make it available to every component 3 Choose the shortcut keys you want to assign a style to In this example we have chosen Ctrl 9 4 In the Functions section at the bottom of the dialog scroll down in the Category list to Styles Click the sign to expand the list of styles 5 Choose the category of style This example uses a paragraph style but you can also choose character styles and others The Function list will display the names of the available styles for the selected category The example shows some of OOo s predefined styles 6 To assign Ctrl 9 to be the shortcut key combination for the List 1 style select List 1 in the Function list a
446. troduction to Styles and 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide e Use the Numbering and Bullets icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar see Figure 74 This method is described here To produce a numbered or bulleted list select the paragraphs in the list and then click the appropriate icon on the toolbar It is a matter of personal preference whether you type your Note information first then apply Numbering Bullets or apply them as you type 106 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Using the Bullets and Numbering toolbar You can create nested lists where one or more list items has a sublist under it as in an outline by using the buttons on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar Figure 76 You can move items up or down the list or create subpoints and even change the style of bullets Use View gt Toolbars gt Bullets and Numbering to see the toolbar The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt View Bullets and Numbering oi ES OMS TT Tb te YB te cee ERED LAELA i 12 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 43 144 1 Bullets On Off 6 Move Up One Level with 10 Move Down 2 Numbering On Off Sub points 11 Move Up in Sub points 3 Numbering Off 7 Move Down One Level with 12 Move Down in Sub points Sub points 4 Up One Level 8 Insert Unnumbered Entry 13 Restart Numbering 9 Move Up 14 Bullets and Numbering 5 Down O
447. trol click the Misc Notes field The green handles should surround the field but not its label 2 Click the Control icon to open the Properties window Figure 210 3 Scroll down to the Scrollbars setting Change the selection from None to Vertical in this dropdown list General Data Events Background color Boat a Border colf Deut ld Text tyPO cscccscesnsecceee Text lines end with SCIOMBGSMS cccccceesceeee Vertical OO p None assword character Horizontal Hide selection Additional information Help tert ccsccssessseeee Halp eg Caen ee tenements Figure 210 Scrollbar selections in the Properties window 4 Close the Properties window 5 Lengthen the Misc Notes field by moving the cursor over the middle green handle at the bottom of the field and dragging down until the length is 6 cm 2 4 inches 278 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Step 8 Change labels and fields in the subform The subform is located at the bottom of the form We want to widen the Date column change the field in the PaymentType column to a list box and change the label for the PaymentType column to two words To widen the Date column move the mouse pointer over the dividing line between the Date and FuelCost columns When the pointer changes shape click and drag to move the divider to the right To change the PaymentType column 1 Right cl
448. ts Documents Main layout Layout details Style Web site information 0 Preview 4 Choose the information to be listed and the screen resolution Click Next Web Wizard Steps Customize the selected layout Introduction Include the Following information For each document in the table of contents Documents l _ File name _ File format Main layout Description File Format icon Author Number of pages Creation date Size in KB Last change date Web site information Optimize the layout For screen resolution Preview 640x460 600x600 10245768 Chapter 12 Creating WebPages 371 5 Select a style for the page Use the drop down list to choose different styles and color combinations You can browse to a background image and icon set from the Gallery Click Next Web Wizard Steps Select a style for the table of contents page Introduction Style Documents Background image lt no background image gt o Main layout Layout details The icon set is used For presentations in HTML Format Web site information Preview Document Creation Date Last Change Date Filename 6 Enter general information such as Title and HTML Metadata information Click Next Web Wizard Steps sd Enter general information for your web site 1 Introduction Title Test Website Documents Main layout HTML Metadata Layout details Description Test Data Style E ma
449. ty area of the Draw screen in order to deselect the object Paste from the clipboard to put a copy of the object in its original location and now you have a mirror copy Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 243 Distorting an image There are three tools on the Effects menu that let you drag the corners and edges of an object to distort the image The Distort tool distorts an object in perspective the Set to Circle slant and Set in Circle perspective tools both create a pseudo three dimensional effect See Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Dynamic gradients You can control transparency gradients in the same manner as color gradients Both types of gradient can be used together With a transparency gradient the direction and degree of an object s fill color changes from opaque to transparent in a regular gradient the fill changes from one color to another but the degree of transparency remains the same See Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Duplication Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a set of changes such as color or rotation to the duplicates The result of a duplication is anew group To start duplication click on an object or group and choose Edit gt Duplicate The dialog shown in Figure 180 appears The options chosen in Figure 180 applied toa Number of copies a o blue rectangle produce the following result Duplicate Placement axis 0 50cm axis 0 5
450. u can change the margins directly on the rulers by dragging them with the mouse 218 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x e PEPEPEPE E Millimeter the rulers right click on one of the Centimeter rulers Figure 3 The two rulers can Meter have different units ai Foot A Miles Point ia Pica Figure 157 Ruler units Status bar The Status bar Figures 158 and 159 is located at the bottom of the workspace In addition to fields common to several OOo components it includes several Draw specific fields For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing OpenOffice org in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Draw in the Draw Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the ruler units This unit is defined in Tools gt Note Options gt OpenOffice org Draw gt General where you can also change the scale of the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the status bar Rectangle selected cE 156 4 63 495x290 Information Position Unsaved etait changes signature Figure 158 Left end of the Draw status bar Slide 1 1 Layout Default O e __ 75 d Slide Page Zoom slider oom number style percent Figure 159 Right end of Draw status bar Toolbars You can display or hide the various Draw toolbars according to your needs To display or hide a toolbar click View gt
451. u may see the message box shown below Click Keep Current Format This document may contain Formatting or content that cannot be sawed in the Text CS File Format Do you want to save the document in this Format anyway Use the latest ODF file Format and be sure all formatting and content is saved correctly Save in ODF Format Ask when not saving in ODF Format 4 In the Export of text files dialog Figure 102 select the options you want and then click OK 140 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Export of text files Field options DK Character set a Field delimiter Save cell content as shown Fixed column width Figure 102 Choosing options when exporting to Text CSV Navigating within spreadsheets Calc provides many ways to navigate within a spreadsheet from cell to cell and sheet to sheet You can generally use whatever method you prefer Going to a particular cell Using the mouse Place the mouse pointer over the cell and click Using a cell reference Click on the little inverted black triangle just to the right of the Name Box Figure 98 The existing cell reference will be highlighted Type the cell reference of the cell you want to go to and press Enter Or just click into the Name box backspace over the existing cell reference and type in the cell reference you want Using the Navigator To open the Navigator click its icon on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or
452. u will need to change these back to your custom heading styles This is a bug Deleting styles You cannot remove delete any of OOo s predefined styles from a document or template even if they are not in use You can remove any user defined custom styles but before you do you should make sure the styles are not in use If an unwanted style is in use you will want to replace it with a substitute style To delete unwanted styles right click on them one at a time in the Styles and Formatting window and click Delete on the pop up menu If the style is in use you receive a warning message f Make sure the style is not in use before deletion Otherwise Caution all objects with that style will return to the default style and A retain their formatting as manual formatting This can be a problem in a long document If the style is not in use you receive a confirmation message click Yes Using a template to create a document To use a template to create a document 1 From the main menu choose File gt New gt Templates and Documents The Templates and Documents dialog opens See Figure 52 2 In the box on the left click the Templates icon if it is not already selected A list of template folders appears in the center box 3 Double click the folder that contains the template that you want to use A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears in the center box Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templat
453. ulers active View gt Ruler Step 1 Change the Date field 1 Control click the Date field to select it 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right side It should change to a double headed arrow 3 Hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor to the right until the length is 6 cm The vertical dashed line is lined up with the 6 Release the mouse button 4 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar Figure 202 The Properties Date Field window opens Each line contains a property of the field 2 2 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Figure 202 Form Controls toolbar Scroll down to the Date format property This is a dropdown list with Standard short as the default setting Click it to open the list Select the Standard long entry Scroll down to the Dropdown property Its default setting is No It is also a dropdown list Click to open the list Select Yes To see what the Date field will look like click the Form Mode Tip On Off icon the second icon from the left in Figure 202 You can do this any time you want to see the form with the changes you have made Step 2 Shorten the width of some fields All of the fields with a label containing the word payment are too wide They need shortening before the controls are moved 1 Control click the BPayment field Figure 203 BPayment Figure 203 Selecting a field 2 Move the cursor over the middle green
454. ully customize the appearance of a list changing the bullet type or numbering for the entire list or for single entry All of the changes can be made using the Bullets and Numbering dialog which is accessed by selecting Format gt Bullets and Numbering or by clicking on the Bullets and Numbering icon on the text formatting toolbar For the entire list 1 Select the entire list or click on the gray border of the text box so that just the green resizing handles are displayed 2 Select Format gt Bullets and Numbering or click on the Bullets and Numbering icon dia 3 The Bullets and Numbering dialog contains five tabs Bullets Numbering type Graphics Position and Customize e Ifa bullet list is needed select the desired bullet style from the six default styles available on the Bullets page e Ifa graphics style is needed select one from those available on the Graphics page e Ifa numbered list is needed select one of the 6 default numbering styles on the Numbering type page 210 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x For a single line in the list 1 Click anywhere in the line to place the cursor in it 2 Follow steps 2 4 of the previous instruction set If the list was created in an AutoLayout text box then an alternative way to change the entire list is to modify the Outline styles Changes made to the outline style will apply to all the slides using them Sometimes this is what you want sometimes it is not so some
455. use of queries we will use two different methods e Using our CD Collection table we will create a list of albums by a particular artist We will do this using the Wizard e The information we might want from the Fuel table includes what our fuel economy is We will do this using the Design View Queries that require calculations are best created with the Design view Using the Wizard to create a query Queries created by the wizard provide a list or lists of information based upon what one wants to know It is possible to obtain a single answer or multiple answers depending upon the circumstances In the main database window Figure 183 click the Queries icon in the Databases section then in the Tasks section click Use Wizard to Create Query The Query Wizard window opens Figure 226 The information we want is what albums are by a certain musical group or individual the album s author We can include when each album was bought Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 293 When working with a query more than one table can be used Since different tables may contain the same field names the Not format for naming fields in a query is Table name field name with a period between the table name and the field name For example The Lunch field of the Vacation table used in a query has the name Vacation Lunch Step 1 Select the fields 1 Select the CD Collection table from the dropdown list of tables 2 Select fie
456. ve only if the user s PDF viewer Note respects the settings Exporting to other formats OOo uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find what you want under Save As look under Export as well OpenOffice org can export files to XHTML In addition OOo Draw and OOo Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the Export button E mailing documents OOo provides several ways to quickly and easily send documents as an e mail attachment in one of three formats OpenDocument OO0o s default format Microsoft Office formats or PDF To send the current document in OpenDocument format 1 Choose File gt Send gt Document as E mail OpenOffice org opens the e mail program specified in Tools gt Options gt Internet gt E mail The document is attached 2 In your e mail program enter the recipient subject and any text you want to add then send the e mail File gt Send gt E mail as OpenDocument Text or Spreadsheet or Presentation has the same effect If you choose E mail as Microsoft Word Excel or Powerpoint OOo first creates a file in one of those formats and then opens your e mail program with the file attached Similarly if you c
457. with Writer 97 If you click Find All OOo selects all instances of the search Tip text in the document Similarly if you click Replace All OOo will replace all matches i Use Replace All with caution otherwise you may end up with Caution some hilarious and highly embarrassing mistakes A mistake A with Replace All might require a manual word by word search to fix Inserting special characters A special character is one not found on a standard English keyboard For example 34 are all special characters To insert a special character 1 Place the cursor where you want the character to appear 2 Choose Insert gt Special Character to open the Special Characters dialog Figure 71 3 Select the characters from any font or mixture of fonts you wish to insert in order then click OK The selected characters are Shown in the lower left of the dialog As you select a character it is Shown on the lower right along with its numerical code Different fonts include different special characters If you do Note not find a particular special character try changing the Font selection Special Characters Font Times New Roman wt x Subset Basic Greek Figure 71 The Special Characters window where you can insert special characters Notice that the characters selected appear in the bottom left Tip corner of the window 98 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Inserting
458. y toolbar Figure 231 The results are in Figure 239 Fuekuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FiuellD Fue FuellD Distance End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading Fuelua 6 430 778 7 704 21 a5 ME OOOO 19 570 1032 3 178 7 1 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 239 Result of running the fuel economy query 300 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Notice that not all of the last column label is visible because some of the labels are long We can fix this problem by using an alias for many of the fields The labels are replaced by their aliases 2 Add Aliases Type in the aliases as they are listed in Figure 240 FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer Quanity Begin End End Reading End Reading Fuel End Reading End Reading Fuel Economy Figure 240 Query table with aliases added 3 Run the query again The results are in Figure 235 Begin End End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 P87 f04 2 1 P45 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 1 293 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 241 Query run with aliases We really do not need the column showing the difference between the FuellID fields from the table and query so we will hide it While it will not be visible it will still be used in the calculations 4 Hide a field that does not need to be seen Remove the check
459. you want to use one of these other than lt Original gt click it to select it e The types of Presentation Backgrounds are shown in Figure 147 By clicking an item you will see a preview of the slide design in the Preview window Impress contains three choices under Presentations lt Original gt Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy e lt Original gt is for a blank presentation slide design e Both Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy have their own prepackaged slide designs Each design appears in the Preview window when its name is clicked Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy are prepackaged presentation templates They can be used to create a presentation by choosing From template in the first step Figure 146 Note Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 195 4 Select how the presentation will be used under Select an output medium Most often presentations are created for computer screen display Select Screen 5 Click Next The Presentation Wizard step 3 appears Presentation Wizard rz Select a slide transition Mo Effect Speed Medium Select the presentation type Default O Automatic uration of pause Preview Figure 148 Selecting a slide design 6 Choose the desired slide transition from the Effect drop down menu 7 Select the desired speed for the transition betwe
460. your document or you can insert them into a frame 352 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x You can also use the drawing tools to annotate photographs screen captures or other illustrations produced by other programs but this is not recommended because e You cannot include images in a group with drawing objects so they may get out of alignment in your document e If you convert a document to another format such as HTML the drawing objects and the graphics will not remain associated they are saved separately In general if you need to create complex drawings it is recommended to use OpenOffice org Draw which includes many more features such as layers styles and so on Creating drawing objects To begin using the drawing tools display the Drawing toolbar Figure 288 by clicking View gt Toolbars gt Drawing If you are planning to use the drawing tools repeatedly you can tear off this toolbar and move it to a convenient place on the window eT eee 123 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 Select 5 Freeform Line 9 Symbol Shapes 13 Stars 2 Line 6 Text 10 Block arrows 14 Points 3 Rectangle 7 Callouts 11 Flowcharts 15 Fontwork Gallery 4 Ellipse 8 Basic Shapes 12 Callouts 16 From File 17 Extrusion On Off Figure 288 The Drawing toolbar To use a drawing tool 1 Click in the document where you want the drawing to be anchored You can change the anchor later if necessary 2 Select the tool from the Drawing t
461. ype table rather than having to manually enter the type In my case each of my payment types begins with a different letter If I enter the first letter of the payment type the rest of the word automatically appears I can then go to the next field 1 Control click the Payment field for Breakfast The green handles appear around the field but not around the Label Figure 205 Breakfast Payment rg eS Figure 205 Selecting a field of a control 2 Right click within the green handles and select Replace with gt List Box 3 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Properties List Box dialog 4 On the General tab scroll down to the Dropdown selection Change the No to Yes Figure 206 General Data Events Alignment 00 000008 Left x Background color __ 0xO0ODDDDDD Z E Border ccccccccccccccccecceee _ 3D look en can ROTETE Yo ee T ss Multiselection Default selection Additional information el Se Highs WAL ccercceccccnes Figure 206 Dropdown list open to reveal choices 5 Click the Data tab e Type of list contents is a dropdown list Change it to Sql 276 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Ge neral Data Events Data field IBPayment jg Type of list contents List content ogl Native Tablefields Figure 207 Type of list contents dropdown list e Type
462. yperlink creates a new document Hyperlink I Hyperlink type F5 Web Telnet Internet Target Mail amp News Further settings Frame Document Text Mame Hew Document Figure 298 Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links The top right part of the dialog changes according to the choice made for the hyperlink type A full description of all the choices and their interactions is beyond the scope of this chapter Here is a summary of the most common choices For an Internet type hyperlink choose the type of hyperlink choose between Web FTP or Telnet and enter the required web address URL 366 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x For a Mail and News type hyperlink specify whether it is a mail or news link the receiver address and for email also the subject For a Document type hyperlink specify the document path the Open File button opens a file browser leave this blank if you want to link to a target in the same document Optionally specify the target in the document for example a specific slide Click on the Target icon to open the Navigator where you can select the target or if you know the name of the target you can type it into the box For a New Document type hyperlink specify whether to edit the newly created document immediately Edit now or just create it Edit later and the type of document to create text spreadsheet etc The Select path
463. ypes of indexes supplied with Writer include those for illustrations tables and objects and you can even create a user defined index For example you might want an index containing only the scientific names of species mentioned in the text and a separate index containing only the common names of species Before creating some types of indexes you first need to create index entries embedded in your Writer document Working with graphics Graphics in Writer are of three basic types e Image files including photos drawings scanned images and others e Diagrams created using OOo s drawing tools e Charts created using OOo s Chart facility See Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork in this book and Chapter 8 Working with Graphics in the Writer Guide 116 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x Printing from Writer Writer provides a range of choices when printing Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon to send the entire document to the default printer defined for your computer You can change the action of the Print File Directly icon to send the document to the printer defined for the document Note instead of the default printer for the computer Go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and select the Load printer settings with the document option Controlling printing For more control over printing use File gt Print to display the Print dialog Figure 83 Print Printe
464. ze Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit View Format Tools Window Help Fonts Fant Sze Spacing Alignment Text Mode Figure 266 Changing the font size for a formula 320 Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 x 2 Select a larger font size under Base size top most entry Font Sizes Ea Base size OK Relative sizes Cancel Text Default Indexes Functions Operators Limits il Figure 267 Edit Base size top to make a formula bigger The result of this change is illustrated in Figure 268 Betore mT 3 14159 After mT 3 14159 Figure 268 Result of changing the base font size Formula layout The most difficult part of using OOo Math comes when writing complicated formulas This section provides some advice Brackets are your friends OOo Math knows nothing about order of operation You must use brackets to state the order of operations explicitly Consider the following example Result 2 over x 1 2 over x 1 Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 321 Equations over more than one line Suppose you want to type an equation covering more than one line For x 3 example oi Your first reaction would be to simply press the Enter key However if you press the Enter key though the markup goes to a new line the resulting equation does not You must type the newline command explicitly This is illustrated in the table below Result 3 newline

OpenOffice.org OpenOffice - 3.2 Getting Started Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents